Class 11 NEET Physics Notes

Class 11 NEET Physics Notes

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Notes

Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics

Kinetic Theory Of Gases:

The kinetic theory of gases is based on the following basic assumptions.

  1. A gas consists of a very large number of molecules. These molecules are identical, perfectly elastic, and hard spheres. They are so small that the volume of molecules is negligible compared with the volume of the gas.
  2. Molecules do not have any preferred direction of motion, motion is completely random.
  3. These molecules travel in straight lines and free motion most of the time. The time of the collision between any two molecules is very small.
  4. The collision between molecules and the wall of the container is perfectly elastic. It means kinetic energy is conserved in each collision.
  5. The path traveled by a molecule between two collisions is called the free path and the mean of this distance traveled by a molecule is called the mean free path.
  6. The motion of molecules is governed by Newton’s law of motion
  7. The effect of gravity on the motion of molecules is negligible.

Expression For The Pressure Of A Gas

Let us suppose that a gas is enclosed in a cubical box having length l. Let there be ‘ N ‘ identical molecules, each having mass ‘ m’ since the molecules are of the same mass and perfectly elastic, so their mutual collisions result in the interchange of velocities only.

Only collisions with the walls of the container contribute to the pressure of the gas molecules. Let us focus on a molecule having velocity v1 and components of velocity vx1, vy1, and vz1 along the x, y, and z-axis as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Expression For The Pressure Of A Gas

The change in momentum of the molecule after one collision with wall BCHE

⇒ \(m v_{x_1}-\left(-m v_{x_1}\right)=2 m v_{x_1}\)

The time taken between the successive impacts on the face BCHE = \(\frac{\text { distance }}{\text { velocity }}\)

⇒ \(\frac{2 \ell}{v_{\mathrm{x}_1}}\)

Time rate of change of momentum due to collision = \(\frac{\text { change in momentum }}{\text { time taken }}\)

⇒ \(\frac{2 m v_{\mathrm{x}_1}}{2 \ell / \mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{x}_1}}=\frac{\mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{x}_1}^2}{\ell}\)

Hence the net force on the wall BCHE due to the impact of n molecules of the gas is :

⇒ \(\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{x}}=\frac{\mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{x}_1}^2}{\ell}+\frac{\mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{x}_2}^2}{\ell}+\frac{\mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{x} 3}^2}{\ell}+\ldots \ldots \ldots .+\frac{\mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{n}}}^2}{\ell}\)

⇒ \(\frac{m}{\ell}\left(v_{x_1}^2+v_{x_2}^2+v_{x_3}^2+\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots+v_{x_n}^2\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{mN}}{\ell}<\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{x}}^2>\)

where < V2x > = mean square velocity in x-direction. Since molecules do not favor any particular direction therefore

⇒\(\left\langle\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{x}}^2\right\rangle=\left\langle\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{y}}^2\right\rangle=\left\langle\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{z}}^2\right\rangle\)

But

⇒\(\left\langle\mathrm{v}^2\right\rangle=\left\langle\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{x}}^2\right\rangle+\left\langle\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{y}}^2\right\rangle+\left\langle\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{z}}^2\right\rangle\)

⇒ \(\left\langle\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{x}}^2\right\rangle\)

⇒ \(\frac{\left\langle\mathrm{v}^2\right\rangle}{3}\) Pressure is equal to force divided by area.

P = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{x}}}{\ell^2}=\frac{\mathrm{M}}{3 \ell^3}\left\langle\mathrm{v}^2\right\rangle=\frac{\mathrm{M}}{3 \mathrm{~V}}\left\langle\mathrm{v}^2\right\rangle\).

Pressure is independent of x, y, and z directions.

Where l3 = volume of the container = V

M = total mass of the gas, <c2 > = mean square velocity of molecules

⇒ \(P=\frac{1}{3} \rho\left\langle v^2\right\rangle\)

As PV = nRT , then total translational K.E. of gas = \(\frac{1}{2} M<v^2>=\frac{3}{2} P V=\frac{3}{2} n R T\)

Translational kinetic energy of 1 molecule = \(\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{kT}\)(it is independent of nature of gas) kT

⇒ \(\left\langle v^2\right\rangle=\frac{3 P}{\rho}\)

or \(v_{rm s}=\sqrt{\frac{3 P}{\rho}}=\sqrt{\frac{3 R T}{M_{\text {mole }}}}=\sqrt{\frac{3 k T}{m}}\)

Where vrms is the root mean square velocity of the gas.

Pressure exerted by the gas is P = \(\frac{1}{3} \rho\left\langle v^2\right\rangle=\frac{2}{3} \times \frac{1}{2} \rho<v^2>\)

or \(P=\frac{2}{3} E, E=\frac{3}{2} P\)

Thus, the total translational kinetic energy per unit volume (it is called energy density) of the gas is numerically equal to \(\frac{3}{2} k T\) times the pressure exerted by the gas.

Important Points

  1. \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{rms}} \propto \sqrt{\mathrm{T}} \text { and } \mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{rms}} \propto \frac{1}{\sqrt{\mathrm{M}_{\text {mole }}}}\)
  2. At absolute zero, the motion of all molecules of the gas stops.
  3. At higher temperatures and low pressure or higher temperatures and low density, a real gas behaves as an ideal gas.

Maxwell’s Distribution Law

Distribution Curve – A plot of \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}(\mathrm{v})}{\mathrm{dv}}\)(number of molecules per unit speed interval) against c is known as Maxwell’s distribution curve. The total area under the curve is given by the integral.

⇒ \(\int_0^{\infty} \frac{d N(v)}{d v} d v=\int_0^{\infty} d N(v)=N\)

  • Figure shows the distribution curves for two different temperatures. At any temperature, the number of molecules in a given speed interval dv is given by the area under the curve in that interval (shown shaded).
  • This number increases, as the speed increases, upto a maximum and then decreases asymptotically toward zero.
  • Thus, a maximum number of the molecules have speed lying within a small range centered about the speed corresponding to the peak (A) of the curve. This speed is called the ‘most probable speed’ vP or vmp. dN(v)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Distribution Curve

The distribution curve is asymmetrical about its peak (the most probable speed vP) because the lowest possible speed is zero, whereas there is no limit to the upper speed a molecule can attain. Therefore, the average speed v is slightly larger than the most probable speed vP. The root-mean-square speed, vrms, is still larger

⇒ \(\left(v_{\text {rms }}>\bar{V}>v_p\right)\)

Average (or Mean) Speed:

⇒ \(\bar{v}=\sqrt{\frac{8}{\pi} \frac{k T}{m}}=1.59 \sqrt{\mathrm{kT} / \mathrm{m}}\) (derivation is not in the course)

RMS Speed:

⇒ \(v_{\mathrm{rms}}=\sqrt{\left\langle v^2\right\rangle}=\sqrt{\frac{3 \mathrm{kT}}{\mathrm{m}}}=1.73 \sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{kT}}{\mathrm{m}}}\)

Most Probable Speed:

The most probable speed vP or vmp is the speed possessed by the maximum number of molecules and corresponds to the maximum (peak) of the distribution curve. Mathematically, it is obtained by the condition.

⇒ \(\frac{d N(v)}{d v}=0\)[by substitution of formula of dN(v) (which is not in the course)]

Hence the most probable speed is

⇒ \(v_p=\sqrt{\frac{2 k T}{m}}=1.41 \sqrt{\mathrm{kT} / \mathrm{m}}\)

From the above expression, we can see that

⇒\(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{rms}}>\overline{\mathrm{v}}>\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{p}}\)

Degree Of Freedom

A total number of independent coordinates that must be known completely specify the position and configuration of a dynamical system completely is known as “degree of freedom f”. The maximum possible translational degrees of freedom are three i.e.

⇒ \(\left(\frac{1}{2} m V_x^2+\frac{1}{2} m V_y^2+\frac{1}{2} m V_z^2\right)\)

The maximum possible rotational degrees of freedom are three i.e.

⇒ \(\left(\frac{1}{2} I_x \omega_x^2+\frac{1}{2} I_y \omega_y^2+\frac{1}{2} I_z \omega_z^2\right)\)

Vibrational degrees of freedom are two i.e. (Kinetic energy. of vibration and Potential energy of vibration)

Mono Atomic: (all inert gases, He, Ar, etc.) f = 3 (translational)

Diatomic: (gases like H2, N2, O2 etc.) f = 5 (3 translational + 2 rotational)

If temp < 70 K for diatomic molecules, then f = 3

If the temp is between 250 K to 5000 K, then f = 5

If temp > 5000 K f = 7 [ 3 translational.+ 2 rotational + 2 vibrational ]

Maxwell’s Law Of Equpartition Of Energy

Energy associated with each degree of freedom = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{kT}\). If the degree of freedom of a molecule is f, then the total kinetic energy of that molecule U = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{fkT}\)

Internal Energy

The internal energy of a system is the sum of the kinetic and potential energies of the molecules of the system. It is denoted by U. Internal energy (U) of the system is the function of its absolute temperature (T) and its volume (V). i.e. U = f (T, V)

  • In the case of an ideal gas, the intermolecular force is zero. Hence its potential energy is also zero.
  • In this case, the internal energy is only due to kinetic energy, which depends on the absolute temperature of the gas. i.e. U = f (T).

For an ideal gas internal energy U = \(\frac{f}{2} n R T\)

Question 1. A light container having a diatomic gas enclosed within is moving with velocity v. The Mass of the gas is M and the number of moles is n.

  1. What is the kinetic energy of gas w.r.t. center of mass of the system?
  2. What is K.E. of gas w.r.t. ground?

Answer:

1. K.E. = \(\frac{5}{2} n R T\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Kinetic Energy Of Gas With Respect To Center Of Mass Of The System

2. Kinetic energy of gas w.r.t. ground = Kinetic energy of center of mass w.r.t. ground + Kinetic energy of gas w.r.t. center of mass.

K.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} M V^2+\frac{5}{2} n R T\)

Question 2. Two nonconducting containers having volumes V1 and V2 contain monoatomic and diatomic gases respectively. They are connected as shown in the figure. Pressure and temperature in the two containers are P1, T1, and P2, T2 respectively. Initially stop cock is closed, if the stop cock is opened find the final pressure and temperature.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Two Nonconducting Containers Having Volume V1 And V2

Answer:

⇒ \(n_1=\frac{P_1 V_1}{R T_1}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{n}_2=\frac{\mathrm{P}_2 \mathrm{~V}_2}{R \mathrm{RT}_2}\)

n = n1+ n2(number of moles are conserved)

Finally, the pressure in both parts and the temperature of both gases will become equal.

⇒ \(\frac{P\left(V_1+V_2\right)}{R T}=\frac{P_1 V_1}{R T_1}+\frac{P_2 V_2}{R T_2}\)

From energy conservation

⇒ \(\frac{3}{2} n_1 R T_1+\frac{5}{2} n_2 R T_2\)

⇒ \(\frac{3}{2} n_1 R T+\frac{5}{2} n_2 R T\)

T = \(\frac{\left(3 P_1 V_1+5 P_2 V_2\right) T_1 T_2}{3 P_1 V_1 T_2+5 P_2 V_2 T_1}\)

P = \(\left(\frac{3 P_1 V_1+5 P_2 V_2}{3 P_1 V_1 T_2+5 P_2 V_2 T_1}\right)\left(\frac{P_1 V_1 T_2+P_2 V_2 T_2}{V_1+V_2}\right)\)

Indicator Diagram

A graph representing the variation of pressure or variation of temperature or variation of volume with each other is called or indicator diagram.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Indicator Diagram

  1. Every point of the Indicator diagram represents a unique state (P, V, T) of gases.
  2. Every curve on the Indicator diagram represents a unique process.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Every Curve On Indicator Diagram Represents A Unique Process

Thermodynamics

Thermodynamics is mainly the study of the exchange of heat energy between bodies and the conversion of the same into mechanical energy and vice versa.

Thermodynamic System

The collection of an extremely large number of atoms or molecules confined within certain boundaries such that it has a certain value of pressure (P), volume (V), and temperature (T) is called a thermodynamic system.

Anything outside the thermodynamic system to which energy or matter is exchanged is called its surroundings. Taking into consideration the interaction between a system and its surroundings thermodynamic system is divided into three classes :

  1. Open system: A system is said to be an open system if it can exchange both energy and matter with its surroundings.
  2. Closed system: A system is said to be a closed system if it can exchange only energy (not matter with its surroundings).
  3. Isolated system: A system is said to be isolated if it can neither exchange nor matter with its surroundings.

Zeroth Law Of Thermodynamics

If two systems (B and C) are separately in thermal equilibrium with a third one (A), then they are in thermal equilibrium with each other.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Zeroth Law Of Thermodynamics

Equation Of State ( For Ideal Gases)

The relation between the thermodynamic variables (P, V, T) of the system is called an equation of state. The equation of state for an ideal gas of n moles is given by PV = nRT,

Work Done By A Gas

Let P and V be the pressure and volume of the gas. If A is the area of the piston, then the force exerted by a gas on the piston is, F = P × A.

Let the piston move through a small distance dx during the expansion of the gas. Work done for a small displacement dx is dW = F dx = PA dx

Since A dx = dV, the increase in the volume of the gas is dV

⇒ dW = P dV

mg

or \(W=\int d W=\int P d V\)

The area enclosed under the P-V curve gives work done during the process.

Different Types Of Processes

1. Isothermal Process:

T = constant [Boyle’s law applicable] PV = constant

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Isothermal Process

There is an exchange of heat between the system and its surroundings. The system should be compressed or expanded

very slowly so that there is sufficient time for the exchange of heat to keep the temperature constant.

The slope of the P−V curve in the isothermal process:

PV = constant = C

⇒ \(\frac{d P}{d V}=-\frac{P}{V}\)

Work done in the isothermal process:

W = \(n R T \quad \ell n \frac{V_f}{V_i}\)

[If vf > vi then W is positive

If vf < vi then W is negative]

W = \(\left[2.303 n R T \log _{10} \frac{V_f}{V_i}\right]\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Work Done In Isothermal Process

Internal energy in the isothermal process:

U = f (T) ⇒ ΔU = 0

2. Iso-Choric Process (Isometric Process):

V = constant

⇒ change in volume is zero

⇒ \(\frac{P}{T}\) is constant

⇒ \(\frac{P}{T}\)= const.(Galussac-law)

Work done in the isochoric process:

Since the change in volume is zero therefore dW = p dV = 0

Indicator diagram of the isochoric process:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Indicator Diagram Of Isochoric Process

Change in internal energy in isochoric process: ΔU = \(n \frac{f}{2} R \Delta T\)

Heat given in isochoric process: ΔQ = ΔU = \(n \frac{f}{2} R \Delta T\)

3. Isobaric Process: Pressure remains constant in the isobaric process

∴ P = constant

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = constant

Indicator diagram of the isobaric process:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Indicator Diagram Of Isobaric Process

Work done in the isobaric process:

ΔW = P ΔV = P (Vfinal – Vinitial) = nR (Tfinal – Tinitial)

Change in internal energy in the isobaric process: ΔU = n CVΔT

Heat given in the isobaric process:

ΔQ = ΔU + ΔW

ΔQ = \(n \frac{f}{2} R \Delta T+P\left[V_f-V_i\right]\)

⇒ \(n \frac{f}{2} R \Delta T+n R \Delta T\)

The above expression gives the idea that to increase the temperature by ΔT in the isobaric process heat required is more than in the isochoric process.

4. Cyclic Process: In the cyclic process initial and final states are the same therefore initial state = final state

Work done = Area enclosed under P-V diagram.

Change in internal Energy ΔU = 0

ΔQ = ΔU + ΔW

∴ ΔQ = ΔW

If the process on the P-V curve is clockwise, then the net work done is (+ve) and vice-versa. The graphs shown below explain when work is positive and when it is negative

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Cyclic Process

Question 1. The cylinder shown in the figure has conducting walls and the temperature of the surroundings is T, the position is initially in equilibrium, and the cylinder contains n moles of a gas. Now the piston is displaced slowly by an external agent to make the volume double the initial. Find work done by an external agent in terms of n, R, T

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Conducting Walls And Temperature

Answer:

1st Method:

Work done by external agents is positive because Fext and displacement are in the same direction. Since walls are conducting therefore temperature remains constant.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Walls Are Conducting Therefore Temperature Remains Constant

Applying the equilibrium condition when the pressure of the gas is P

⇒ \(P A+F_{\text {ext }}=P_{a t m} A\)

⇒ \(F_{\text {ext }}=P_{a t m} A-P A\)

⇒ \(W_{e x t}=\int_0^d F_{e x t} d x=\int_0^d P_{a t m} A d x-\int_0^d P A d x \)

⇒ \(P_{a t m} A \int_0^d d x-\int_V^{2 V} \frac{n R T}{V} d V=P_{a t m} A d-n R T \ln 2\)

⇒ \(P_{a t m} \cdot V_0^2-n R T \ln 2=n R T(1-\ln 2)\)

2nd Method

Applying the work-energy theorem on the piston

Δk = 0

Wall = Δk

Wgas+ Watm + Wext = 0

⇒ \(n R T \ln \frac{V_f}{V_i}-n R T+W_{\text {ext }}=0\)

Wext = nRT (1 – ln2)

Question 2. Find out the work done in the given graph. Also, draw the corresponding T-V curve and P-T curve.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Work Done In The Given Graph Also Draw The Corresponding TV Curve And PT Curve

Answer:

Since in P-V curves area under the cycle is equal to work done therefore work done by the gas is equal to P0 V0. Lines A B and CD are isochoric lines, and lines BC and DA are isobaric lines.

∴ The T-V curve and P-T curve are drawn as shown.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The TV Curve And PT Curve

Question 3. The t-V curve of the cyclic process is shown below, number of moles of the gas is n to find the total work done during the cycle.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics TV Curve Of Cyclic Process

Answer: Since path AB and CD are isochoric therefore work done is zero during path AB and CD. Process BC and DA are isothermal, therefore

⇒ \(W_{B C} =n R 2 T_0 \ln \frac{V_C}{V_B}=2 n R T_0 \ln 2\)

⇒ \(W_{D A} =n R T_0 \ln \frac{V_A}{V_D}=-n R T_0 \ln 2\)

Total work done = \(W_{B C}+W_{D A}=2 n R T_0 \ln 2-n R T_0 \ln 2\)

⇒ \(n R T_0 \ln 2\)

Question 4. The P-T curve of a cyclic process is shown. Find out the work done by the gas in the given process if several moles of the gas are n.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics PT Curve Of A Cyclic Process

Answer: Since path AB and CD are isochoric therefore work done during AB and CD is zero. Path BC and DA are isobaric.

Hence WBC = nRΔT = nR(T3– T2)

WDA = nR(T1– T4)

Total work done = WBC + WDA = nR(T1+ T3–T4– T2)

Question 5. Consider the cyclic process ABCA on a sample of 2.0 mol of an ideal gas as shown in the figure. The temperatures of the gas at A and B are 300 K and 500 K respectively. A total of 1200 J heat is withdrawn from the sample in the process. Find the work done by the gas in part BC. Take R = 8.3J/mol–K.
Answer:

The change in internal energy during the cyclic process is zero. Hence, the heat supplied to the gas is equal to the work done by it. Hence,

WAB + WBC + WCA = –1200 J. …….(1)

The work done during the process AB is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Change In Internal Energy During The Cyclic Process Is Zero

WAB = PA(VB– VA)

= nR(TB– TA)

= (2.0 mol) (8.3 J/mol–K) (200 K)

= 3320 J

The work done by the gas during the process CA is zero as the volume remains constant. From (1),

3320 J + WBC = –1200 J

or WBC = –4520 J.

= –4520 J.

First Law Of Thermodynamics

The first law of thermodynamics is the law of conservation of energy. It states that if a system absorbs heat dQ and as a result the internal energy of the system changes by dU and the system does a work dW, then dQ = dU + dW.

But, do = P dV dQ = dU + P dV

which is the mathematical statement of the first law of thermodynamics.

Heat gained by a system, work done by a system, and an increase in internal energy is taken as positive.

Heat lost by a system, work done on a system, and a decrease in internal energy are taken as negative.

Question 1. 1 gm water at 100ºC is heated to convert into steam at 100ºC at 1 atm. Find out the change in the internal energy of water. It is given that a volume of 1 gm water at 100ºC = 1 cc. volume of 1 gm steam at 100ºC = 1671 cc. Latent heat of vaporization = 540 cal/g. (Mechanical equivalent of heat J = 4.2J/cal.)
Answer:

From the first law of thermodynamic ΔQ = Δu + Δw

ΔQ = mL = 1 × 540 cal. = 540 cal.

ΔW = PΔV = \(\frac{10^5(1671-1) \times 10^{-6}}{4.2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\left.10^5 \times 1670\right) \times 10^{-6}}{4.2}\) = 40 cal.

Δu = 540 – 40 = 500 cal.

Question 2. Two moles of diatomic gas at 300 K are kept in a non-conducting container enclosed by a piston. Gas is now compressed to increase the temperature from 300 K to 400 K. Find work done by the gas

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Two Moles Of A Diatomic Gas At 300 K Are Kept In A Non Conducting Container

Answer:

ΔQ = Δu + Δw

Since the container is non-conducting therefore

ΔQ = 0 = Δu + Δw

⇒ ΔW = – Δu = \(-\Delta u=-n \frac{f}{2} R \Delta T\)

⇒ \(-2 \times \frac{5}{2} R(400-300)\)

= –5 × 8.314 × 100 J

= – 5 × 831.4 J

= –4157 J

Question 3. A sample of an ideal gas is taken through the cyclic process of abaca (figure. It absorbs 50 J of heat during part ab, no heat during bc, and rejects 70 J of heat during ca. 40 J of work done on the gas during part bc.

  1. Find the internal energy of the gas at b and c if it is 1500 J at a.
  2. Calculate the work done by the gas during the part ca.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Sample Of An Ideal Gas Is Taken Through The Cyclic Process abca

Answer:

1. In part ab the volume remains constant. Thus, the work done by the gas is zero. The heat absorbed by the gas is 50 J. The increase in internal energy from a to b is

ΔU = ΔQ = 50J.

As the internal energy is 1500 J at a, it will be 1550 J at b. In part bc, the work done by the gas is ΔW = –40J and no heat is given to the system. The increase in internal energy from b to c is

ΔU = –ΔW = 40 J.

As the internal energy is 1550 J at b, it will be 1590 J at c.

2. The change in internal energy from c to a is

ΔU = 1500 J – 1590 J = – 90 J.

The heat given to the system is ΔQ = – 70J.

Using ΔQ = ΔU + ΔW,

ΔWca= ΔQ – ΔU

= – 70 J + 90 J

= 20 J.

Question 4. The internal energy of a monatomic ideal gas is 1.5 nRT. One mole of helium is kept in a cylinder of cross-section 8.5 cm2. The cylinder is closed by a light frictionless piston. The gas is heated slowly in a process during which a total of 42 J heat is given to the gas. If the temperature rises through 2ºC, find the distance moved by the piston. Atmospheric pressure = 100 kPa.
Answer:

The change in internal energy of the gas is

ΔU = 1.5 nR (ΔT)

= 1.5 (1 mol) (8.3 J/mol-K) (2K)

= 24.9 J.

The heat is given to the gas = 42 J

The work done by the gas is

ΔW = ΔQ – ΔU

= 42 J – 24.9 J = 17.1 J.

If the distance moved by the piston is x, the work done is

ΔW = (100 kPa) (8.5 cm2) x.

Thus, (105 N/m2) (8.5 × 10-4 m2) x = 17.1 J

or, x = 0.2m = 20 cm.

Question 5. A sample of ideal gas (f =5) is heated at constant pressure. If an amount of 140 J of heat is supplied to the gas, find

  1. The change in internal energy of the gas
  2. The work done by the gas.

Answer:

Suppose the sample contains n moles. Also, suppose the volume changes from V1 to V2 and the temperature changes from T1 to T2.

The heat supplied is

ΔQ = ΔU + PΔV = ΔU + nRΔT = \(\Delta U+\frac{2 \Delta U}{f}\)

1. The change in internal energy is

ΔU = \(n \frac{f}{2} R\left(T_2-T_1\right)=n \frac{f}{2} R\left(T_2-T_1\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{f}}{2+\mathrm{f}} \Delta Q=\frac{140 \mathrm{~J}}{1.4}\)

= 100 J.

2. The work done by the gas is

ΔW = ΔQ – ΔU

= 140 J – 100 J

= 40 J.

Efficiency Of A Cycle (η):

⇒ \(\eta=\frac{\text { total Mechanical work done by the gas in the whole process }}{\text { Heat absorbed by the gas (only }+ \text { ve) }}\)

⇒ \(=\frac{\text { area under the cycle in } \mathrm{P}-\mathrm{V} \text { curve }}{\text { Heat injected into the system }}\)

⇒ \(\eta=\left(1-\frac{Q_2}{Q_1}\right)\) for Heat Engine,

⇒ \(\eta=\left(1-\frac{T_2}{T_1}\right)\) for Carnot cycle

Question 6. n moles of a diatomic gas have undergone a cyclic process ABC as shown in the figure. The temperature at a is T0. Find

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics N Moles Of A Diatomic Gas Has Undergone A Cyclic Process ABC

  1. Volume at C?
  2. Maximum temperature?
  3. Total heat given to gas?
  4. Is heat rejected by the gas, if yes how much heat is rejected?
  5. Find out the efficiency

Answer:

1. Since triangles OA V0 and OC V are similar therefore

⇒ \(\frac{2 P_0}{V}=\frac{P_0}{V_0}\)

⇒ \(V=2 V_0\)

2. Since process AB is isochoric hence

⇒ \(\frac{P_A}{T_A}=\frac{P_B}{T_B}\)

⇒ \(T_B=2 T_0\)

Since process BC is isobaric therefore \(\frac{T_B}{V_B}=\frac{T_C}{V_C}\)

⇒ \(T_{\mathrm{C}}=2 \mathrm{~T}_{\mathrm{B}}=4 \mathrm{~T}_0\)

3. Since the process is cyclic therefore

∴ ΔQ = ΔW = area under the cycle = \(\frac{1}{2} P_0 V_0\)

4. Since Δu and ΔW both are negative in process CA

∴ ΔQ is negative in process CA and heat is rejected in process CA

ΔQCA = ΔwCA + ΔuCA

⇒ \(-\frac{1}{2}\left[P_0+2 P_0\right] V_0-\frac{5}{2} n R\left(T_c-T_a\right)\)

⇒ \(-\frac{1}{2}\left[P_0+2 P_0\right] V_0-\frac{5}{2} n R\left(\frac{4 P_0 V_0}{n R}-\frac{P_0 V_0}{n R}\right)\)

= –9P0V0

= Heat injected.

4. η = efficiency of the cycle = \(=\frac{\text { work done by the gas }}{\text { heat injected }}\)

⇒ \(\eta=\frac{P_0 V_0 / 2}{Q_{\text {injected }}} \times 100\)

ΔQinj = ΔQAB + ΔQBC

⇒ \(\left[\frac{5}{2} n R\left(2 T_0-T_0\right)\right]+\left[\frac{5}{2} n R\left(2 T_0\right)+2 P_0\left(2 V_0-V_0\right)\right]\)

⇒ \(\frac{19}{2} P_0 V_0\)

⇒ \(\eta=\frac{100}{19} \%\)

Specific Heat

The specific heat capacity of a substance is defined as the heat supplied per unit mass of the substance per unit rise in the temperature. If an amount ΔQ of heat is given to a mass m of the substance and its temperature rises by ΔT, the specific heat capacity s is given by the equation

⇒ \(s=\frac{\Delta Q}{m \Delta T}\)

The molar heat capacities of a gas are defined as the heat given per mole of the gas per unit rise in the temperature. The molar heat capacity at constant volume, denoted by Cv, is :

⇒ \(C_v=\left(\frac{\Delta Q}{n \Delta T}\right)_{\text {constant volume }}\)

⇒ \(\frac{f}{2} R\)

and the molar heat capacity at constant pressure, denoted by CP is,

⇒ \(C_{\mathrm{P}}=\left(\frac{\Delta Q}{\mathrm{n} \Delta T}\right)_{\text {constant volume }}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{f}{2}+1\right) R\)

  • where n is the amount of the gas in several moles and f is a degree of freedom. Quite often, the term specific heat capacity or specific heat is used for molar heat capacity.
  • It is advised that the unit be carefully noted to determine the actual meaning. The unit of specific heat capacity is J/kg-K whereas that of molar heat capacity is J/mol–K.

Molar Heat Capacity Of Ideal Gas In Terms Of R:

1. For a monoatomic gas f = 3

⇒ \(C_v=\frac{3}{2} R\)

⇒ \(C_p=\frac{5}{2} R\)

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{P}}}{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{V}}}=\gamma=\frac{5}{3}\)

= 1.67

2. For a diatomic gas f = 5

⇒ \(\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{V}}=\frac{5}{2} \mathrm{R},\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{P}}=\frac{7}{2} \mathrm{R}\)

⇒ \(\gamma=\frac{C_P}{C_V}\)

= 1.4

3. For a Triatomic gas f = 6

⇒ \(C_V=3 R, C_P=4 R\)

⇒ \(\gamma=\frac{C_P}{C_V}=\frac{4}{3}\) = 1.33 [Note for CO2; f = 5, it is linear]

In general, if f is the degree of freedom of a molecule, then,

⇒ \(C_V=\frac{f}{2} R, \quad C_P=\left(\frac{f}{2}+1\right) R\)

⇒ \(\gamma=\frac{C_P}{C_V}=\left[1+\frac{2}{f}\right]\)

Question 1. In a thermodynamic process, the pressure of a certain mass of gas is changed in such a way that 20 Joule heat is released from it and 8 Joule work is done on the gas. If the initial internal energy of the system is 30 joule then the final internal energy will be –
Answer:

dQ = dU + dW ⇒ dQ = Ufinal– Uinitial + dW

Ufinal = dQ – dW + Uinitial or Ufinal = –20 + 8 + 30 of Ufinal = 18 Joule

Question 2. A gas is contained in a vessel fitted with a movable piston. The container is placed on a hot stove. A total of 100 cal of heat is given to the gas and the gas does 40 J of work in the expansion resulting from heating. Calculate the increase in internal energy in the process.
Answer:

Heat given to the gas is ΔQ = 100 cal = 418 J.

Work done by the gas is ΔW = 40 J

The increase in internal energy is

ΔU = ΔQ – ΔW

= 418J – 40 J = 378 J

Question 3. A gas is compressed from volume 10 m3 to 4 m3 at a constant pressure of 50N/m2. Gas is given 100 J energy by heating then its internal energy.
Answer:

P = 50 N/m2

dV = 10 – 4 = 6 m3

δW = PdV = 6 × 50 = 300 J (Volume is decreasing, δQ = 100 J)

W = – 300 J

δQ = δW + dU

100 + 300 = dU

dU = increased by 400 J

Question 4. Two moles of a diatomic gas at 300 K are enclosed in a cylinder as shown in the figure. The piston is light. Find out the heat given if the gas is slowly heated to 400 K in the following three cases.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Two Moles Of A Diatomic Gas At 300 K Are Enclosed In A Cylinder

  1. The piston is free to move
  2. If the piston does not move
  3. If the piston is heavy and movable.

Answer:

1. Since pressure is constant

∴ ΔQ = nCP ΔT = 2 × \(\frac{7}{2}\) 2× R × (400 – 300) = 700 R

2. Since volume is constant

∴ ΔW = 0 and ΔQ = Δu (from first law)

ΔQ = Δu = nCvΔT = 2× \(\frac{5}{2}\) × R × (400 – 300) = 500 R

3. Since pressure is constant

∴ ΔQ = nCP ΔT = 2 × \(\frac{7}{2}\) × R × (400 – 300) = 700 R

Question 5. The p-V curve of a diatomic gas is shown in the figure. Find the total heat given to the gas in the process AB and BC

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics PV Curve Of A Diatomic Gas

Answer:

From the first law of thermodynamics

ΔQABC = ΔuABC + ΔWABC

⇒ \(\Delta W_{A B C}=\Delta W_{A B}+\Delta W_{B C}=0+n R T_B \ln \frac{V_C}{V_B}=n R T_B \ln \frac{2 V_0}{V_0}\)

⇒ \(n R T_B \ln 2=2 P_0 V_0 \ln 2\)

Δu = \(n C_v \Delta T=\frac{5}{2}\left(2 P_0 V_0-P_0 V_0\right)\)

⇒ ΔQABC = \(\frac{5}{2}\) 2P0V0+ 2P0V0ln 2.

Question 6. Calculate the value of the mechanical equivalent of heat from the following data. The specific heat capacity of air at constant volume = 170 cal/kg-K, γ=CP/Cv= 1.4, and the density of air at STP is 1.29 kg/m3. Gas consant R = 8.3 J/mol-K.
Answer:

Using pV = nRT, the volume of 1 mole of air at STP is

V = \(\frac{\mathrm{nRT}}{\mathrm{p}}=\frac{(1 \mathrm{~mol}) \times(8.3 \mathrm{~J} / \mathrm{mol}-\mathrm{K}) \times(273 \mathrm{~K})}{1.0 \times 10^5 \mathrm{~N} / \mathrm{m}^2}\)

= 0.0224m3

The mass of 1 mole is, therefore,

(1.29 kg/m3) × (0.0224 m3) = 0.029 kg.

The number of moles in 1 kg is \(\frac{1}{0.029}\). The molar heat capacity at constant volume is

⇒ \(C_v=\frac{170 \mathrm{cal}}{(1 / 0.029) \mathrm{mol}-\mathrm{K}}\)= 4.93 cal/mol-K.

Hence, CP = γCv= 1.4 × 4.93 cal/mol-K

or, CP – Cv= 0.4 × 4.93 cal/mol-K

= 1.97 cal/mol-K.

Also, CP– Cv= R = 8.3 J/mol-K.

Thus, 8.3 J = 1.97 cal.

The mechanical equivalent of heat is

⇒ \(\frac{8.3 \mathrm{~J}}{1.97 \mathrm{cal}}\) =4.2 J/cal.

Average Molar Specific Heat of Metals:

[Dulong and Petit law]

At room temperature average molar specific heat of all metals are same and is nearly equal to 3R ( 6 cal. mol-1 K-1).

[Note: Temp. above which the metals have constant CV is called Debye temp.]

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics At Room Temperature Average Molar Specific Heat

Mayer’s Equation: CP− CV= R (for ideal gases only)

Adiabatic Process:

When no heat is supplied or extracted from the system the process is called adiabatic. The process is sudden so there is no time for the exchange of heat. If the walls of a container are thermally insulated no heat can cross the boundary of the system and the process is adibatic.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Adiabatic Process

The equation of the adiabatic process is given by

PVγ = constant [Poission Law]

Tγ P1-γ = constant

T Vγ-1 = constant

The slope of P−V−curve in the adiabatic process:

Since PVγ is a constant

∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dV}}=-\gamma\left(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{V}}\right)\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Slope Of PV Curve In Adiabatic Process

The slope of P−T−curve in the adiabatic process: Since Tγ P1-γ is a constant

∴ \(\frac{d P}{d T}=-\frac{\gamma}{(1-\gamma)} \frac{P}{T}=\frac{(\gamma)}{(\gamma-1)} \frac{P}{T}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Slope Of PT Curve In Adiabatic Process

Slope of T−V−curve:

⇒ \(\frac{d V}{d T}=-\frac{1}{(\gamma-1)} \frac{V}{T}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Slope Of TV Curve

Work Done In Adiabatic Process:

\(\Delta W=-\Delta U=n C_v\left(T_i-T_f\right)=\frac{P_i V_i-P_f V_f}{(\gamma-1)}=\frac{n R\left(T_i-T_f\right)}{\gamma-1}\)

work done by the system is (+ve), if Ti> Tf (hence expansion)

work done on the system is (−ve) if Ti< Tf (hence compression)

Question 7. A quantity of air is kept in a container having walls that are slightly conducting. The initial temperature and volume are 27ºC (equal to the temperature of the surroundings) and 800cm3 respectively. Find the rise in the temperature if the gas is compressed to 200cm3

  1. In a short time
  2. In a long time. Take γ = 1.4.

Answer:

1. When the gas is compressed in a short time, the process is adiabatic. Thus,

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}_2 \mathrm{~V}_2^{\gamma-1}=\mathrm{T}_1 \mathrm{~V}_1^{\gamma-1}\)

or \(\mathrm{T}_2=\mathrm{T}_1\left(\frac{\mathrm{V}_1}{\mathrm{~V}_2}\right)^{\gamma-1}\)

⇒ \((300 \mathrm{~K}) \times\left[\frac{800}{200}\right]^{0.4}\)

= 522K

Rise in temperature = T2– T1= 222 K.

2. When the gas is compressed for a long time, the process is isothermal. Thus, the temperature remains equal to the temperature of the surroundings which is 27ºC. The rise in temperature = 0.

Question 8. A monoatomic gas is enclosed in a nonconducting cylinder having a piston that can move freely. Suddenly gas is compressed to 1/8 of its initial volume. Find the final pressure and temperature if the initial pressure and temperature are P0 and T0 respectively.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Monoatomic Gas Is Enclosed In A Nonconducting Cylinder

Answer:

Since the process is adiabatic therefore

⇒ \(P_0 V^{\frac{5}{3}}=P_{\text {final }}\left(\frac{V}{8}\right)^{5 / 3}\)

⇒ \(\gamma=\frac{C_P}{C_V}=\frac{5 R}{2} / \frac{3 R}{2}=\frac{5}{3}\)

⇒ \(P_{\text {final }}=32 P_0\)

Since the process is adiabatic therefore

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}_1 \mathrm{~V}_1^{\gamma-1}=\mathrm{T}_2 \mathrm{~V}_2^{\gamma-1}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}_0 \mathrm{~V}_0^{2 / 3}=\mathrm{T}_{\text {frall }}\left(\frac{\mathrm{V}_0}{8}\right)^{2 / 3}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}=4 \mathrm{~T}_0\)

Question 9. A cylindrical container having nonconducting walls is partitioned into two equal parts such that the volume of each part is equal to V0. A movable nonconducting piston is kept between the two parts. The gas on the left is slowly heated so that the gas on the right is compressed upto volume \(\frac{V_0}{8}\). Find pressure and temperature on both sides if the initial pressure and temperature were P0 and T0 respectively. Also, find heat given by the heater to the gas. (number of moles in each part is n)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Nonconducting Walls Is Partitioned In Two Equal Parts

Answer:

Since the process on the right is adiabatic therefore PVγ = constant

⇒ P0 Vγ0 = Pfinal (V0/ 8)γ ⇒ Pfinal = 32

P0 T0 Vγ-10 = Tfinal (V0/8)γ-1 ⇒ Tfinal = 4T0

Let the volume of the left part be V1

⇒ \(2 V_0=V_1+\frac{V_0}{8}\)

⇒ \(V_1=\frac{15 V_0}{8}\)

Since several moles on the left parts remain constant therefore for the left part

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = constant.

The final pressure on both sides will be the same

⇒ \(\frac{P_0 V_0}{T_0}=\frac{P_{\text {final }} V_1}{T_{\text {final }}}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}_{\text {final }}=60 \mathrm{~T}_0\)

⇒ \(\Delta Q=\Delta u+\Delta w\)

⇒ \(\Delta Q=n \frac{5 R}{2}\left(60 T_0-T_0\right)+n \frac{3 R}{2}\left(4 T_0-T_0\right)\)

⇒ \(\Delta Q=\frac{5 n R}{2} \times 59 T_0+\frac{3 n R}{2} \times 3 T_0\)

Free Expansion

If a system, say a gas expands in such a way that no heat enters or leaves the system and also no work is done by or on the system, then the expansion is called the “free expansion”.

ΔQ = 0 , ΔU = 0 and ΔW = 0. Temperature in the free expansion remains constant.

Question 1. A nonconducting cylinder having volume 2V0 is partitioned by a fixed nonconducting wall in two equal parts. Partition is attached with a valve. The right side of the partition is a vacuum and the left part is filled with a gas having pressure and temperature P0 and T0 respectively. If the valve is opened the final pressure and temperature of the two parts are.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Nonconducting Cylinder

Answer: From the first law of thermodynamics ΔQ = Δu + ΔW

Since gas expands freely, therefore, ΔW = 0 since no heat is given to gas ΔQ = 0

⇒ Δu = 0 and temperature remains constant.

Tfinal = T0

Since the process is isothermal therefore P0× V0= Pfinal × 2V0

⇒ Pfinal = P0/2

Reversible And Irreversible Process

A process is said to be reversible when the various stages of an operation in which it is subjected can be traversed back in the opposite direction in such a way that the substance passes through the same conditions at every step in the reverse process as in the direct process.

A process in which any one of the conditions stated for the reversible process is not fulfilled is called an irreversible process.

Comparison Of Slopes Of Iso-Thermal And Adiabatic Curve

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Comparison Of Slopes Of Iso Thermal And Adiabatic Curve

In compression up to the same final volume: | Wadia |> | Wisothermal |

In Expansion up to the same final volume: Wisothermal > Wadia

Limitations Of Ist Law Of Thermodynamics:

The first law of thermodynamics tells us that heat and mechanical work are interconvertible. However, this law fails to explain the following points:

  1. It does not tell us about the direction of the transfer of heat.
  2. It does not tell us about the conditions under which heat energy is converted into work.
  3. It does not tell us whether some process is possible or not.

Mixture Of Non-Reacting Gases:

1. Molecular weight = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_1 \mathrm{M}_1+\mathrm{n}_2 \mathrm{M}_2}{\mathrm{n}_1+\mathrm{n}_2}\)

M1 and M2 are molar masses.

2. Specific heat CV = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_1 \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{V}_1}+\mathrm{n}_2 \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{V}_2}}{\mathrm{n}_1+\mathrm{n}_2}\)

⇒ \(C_p=\frac{n_1 C_{P_1}+n_2 C_{P_2}}{n_1+n_2}\)

3. For mixture, γ = \(\gamma=\frac{\mathrm{C}_{{mix}}}{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{v}_{{mix}}}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{n_1 C_{p_1}+n_2 C_{p_2}+\ldots \ldots}{n_1 C_{v_1}+n_2 C_{v_2}+\ldots \ldots \ldots}\)

Question 1. 5 gm air is heated from 4ºC to 6ºC. If the specific heat of air at constant volume is 0.172 cal/gm/ºC, then the increase in the internal energy of air will be –
Answer:

dU = mCvdT

dU = 5 × 0.172 × 2

dU = 1.72 calorie

Question 2. In the following indicator diagram, the net amount of work done will be –

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics In The Following Indicator Diagram The Net Amount Of Work Done

Answer:

The cyclic process 1 is clockwise and the process 2 is anti clockwise. Therefore W1 will be positive and W2 will be negative area 2 > area 1, Hence the network will be negative.

Question 3. Two gram-moles of gas, which are kept at a constant temperature of 0ºC, are compressed from 4 liter to 1 liter. The work done will be
Answer:

W = 2.303 μ RT \(\log _{10} \frac{V_2}{V_1}\)

W = 2.303 × 2 × 8.4 × 273 \(\log _{10} \frac{1}{4}\)

W = 2.303 × 2 × 8.7 × 273 × (log10 – log410)

log410 = 0.6021

∴ W = –6359 Joule

Question 4. Air is filled in a motor car tube at 27ºC temperature and 2-atmosphere pressure. If the tube suddenly bursts then the final temperature will be \(\left[\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^{2 / 7}=0.82\right]\)
Answer:

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}_2=\mathrm{T}_1\left(\frac{\mathrm{P}_2}{\mathrm{P}_1}\right)^{\frac{\gamma-1}{\gamma}}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}_2=300\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^{\frac{0.4}{1.4}}\)

⇒ \(300\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^{2 / 7}\)

= 300×8.2

T2 = 246K

Question 5. One liter of air at NTP is suddenly compressed to 1 c.c. the final pressure will be.
Answer:

⇒ \(P_2=P_1\left(\frac{V_1}{V_2}\right)^\gamma\)

⇒ \(P_2=10^5\left(10^3\right)^{5 / 3}=10^5 \times 10^5\)

⇒ \(P_2=10^{10} \text { Pascal }\)

Question 6. In the following fig. the work done by the system in the closed path ABCA is Answer: Work done in closed path ABCA

WABCA = Area of ΔABC = \(\frac{1}{2}\) AB × BC

WABCA = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)(P2– P1) (V2– V1)

Question 7. According to the fig. if one mole of an ideal gas is in a cyclic process the work done by the gas in the process will be
Answer:

Work done W = area of PV curve

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2}\)[3P0– P0][2V0– V0]

= P0V0

Question 8. In the above question, heat given by the gas is
Answer:

δQ = μCpdT, μ = 1, dT = TA– TC, and for monoatomic ideal gas CP= 5/2 R

∴ (δQ)CA = \(\frac{5}{2}\) R [TA– TC] = \(\frac{5}{2}\)[PAVA– PCVC]

But PA= P0, VA= V0, VC= 2V0, PC= P0

and \(\frac{PV}{T}\)

∴ (δQ)CA = \(\frac{5}{2}\)[P0V0– P02V0] = – \(\frac{5}{2}\)P0V0

Question 9. In the above question, the heat taken by gas in the path AB will be Answered:

(δQ)AB = μCVdT (the process is on constant volume)

CV= \(\frac{3}{2}\)R, μ = 1

⇒ \((\delta Q)_{A B}=\frac{3}{2} R\left[T_B-T_A\right]\)

⇒ \(\frac{3}{2}\left[3 P_0 V_0-P_0 V_0\right]\)

⇒ \(3 \mathrm{P}_0 \mathrm{~V}_0\)

Question 10. In the above question, the absorbed heat by gas in path BC will be Answered:

If the heat given for the complete process is δQ then

(δQ) = (δQ)AB + (δQ)BC + (δQ)CA

dU = 0 in a cyclic process, thus by the first law of thermodynamics

δQ = δW

∴ (δQ)AB + (δQ)BC + (δQ)AC = δW

(δQ)BC = δW – (δQ)AB – (δQ)BC

⇒ \(P_0 V_0+\frac{5}{2} P_0 V_0-3 P_0 V_0\)

⇒ \(\frac{P_0 V_0}{2}\)

Question 11. For a given cyclic process as shown in fig. the magnitude of absorbed energy for the system is
Answer:

In cyclic process

Q = W (dU = 0)

Q = area of closed loop

Q = 102π Joule

Second Law Of Thermodynamics

This law gives the direction of heat flow.

According To Classius: It is impossible to make any such machine that can transfer heat from an object with low temperature to an object with high temperature without an external source.

According To Kelvin: It is impossible to obtain work continuously by cooling an object below the temperature of its surroundings.

Statement Of Kelvin-Planck: It is impossible to construct any such machine that works on a cyclic process and absorbs heat from a source, converts all that heat into work, and rejects no heat to sink.

Heat Engine:

The device, used to convert heat energy into mechanical energy, is called a heat engine.

  • For the conversion of heat into work with the help of a heat engine, the following conditions have to be met. There should be a body at a higher temperature ‘T1’ from which heat is extracted. It is called the source.
  • The body of the engine contains the working substance. There should be a body at a lower temperature ‘T2’ to which heat can be rejected. This is called the sink.

Working Of Heat Engine:

Schematic diagram of heat engine

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Working Of Heat Engine

Engine derives an amount ‘Q1’ of heat from the source.

A part of this heat is converted into work ‘W’.

The remaining heat ‘Q2’ is rejected to the sink.

Thus Q1= W + Q2

or the work done by the engine is given by W = Q1– Q2

Efficiency Of Heat Engine:

The efficiency of the heat engine (η) is defined as the fraction of total heat, supplied to the engine which is converted into work.

Mathematically

∴ \(\eta=\frac{W}{Q_1}\)

or \(\eta=\frac{Q_1-Q_2}{Q_1}=1-\frac{Q_2}{Q_1}\)

Carnot Engine And Carnot Cycle

Carnot Engine: The Carnot engine is an ideal heat engine. It consists of the following parts.

Schematic Diagram:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Schematic Diagram

Source: It is a reservoir of heat energy with a conducting top maintained at a constant temperature T1K. The source is so big that extraction of any amount of heat from it does not change its temperature.

Body Of Heat Engine: It is a barrel having perfectly insulating walls and a conducting bottom. It is fitted with an air-tight piston capable of sliding within the barrel without friction. The barrel contains some quantity of an ideal gas.

Sink: It is a huge body at a lower temperature T2 having a perfectly conducting top. The size of the sink is so large that any amount of heat rejected to it does not increase its temperature.

Insulating Stand: It is a stand made up of perfectly insulating material such that the barrel when placed over it becomes thoroughly insulated from the surroundings.

Carnot Cycle: As the engine works, the working substance of the engine undergoes a cycle known as the Carnot cycle. The Carnot cycle consists of the following four strokes.

Graphical representation of the Carnot cycle:

First Stroke (Isothermal expansion): In this stroke, the barrel is placed over the source. The piston is gradually pushed back as the gas expands.

The fall of temperature, due to expansion, is compensated by the supply of heat from the source and consequently, temperature remains constant. The conditions of the gas change from A(P1, V1) to B(P2, V2). If W1 is the work done during this process, then heat Q1 derived from the source is given by

⇒ \(\mathrm{Q}_1=\mathrm{W}_1=\text { Area } \mathrm{ABGE}=\mathrm{RT} \log _e\left(\frac{\mathrm{V}_2}{\mathrm{~V}_1}\right)\)

Second Stroke (Adiabatic expansion):

The barrel is removed from the source and placed over the insulating stand. The piston is pushed back so that the gas expands adiabatically resulting in a fall of temperature from T1 to T2. The conditions of the gas change from B(P2, V2) to C(P3, V3). If W2 is the work done in this case then

⇒ \(\mathrm{W}_2=\text { Area } \mathrm{BCHG}=\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\gamma-1}\left(\mathrm{~T}_1-\mathrm{T}_2\right)\)

Third Stroke (isothermal compression): The barrel is placed over the sink. The piston is pushed down there by compressing the gas. The heat generated due to compression flows to the sink maintaining the temperature of the barrel constant.

The state of the gas changes from C(P3, V3) to D(P4, V4). If W3 is the work done in this process and Q2 is the heat rejected to the sink, then

⇒ \(\mathrm{Q}_2=\mathrm{W}_3=\text { Area CDFH }=\mathrm{RT}_2 \log _{\mathrm{e}}\left(\frac{\mathrm{V}_3}{\mathrm{~V}_4}\right)\)

Fourth Stroke (Adiabatic compression): The barrel is placed over the insulating stand. The piston is moved down thereby compressing the gas adiabatically till the temperature of the gas increases from T2 to T1.

The state of gas changes from D(P4, V4) to A(P1, V1). If W4 is the work done in this process, then

⇒ \(\mathrm{W}_4=\text { Area ADFE }=\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\gamma-1}\left(\mathrm{~T}_1-\mathrm{T}_2\right)\)

Heat Converted Into Work In Carnot Cycle:

During the four strokes, W1 and W2 are the work done by the gas, and W3 and W4 are the work done on the gas. Therefore the net, work performed by the engine

W = W1+ W2– W3– W4= Area ABGE + Area BCHG – Area CDFH – Area ADEF = Area ABCD

Thus net work done by the engine during one cycle is equal to the area enclosed by the indicator diagram of the cycle. Analytically

⇒ \(\mathrm{W}=\mathrm{R}\left(\mathrm{T}_1-\mathrm{T}_2\right) \log _e\left(\frac{\mathrm{V}_2}{\mathrm{~V}_1}\right)\)

Efficiency Of Carnot Engine:

The efficiency (η) of an engine is defined as the ratio of useful heat (heat converted into work) to the total heat supplied to the engine. Thus.

⇒ \(\eta=\frac{W}{Q_1}=\frac{Q_1-Q_2}{Q_1}\)

or \(\eta=\frac{R\left(T_1-T_2\right) \log _e\left(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\right)}{R T_1 \log _e\left(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\right)}\)

⇒ \(\frac{T_1-T_2}{T_1}\)

or \(\eta=1-\frac{Q_2}{Q_1}=1-\frac{T_2}{T_1}\)

Some Important Points Regarding Carnot Engine

The efficiency of an engine depends upon the temperatures between which it operates.

η is independent of the nature of the working substance.

η is one only if T2= 0. Since absolute zero is not attainable, hence even an ideal engine cannot be 100 % efficient.

η is one only if Q2= 0. But η = 1 is never possible even for an ideal engine. Hence Q2≠ 0. Thus it is impossible to extract heat from a single body and convert the whole of it into work.

If T2= T1, then η = 0

In actual heat engines, there are many losses due to friction, etc. and various processes during each cycle are not quasistatic, so the efficiency of actual engines is much less than that of an ideal engine.

Question 1. A Carnot engine has the same efficiency between

  1. 100 K and 500K and
  2. Tk and 900 K. The value of T is

Answer:

Efficiency η = \(1-\frac{T_2}{T_1}\)

or η = \(1-\frac{100}{500}\)

⇒ \(1-\frac{T}{900}\)

or \(\frac{100}{500}=\frac{T}{900}\)

∴ T = 180K

Question 2. A Carnot engine takes 103 kilocalories of heat from a reservoir at 627ºC and exhausts it to a sink at 27ºC. The efficiency of the engine will be.
Answer:

Efficiency of Carnot engine

η = \(1-\frac{T_2}{T_1}\)

⇒ \(1-\frac{300}{900}=\frac{2}{3}\)

or η = 66.6 %

Question 3. In the above problem, the work performed by the engine will be
Answer:

Work performed by the engine

W = \(\eta Q_1=\frac{2}{3} \times 10^6 \times 4.2\)

or W = 2.8 × 106 Joule

Question 4. A Carnot engine has an efficiency of 40% when the sink temperature is 27ºC. The source temperature will be
Answer:

⇒ \(\eta_{\text {efficiency }}=1-\frac{T_2}{T_1}\)

or \(\frac{2}{5}=1-\frac{300}{\mathrm{~T}_1}\)

∴ T1= 500K

Question 5. A reversible engine takes heat from a reservoir at 527ºC and gives out to the sink at 127ºC. The engine is required to perform useful mechanical work at the rate of 750 watts. The efficiency of the engine is
Answer:

Efficiency η = \(1-\frac{T_2}{T_1}\)

or η = \(1-\frac{400}{800}=\frac{1}{2}\)

η = 50%

Question 6. The efficiency of Carnot’s engine is 50%. The temperature of its sink is 7ºC. To increase its efficiency to 70%. The increase in heat of the source will be
Answer:

Efficiency in first state η = 50% = 1/2

T2= 273 + 7 = 280 K

Formula η = \(1-\frac{T_2}{T_1}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2}=1-\frac{280}{\mathrm{~T}_1} \Leftrightarrow \frac{280}{\mathrm{~T}_1}=\frac{1}{2}\)

or T1 = 560ºK (temperature of source)

In the second state (1) \(\frac{70}{100}=1-\frac{280}{\mathrm{~T}_1}\)

∴ \(\mathrm{T}_1=\frac{2800}{3}=933.3 \mathrm{~K}\)

∴ Increase in source temperature = (933.3 – 560) = 373.3 K

Question 7. A Carnot’s engine works at 200ºC and 0ºC and another at 0ºC and –200ºC. The ratio of efficiency of the two is
Answer:

⇒ \(\eta=\frac{\left(T_1-T_2\right)}{T_1}\)

⇒ \(\eta_1=\frac{(473-273)}{473}=\frac{200}{473}\)

and \(\eta_2=\frac{(273-73)}{273}=\frac{200}{273}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\eta_1}{\eta_2}=\frac{273}{473}\)

= 0.577

Question 8. A Carnot engine works as a refrigerator in between 0ºC and 27ºC. How much energy is needed to freeze 10 kg of ice at 0ºC?
Answer:

Heat absorbed by the sink

Q2= 10 × 102 × 80 = 800 k.cal

Now \(\frac{Q_1}{Q_2}=\frac{T_1}{T_2}, Q_1=Q_2 \cdot \frac{T_1}{T_2}\)

∴ \(Q_1=800 \times \frac{300}{273} \mathrm{k} . \mathrm{cal}\)

= 879 kcal

Question 9. The work efficiency coefficient in the above question
Answer:

Work efficiency coefficient (coefficient of performance)

⇒ \(\beta=\frac{Q_2}{Q_1-Q_2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{800 \times 10^3}{(879-800) \times 10^3}\)

= 10.13

Question 10. A Carnot engine works as a refrigerator in between 250K and 300K. If it acquires 750 calories from a heat source at a low temperature, then the heat is generated at a higher temperature. (in calories) will be.
Solution:

⇒ \(\eta=\frac{Q_2}{Q_1-Q_2}=\frac{T_2}{T_1-T_2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{750}{Q_1-750}=\frac{250}{300-250}\)

Q1= 900 Calories

Question 11. A vessel of volume 2 x 10-2 m3 contains a mixture of hydrogen and helium at 47º C temperature and 4.15 x 105 N/m2 pressure. The mass of the mixture is 10-2 kg. Calculate the masses of hydrogen and helium in the given mixture.
Solution:

Let the mass of H2 is m1 and He is m2

∴ m1+ m2= 10-2 kg = 10 × 10-3 ….(1)

Let P1, P2 are partial pressure of H2 and He

P1+ P2= 4.15 × 105 N/m2

for the mixture

⇒ \(\left(P_1+P_2\right) V=\left(\frac{m_1}{n_1}+\frac{m_2}{n_2}\right) R T\)

⇒ \(4.15 \times 10^5 \times 2 \times 10^{-2}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{m_1}{2 \times 10^{-3}}+\frac{m_2}{4 \times 10^{-3}}\right) 8.31 \times 320\)

⇒ \(\frac{m_1}{2}+\frac{m_2}{4}=\frac{4.15 \times 2}{8.31 \times 320}=0.00312=3.12 \times 10^{-3}\)

⇒ 2m1+ m2= 12.48 × 10-3 kg …..(2)

Solving (1) and (2)

m1= 2.48 × 10-3 kg ≅2.5 × 10-3 kg

and m = 7.5 × 10-3 kg.

Question 12. The pressure in a monoatomic gas increases linearly from 4 x 105 N m-2 to 8 x 105 N m-2 when its volume increases from 0.2 m3 to 0.5 m3. Calculate the following:

  1. Work done by the gas.
  2. Increase in the internal energy.

Answer:

1. As here pressure varies linearly with volume, work done by the gas

ΔW = ∫PdV = area under P-V curve

which in the light of Figure 1 becomes:

ΔW = PI(VF– VI) (PF– PI) × (VF– VI)

i.e., ΔW = \(P_I\left(V_F-V_I\right)+\frac{1}{2}\left(P_F-P_I\right) \times\left(V_F-V_I\right)\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Pressure In A Monoatomic Gas Increases Linearly From Work Done By The Gas

i.e., ΔW = \(\frac{1}{2}\)(0.5 – 0.2) (8 + 4) × 105

i.e., ΔW = 1.8 × 105 J

2. The change in internal energy of a gas is given by

ΔU = \(\mu C_V \Delta T=\frac{\mu R \Delta T}{(\gamma-1)}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\left(P_F V_F-P_I V_I\right)}{(\gamma-1)}\)

As the gas is monatomic γ = (5/3)

So, ΔU = \(\frac{10^5(8 \times 0.5-4 \times 0.2)}{[(5 / 3)-1]}\)

⇒ \(\frac{3}{2} \times 10^5(4-0.8)\)

i.e., ΔU = 4.8 × 105 J

Refrigerator Or Heat Pump

A refrigerator or heat pump is a heat engine that runs in revenue one direction.
It essentially consists of three parts

  1. Source: At higher temperature T1.
  2. Working substance: It is called refrigerant liquid ammonia and freon works as a working substance
  3. Sink: At lower temperature T2.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Heat Pump

  • The working substance takes heat Q2 from a sink (contents of the refrigerator) at a lower temperature, has a net amount of work done W in it by an external agent (usually the compressor of the refrigerator), and gives out a larger amount of heat Q1 to a hot body at temperature T1(usually atmosphere)
  • Thus, it transfers heat from a cold to a hot body at the expense of mechanical energy supplied to it by an external agent. The cold is thus cooled more and more.
  • The performance of a refrigerator is expressed using the “coefficient of performance” β which is defined as the ratio of the heat extracted from the cold body to the needed to transfer it to the hot body.

i.e \(\beta=\frac{\text { Heat extracted }}{\text { Work done }}\)

⇒ \(\frac{Q_2}{W}=\frac{Q_2}{Q_1-Q_2}\)

A perfect refrigerator transfers heat from a cold to a hot body without doing work e. W = 0 so that Q1=Q2 hence β = ∞

Carnot Refrigerator:

For Carnot refrigerator \(\frac{Q_1}{Q_2}=\frac{T_1}{T_2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{Q_1-Q_2}{Q_2}=\frac{T_1-T_2}{T_2}\)

or \(\frac{Q_2}{Q_1-Q_2}=\frac{T_2}{T_1-T_2}\)

So Coefficient of performance β = \(\frac{T_2}{\mathrm{~T}_1-\mathrm{T}_2}\)

⇒ \(\beta=\frac{T_2}{T_1-T_2}\)

here T1= temperature of surrounding T2 = temperature of cold body. It is clear that β = 0 when T2= 0 i.e. the coefficient of performance will be zero if the cold body is at a temperature equal to absolute zero.

Relation between the coefficient of performance and efficiency of a refrigerator

We know β = \(\frac{Q_2}{Q_1-Q_2}=\frac{Q_2 / Q_1}{1-Q_2-Q_1}\)…………(1)

But the efficiency η = \(\frac{Q_2}{Q_1} \text { or } \frac{Q_2}{Q_1}=1-\eta\)…………(2)

Form (1) and (2) we get, \(\frac{1-\eta}{\eta}\)

Entropy

Entropy is a measure of the disorder of molecular motion of a system. The greater the disorder, the greater the entropy.

The change in entropy i.e

dS = \(=\frac{\text { Heat absorbed by system }}{\text { Absolute temperature }}\)

or \(\mathrm{dS}=\frac{\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{T}}\)

The relation is called the mathematical form of the Second Law of Thermodynamics.

For solids and liquids

1. When heat is given to a substance changes its state at a constant temperature, then changes in entropy

⇒ \(d S=\frac{d Q}{T}= \pm \frac{m L}{T}\)

where the positive sign refers to heat absorption and the negative sign to heat evolution.

2. When heat given to a substance raises its temperature from T1 to T2 then changes in entropy

⇒ \(d S=\int \frac{d Q}{T}=\int_{T_1}^{T_2} m c \frac{d T}{T}=m c \log _e\left(\frac{T_2}{T_1}\right)\)

⇒ \(\Delta S=2.303 \mathrm{mc} \log _{10}\left(\frac{T_2}{T_1}\right)\)

For a perfect gas: The perfect gas equation for n moles is PV = nRT

ΔS = \(\int \frac{d Q}{T}=\int \frac{\mu C_V d T+P d V}{T}\) [As dQ = dU+dW]

ΔS = \(\int \frac{\mu C_V d T+\frac{\mu R T}{V} d V}{T}\)

⇒ \(\mu C_V \int_{T_1}^{T_2} \frac{d T}{T}+\mu R \int_{V_1}^{V_2} \frac{d V}{V}\) [ As PV = μ RT]

∴ ΔS = \(\mu C_V \text { long }_e\left(\frac{T_2}{T_1}\right)+\mu \log _e\left(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\right)\)

In terms of T and P, ΔS = \(m C_p{lon}_g\left(\frac{T_2}{T_1}\right)-\mu R \log _e\left(\frac{P_2}{P_1}\right)\)

and in terms of P and V ΔS = \(\mu C_V \log _e\left(\frac{P_2}{P_1}\right)+\mu C_p \log _e\left(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\right)\)

 

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics MCQs

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Multiple Choice Question And Answers

Question 1. When an ideal gas is compressed isothermally then its pressure increases because :

  1. Its potential energy decreases
  2. Its kinetic energy increases and molecules move apart
  3. Its number of collisions per unit area with walls of container increases
  4. Molecular energy increases

Answer: 3. Its number of collisions per unit area with walls of container increases

Question 2. Which of the following quantities is zero on average for the molecules of an ideal gas in equilibrium?

  1. Kinetic energy
  2. Momentum
  3. Density
  4. Speed

Answer: 2. Momentum

Question 3. The average momentum of a molecule in a sample of an ideal gas depends on

  1. Temperature
  2. Number of moles
  3. Volume
  4. None of these
  5. Answer: 4. None of these

Question 4. The volume of air increases by 5% in its adiabatic expansion. The percentage decrease in its pressure will be –

  1. 6%
  2. 7%
  3. 8%

Answer: 3. 7%

Question 5. The equation for an ideal gas is :

  1. PV = RT
  2. PVγ = constant
  3. Cp– CV= R
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. PV = RT

Question 6. The temperature and pressure of 2g oxygen are 27° C and 76 cm Hg, then the volume of the gas is:

  1. 1.53 litre
  2. 2.44 litre
  3. 3.08 litre
  4. 44.2 litre

Answer: 1. 1.53 liter

Question 7. Significance of a and b in van der Waal’s equation :

  1. A and b both show the correction in the volume of gas
  2. A and b both show cohesive force between molecules
  3. A shows cohesive force while b shows correction in volume
  4. A shows correction in volume while b shows cohesive force

Answer: 3. A shows cohesive force while b shows correction in volume

Question 8. In which condition a real gas behaves as an ideal gas?

  1. At high pressure
  2. At low pressure
  3. At low temperature
  4. All the above

Answer: 2. At low pressure

Question 9. Which of the following parameters does not characterize the thermodynamic state of matter?

  1. Temperature
  2. Pressure
  3. Work
  4. Volume

Answer: 3. Work

Question 10. 1 calorie is the heat required to increase the temperature of 1 gm of water by 1°C from

  1. 13.5°C to 14.5°C at 76 mm of Hg
  2. 14.5 °C to 15.5°C at 760 mm of Hg
  3. 6.5 °C to 7.5°C at 76 mm of Hg
  4. 98.5 °C to 99.5°C at 760 mm of Hg

Answer: 2. 14.5 °C to 15.5°C at 760 mm of Hg

Question 11. A real gas behaves like an ideal gas if its

  1. Pressure and temperature are both high
  2. Pressure and temperature are both low
  3. Pressure is high and temperature is low
  4. Pressure is low and temperature is high

Answer: 4. Pressure is low and temperature is high

Question 12. Two non-reactive monoatomic ideal gases have their atomic masses in the ratio 2 : 3. The ratio of their partial pressures, when enclosed in a vessel kept at a constant temperature, is 4 : 3. The ratio of their densities is:

  1. 1: 4
  2. 1: 2
  3. 6: 9
  4. 8: 9

Answer: 4. 8: 9

Question 13. The degrees of freedom of a stationary rigid body about its axis will be :

  1. One
  2. Two
  3. Three
  4. Four

Answer: 3. Three

Question 14. The temperature of an ideal gas at atmospheric pressure is 300 K and the volume is 1 m3. If temperature and volume become double, then the pressure will be :

  1. 105 N/m2
  2. 2 × 105 N/m2
  3. 0.5 × 105 N/m2
  4. 4 × 105 N/m2

Answer: 1. 105 N/m2

Question 15. If 2g of helium is enclosed in a vessel at NTP, how much heat should be added to it to double the pressure? (Specific heat of helium = 3 J/gm K)

  1. 1638 J
  2. 1019 J
  3. 1568 J
  4. 836 J

Answer: 1. 1638 J

Question 16. At what temperature volume of an ideal gas at 0ºC become triple?

  1. 546ºC
  2. 182ºC
  3. 819ºC
  4. 646ºC

Answer: 1. 546ºC

Question 17. Two balloons are filled, one with pure He gas and the other with air, respectively. If the pressure and temperature of these balloons are the same, then the number of molecules per unit volume is

  1. More in the He filled balloon
  2. Same in both balloons
  3. More in an air-filled balloon
  4. In the ratio of 1: 4

Answer: 2. Same in both balloons

Question 18. A diatomic molecule has

  1. 1 degree of freedom
  2. 3 degrees of freedom
  3. 5 degrees of freedom
  4. 6 degrees of freedom

Answer: 3. 5 degrees of freedom

Question 19. The equation of state for 5g of oxygen at a pressure P and temperature T, when occupying a volume V, will be :

  1. PV = (5/32) RT
  2. PV = 5RT
  3. PV = (5/2) RT
  4. PV = (5/16) RT

Answer: 1. PV = (5/32) RT

Question 20. Two thermally insulated vessels 1 and 2 are filled with air at temperature (T1, T2), volume (V1, V2), and pressure (P1, P2) respectively. If the valve joining the two vessels is opened, the temperature inside the vessel at equilibrium will be:

  1. \(T_1+T_2\)
  2. \(\left(\mathrm{T}_1+\mathrm{T}_2\right) / 2\)
  3. \(\frac{T_1 T_2\left(P_1 V_1+P_2 V_2\right)}{P_1 V_1 T_2+P_2 V_2 T_1}\)
  4. \(\frac{T_1 T_2\left(P_1 V_1+P_2 V_2\right)}{P_1 V_1 T_1+P_2 V_2 T_2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{T_1 T_2\left(P_1 V_1+P_2 V_2\right)}{P_1 V_1 T_2+P_2 V_2 T_1}\)

Question 21. A gas behaves more closely as an ideal gas at

  1. Low pressure and low temperature
  2. Low pressure and high temperature
  3. High pressure and low temperature
  4. High pressure and high temperature

Answer: 2. Low pressure and high temperature

Question 22. The figure shows graphs of pressure vs density for an ideal gas at two temperatures T1 and T2.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Graphs Of Pressure Vs Density For An Ideal Gas At Two Temperatures

  1. T1> T2
  2. T1= T2
  3. T1< T2
  4. Any of the three is possible

Answer: 1. T1> T2

Question 23. Suppose a container is evacuated to leave just one molecule of gas in it. Let νa and νrms represent the average speed and the rms speed of the gas.

  1. νa> νrms
  2. νa< νrms
  3. νa= νrms
  4. νrms is undefined

Answer: 3. νa= νrms

Question 24. The rms speed of oxygen molecules in a gas is ν. If the temperature is doubled and the O2 molecule dissociates into oxygen atoms, the rms speed will become

  1. ν
  2. ν √2

Answer: 3. 2ν

Question 25. Consider a mixture of oxygen and hydrogen kept at room temperature. Compared to a hydrogen molecule an oxygen molecule hits the wall

  1. With a greater average speed
  2. With a smaller average speed
  3. With greater average kinetic energy
  4. With smaller average kinetic energy.

Answer: 2. With a smaller average speed

Question 26. Consider the quantity MkT / pV of an ideal gas where M is the mass of the gas. It depends on the

  1. Temperature of the gas
  2. The volume of the gas
  3. The pressure of the gas
  4. Nature of the gas

Answer: 4. Nature of the gas

Question 27. If the volume of a gas is decreased by 10% during the isothermal process then its pressure will be –

  1. Decrease by 10%
  2. Increase by 10%
  3. Decrease by 11.11%
  4. Increase by 11.11%

Answer: 4. Increase by 11.11%

Question 28. The gases carbon-monoxide (CO) and nitrogen at the same temperature have kinetic energies E1 and E2 respectively. Then :

  1. E1= E2
  2. E1> E2
  3. E1< E2
  4. E1 and E2 cannot be compared

Answer: 1. E1= E2

Question 29. In equilibrium, the velocity of molecules of a gas depends on its temperature as

  1. \(\mathrm{u} \propto \mathrm{T}\)
  2. \(\mathrm{u} \propto \frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}}\)
  3. \(\mathrm{u} \propto \sqrt{\mathrm{T}}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{u} \propto \mathrm{T}^0\)

Answer: 3. \(\mathrm{u} \propto \sqrt{\mathrm{T}}\)

Question 30. A mixture of 2 moles of helium gas (atomic mass = 4 amu) and 1 mole of argon gas (atomic mass = 40 amu) is kept at 300 K in a container. The ratio of the rms speeds \(\left(\frac{v_{\mathrm{rms}}(\text { helium })}{v_{\mathrm{rms}}(\text { argon })}\right)\) is:

  1. 0.32
  2. 0.45
  3. 2.24
  4. 3.16

Answer: 4. 3.16

Question 31. The ratio of the average kinetic energy of H2 and O2 at a given temperature is :

  1. 1: 16
  2. 1: 8
  3. 1: 4
  4. 1: 1

Answer: 4. 1: 1

Question 32. If the temperature of the gas is increased to three times, then its root mean square velocity becomes:

  1. 3 times
  2. 9 times
  3. 12times
  4. 3times

Answer: 4. 3times

Question 33. Which of the following statements is incorrect according to assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases?

  1. The potential energy of a molecule is zero
  2. Molecules move randomly in all directions
  3. the kinetic energy of molecules changes when they collide with the wall of a container
  4. None of these

Answer: 4. None of these

Question 34. At what temperature is the rms velocity of a hydrogen molecule equal to that of an oxygen molecule at 47º C?

  1. 80 K
  2. –73 K
  3. 3 K
  4. 20 K

Answer: 4. 20 K

Question 35. The kinetic energy of one mole gas at 300 K temperature, is E. At 400 K temperature kinetic energy is E’.The value of E’/E is :

  1. 1.33
  2. \(\sqrt{\left(\frac{4}{3}\right)}\)
  3. \(\frac{16}{9}\)
  4. 2

Answer: 1. 1.33

Question 36. If the temperature becomes triple, the root mean square velocity of gas molecules will be :

  1. \(\text { v } \sqrt{2}\)
  2. \(\text { v/ } \sqrt{3}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{3} v\)
  4. Same

Answer: 3. \(\sqrt{3} v\)

[υ is the root mean square velocity of gas molecules at temperature T]

Question 37. On increasing the temperature of gas contained in a closed vessel by 1°C, the pressure increases by 0.4%. The initial temperature of a gas is:

  1. 25 K
  2. 250 K
  3. 2500° K
  4. 250° C

Answer: 2. 250 K

Question 38. When the temperature of a gas is increased then which of the following statements is always true?

  1. Work is done on the gas
  2. Heat is supplied to a gas
  3. The internal energy of the gas is increased
  4. The pressure of gas remains unchanged.

Answer: 3. Internal energy of a gas is increased

Question 39. The speed of sound through oxygen at TK is v ms-1. As the temperature becomes 2T and oxygen gas dissociates into atomic oxygen, the speed of sound :

  1. Remains the same
  2. Becomes 2v
  3. Becomes \(\sqrt{2 v}\)
  4. None of these

Answer: 4. None of these

Question 40. When the temperature of an ideal gas is increased from 27ºC to 227ºC, its rms speed is changed from 400 m/s to vs. The vs is :

  1. 516 m/s
  2. 450 m/s
  3. 310 m/s
  4. 746 m/s

Answer: 1. 516 m/s

Question 41. The root mean square and most probable speed of the molecules in a gas are

  1. Same
  2. Different
  3. Cannot say
  4. Depends on the nature of the gas

Answer: 2. Different

Question 42. Hydrogen gas is filled in a container of volume 20 liter. The average translational kinetic energy of all its molecules is 1.5 × 105 J. Pressure of hydrogen in the cylinder is:

  1. 2 × 106 N/m2
  2. 3 × 106 N/m2
  3. 4 × 106 N/m2
  4. 5 × 106 N/m2

Answer: 4. 5 × 106 N/m2

Question 43. The root mean square speed of ideal hydrogen gas in a closed chamber at 0°C is 3180 m/s. Its pressure will be (density of hydrogen gas is 8.99 × 10-2 kg/m3, 1 atm. = 1.01 × 105 N/m2)

  1. 1.0 atm.
  2. 1.5 atm.
  3. 2.0 atm.
  4. 3.0 atm.

Answer: 4. 3.0 atm.

Question 44. A flask contains argon and chlorine in the ratio 3: 1 by mass. The temperature of the mixture is 300 K. If the atomic mass of argon = 39.9 u, and the molecular mass of chlorine = 70.9u, then the ratio of average kinetic energy per molecule of argon to chlorine gas is

  1. 1: 1
  2. 3: 1
  3. 1 : 3
  4. 39.9: 70.9

Answer: 1. 1: 1

Question 45. At the same temperature and pressure, the densities of two diatomic gases are d1 and d2, The ratio of velocities of sound in these gases will be

  1. \(\frac{d_1}{d_2}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{d_2}{d_1}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{d_1}{d_2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{d_2^2}{d_1^2}\)

Answer: 2. \(\sqrt{\frac{d_2}{d_1}}\)

Question 46. The ratio of the mean speed of hydrogen molecules to the mean speed of nitrogen molecules in a sample containing a mixture of the two gases.

  1. \(\sqrt{14}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{7}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{28}\)
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{14}\)

Question 47. Three closed vessels A, B, and C are at the same temperature T, and contain gases that obey the Maxwellian distribution of velocities. Vessel A contains only O2, B only N2, and C a mixture of equal quantities of O2 and N2. If the average speed of O2 molecules in vessel A is V1, that of the N2 molecules in vessel B is V2, the average speed of the O2 molecules in vessel C will be :

  1. (V1+ V2)/2
  2. V1
  3. (V1V2)1/2
  4. \(\sqrt{3 \mathrm{kT} / \mathrm{M}}\)

Answer: 2. V1

Question 48. The pressure of an ideal gas is written as P = \(\frac{2 E}{3 V}\). Here E refers to

  1. Translational kinetic energy
  2. Rotational kinetic energy
  3. Vibrational kinetic energy
  4. Total kinetic energy.

Answer: 1. Translational kinetic energy

Question 49. Which of the following quantities is the same for all ideal gases at the same temperature?

  1. The kinetic energy of 1 mole
  2. The kinetic energy of 1 g
  3. The number of molecules in 1 mole
  4. The number of molecules in 1 g

Answer: 3. The number of molecules in 1 mole

Question 50. Let ΔU1 and ΔU2 be the changes in internal energy of the system in the processes A and B then

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A System Goes From A To B Via Two Processes 1 And 2

  1. ΔU1> ΔU2
  2. ΔU1= ΔU2
  3. ΔU1< ΔU2
  4. ΔU1≠ ΔU2

Answer: 2. ΔU1= ΔU2

Question 51. The internal energy of a mono-atomic gas is –

  1. \(\frac{5 R T}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{3 R T}{2}\)
  3. \(\frac{5 R T}{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{7 R T}{3}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{3 R T}{2}\)

Question 52. The change in internal energy, when a gas is cooled from 927ºC to 27ºC is

  1. 100%
  2. 200%
  3. 75%
  4. 400%

Answer: 3. 75%

Question 53. A gas mixture consists of 2 moles of oxygen and 4 moles of argon at temperature T. Neglecting all vibrational modes the total internal energy of the system is:

  1. 4RT
  2. 15RT
  3. 9RT
  4. 11RT

Answer: 4. 11RT

Question 54. An ideal gas is filled in a closed rigid and thermally insulated container. A coil of 100Ω resistor carrying current 1A for 5 minutes supplies heat to the gas. The change in internal energy of the gas is

  1. 10 KJ
  2. 20 KJ
  3. 30 KJ
  4. 0 KJ

Answer: 3. 30 KJ

Question 55. 300 calories of heat is supplied to raise the temperature of 50 gm of air from 20°C to 30°C without any change in its volume. Change in internal energy per gram of air is

  1. Zero
  2. 0.6 calories
  3. 1.2 calories
  4. 6.0 calories

Answer: 4. 6.0 calories

Question 56. Cooking gas containers are kept in a lorry moving with uniform speed. The temperature of the gas molecules inside will:

  1. Increase
  2. Decrease
  3. Remain same
  4. Decrease for some, while increase for others

Answer: 3. Remain same

Question 57. According to the law of equal distribution of energy, the mean energy of a molecule per degree of freedom is:

  1. \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{KT}\)
  2. KT
  3. \(\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{KT}\)
  4. \(\frac{5}{2} \mathrm{KT}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{KT}\)

Question 58. Which of the following statements is correct for any thermodynamic system?

  1. The internal energy changes in all processes
  2. Internal energy and entropy are state functions
  3. The change in entropy can never be zero
  4. The work done in an adiabatic process is always zero

Answer: 2. Internal energy and entropy are state functions

Question 59. A system goes from A to B via two processes 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. If ΔU1 and ΔU2 are the changes in internal energies in processes 1 and 2 respectively, then:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A System Goes From A To B Via Two Processes 1 And 2

  1. ΔU1= ΔU2
  2. The relation between ΔU1 and ΔU2 cannot be determined
  3. ΔU2> ΔU1
  4. ΔU2< ΔU1

Answer: 1. ΔU1= ΔU2

Question 60. Two rigid boxes containing different ideal gases are placed on a table. Box A contains one mole of nitrogen at temperature To, while box B contains one mole of helium at temperature (7/3)To. The boxes are then put into thermal contact with each other, and heat flows between them until the gases reach a common final temperature. (Ignore the heat capacity of boxes). Then, the final temperature of the gases, Tfin terms of T0 is :

  1. \(\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{3}{7} \mathrm{~T}_0\)
  2. \(\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{7}{3} \mathrm{~T}_0\)
  3. \(T_f=\frac{3}{2} T_0\)
  4. \(\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{5}{2} \mathrm{~T}_0\)

Answer: 3. \(T_f=\frac{3}{2} T_0\)

Question 61. An insulated container of gas has two chambers separated by an insulating partition. One of the chambers has volume V1 and contains ideal gas at pressure p1 and temperature T1. The other chamber has volume V2 and contains ideal gas at pressure p2 and temperature T2. If the partition is removed without doing any work on the gas, the final equilibrium temperature of the gas in the container will be –

  1. \(\frac{T_1 T_2\left(p_1 V_1+p_2 V_2\right)}{p_1 V_1 T_2+p_2 V_2 T_1}\)
  2. \(\frac{p_1 V_1 T_1+p_2 V_2 T_2}{p_1 V_1+p_2 V_2}\)
  3. \(\frac{p_1 V_1 T_2+p_2 V_2 T_1}{p_1 V_1+p_2 V_2}\)
  4. \(\frac{T_1 T_2\left(p_1 V_1+p_2 V_2\right)}{p_1 V_1 T_1+p_2 V_2 T_2}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{T_1 T_2\left(p_1 V_1+p_2 V_2\right)}{p_1 V_1 T_2+p_2 V_2 T_1}\)

Question 62. In the following figures to (4), variation of volume by change of pressure is shown. A gas is taken along the path ABCDA. The change in internal energy of the gas will be:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Gas Is Taken Along The Path ABCDA The Change In Internal Energy Of The Gas

  1. Positive in all cases from(1) to (4)
  2. Positive in case (1), and but zero in case(4)
  3. Negative in cases (1), and but zero in case
  4. Zero in all the four cases.

Answer: 4. Zero in all the four cases.

Question 63. An ideal gas changes from state a to state b as shown in Fig. What is the work done by the gas in the process?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics An Ideal Gas Changes From State a To State b

  1. Zero
  2. Positive
  3. Negative
  4. Infinite

Answer: 1. Zero

Question 64. The process ΔU = 0, for an ideal gas, can be best represented in the form of a graph:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics An Ideal Gas Can Be Best Represented In The Form Of A Graph

Answer: 2

Question 65. In the following V-T diagram what is the relation between P1 and P2:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics In The Following VT Diagram The Relation Between P1 And P2

  1. P2= P1
  2. P2> P1
  3. P2< P1
  4. Cannot be predicted

Answer: 3. P2< P1

Question 66. In the isothermal expansion of an ideal gas. Select the wrong statement:

  1. There is no change in the temperature of the gas
  2. There is no change in the internal energy of the gas
  3. The work done by the gas is equal to the heat supplied to the gas
  4. The work done by the gas is equal to the change in its internal energy

Answer: 4. The work done by the gas is equal to the change in its internal energy

Question 67. In the cyclic process shown on the P – V diagram, the magnitude of the work done is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics In The Cyclic Process Shown On The P V Diagram The Magnitude Of The Work Done

  1. \(\pi\left(\frac{P_2-P_1}{2}\right)^2\)
  2. \(\pi\left(\frac{V_2-V_1}{2}\right)^2\)
  3. \(\frac{\pi}{4}\left(P_2-P_1\right)\left(V_2-V_1\right)\)
  4. \(\pi\left(P_2 V_2-P_1 V_1\right)\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\pi}{4}\left(P_2-P_1\right)\left(V_2-V_1\right)\)

Question 68. A fixed mass of ideal gas undergoes changes in pressure and volume starting at L, as shown in Figure.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Fixed Mass Of Ideal Gas Undergoes Changes Of Pressure And Volume Starting At L

Which of the following is correct :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Fixed Mass Of Ideal Gas Undergoes Changes Of Pressure And Volume Starting At L.

Answer: 2

Question 69. A fixed mass of gas undergoes the cycle of changes represented by PQRSP as shown in Figure. In some of the changes, work is done on the gas, and in others, work is done by the gas. In which pair of the changes work is done on the gas?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Fixed Mass Of Gas Undergoes The Cycle Of Changes Represented By PQRSP

  1. PQ and RS
  2. PQ and QR
  3. OR and RS
  4. RS and SP.

Answer: 4. RS and SP

Question 70. Consider two processes on a system as shown in Figure. The volumes in the initial states are the same in the two processes and the volumes in the final states are also the same. Let ΔW1 and ΔW2 be the work done by the system in the processes A and B respectively.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Volumes In The Final States Are Also The Same

  1. ΔW1> ΔW2
  2. ΔW1= ΔW2
  3. ΔW1< ΔW2
  4. Nothing can be said about the relation between ΔW1 and ΔW2

Answer: 3. ΔW1< ΔW2

Question 71. A mass of an ideal gas undergoes a reversible isothermal compression. Its molecules will then be compared with an initial state, the same

  1. Root mean square velocity
  2. Mean momentum
  3. Mean kinetic energy
  1. (1), (2), (3) correct
  2. (1), (2) correct
  3. (2), (3) correct
  4. (1) correct

Answer: 1. (1), (2), (3) correct

Question 72. Find work done by the gas in the process shown in the figure:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Work Done By The Gas In The Process

  1. \(\frac{5}{2} \pi{atm} \mathrm{L}\)
  2. \(\frac{5}{2} \mathrm{~atm} \mathrm{~L}\)
  3. \(-\frac{3}{2} \pi {atm} \mathrm{L}\)
  4. \(-\frac{5}{4} \pi \mathrm{atm} \mathrm{L}\)

Answer: 4. \(-\frac{5}{4} \pi \mathrm{atm} \mathrm{L}\)

Question 73. The change in internal energy of two moles of a gas during adiabatic expansion is found to be –100 joule. The work done during the process is –

  1. 100 joule
  2. –100 joule
  3. Zero
  4. 200 joule

Answer: 1. 100 joule

Question 74. The work done in the following figure is –

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Work Done In The Following Figure

  1. 2 × 105joule
  2. 105joule
  3. Zero
  4. 3 × 105joule

Answer: 2. 105joule

Question 75. The net amount of the work done in the following indicator diagram is –

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Net Amount Of The Work Done In The Following Indicator

  1. Zero
  2. Positive
  3. Negative
  4. Infinite

Answer: 1. Zero

Question 76. An ideal gas is taken via paths AB, BC, and CA as shown in Fig. The net work done in the whole cycle is-

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Thermodynaic Processes Are Indicated The Net Work Done In The Whole Cycle

  1. 3P1V1
  2. –3P1V1
  3. 6P1V1
  4. 12P1V1

Answer: 2. –3P1V1

Question 77. In the indicator diagram shown, the work done along path AB is-

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics In The Indicator Diagram Shown The Work Done Along Path AB

  1. Zero
  2. 20 joule
  3. –20 joule
  4. 60 joule

Answer: 2. 20 joule

Question 78. In the above problem work done along path BC is –

  1. Zero
  2. 40 joule
  3. 60 joule
  4. None

Answer: 1. Zero

Question 79. In the above problem, the work done along path CA is –

  1. 20 joule
  2. 30 joule
  3. – 30 joule
  4. Zero

Answer: 3. –30 joule

Question 80. Starting the same initial conditions, an ideal gas expands from volume V1 to V2 in three different ways. The work done by the gas is W1 if the process is purely isothermal, W2 if purely isobaric, and W3 if purely adiabatic. Then:

  1. W2> W1> W3
  2. W2> W3> W1
  3. W1> W2> W3
  4. W1> W3> W2

Answer: 1. W2> W1> W3

Question 81. An ideal gas is taken through the cycle A → B → C → A as shown in Fig. If the net heat supplied to the gas in the cycle is 5 J, the work done by the gas in the process C → A is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics An Ideal Gas Is Taken Through The Net Heat Supplied To The Gas In The Cycle

  1. – 5 J
  2. – 10 J
  3. – 15 J
  4. – 20 J

Answer: 1. – 5 J

Question 82. The work done by a gas taken through the closed process ABCA, see figure is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Work Done By A Gas Taken Through The Closed Process ABCA

  1. 6P0V0
  2. 4P0V0
  3. P0V0
  4. Zero

Answer: 1. 6P0V0

Question 83. A system is given 400 calories of heat and 1000 joule of work is done by the system, then the change in internal energy of the system will be –

  1. 680 joule
  2. 680 erg
  3. 860 joule
  4. – 860 joule

Answer: 1. 680 joule

Question 84. If AB and CD are isothermals and AD and BC are adiabatic then the temperatures of

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics If AB And CD Are Isothermals And AD And BC Are Adiabatics

  1. B and C are the same
  2. A and C are the same
  3. B and D are the same
  4. The temperature of A is more than that of D

Answer: 4. Temperature of A is more than that of D

Question 85. An ideal gas initially at a state (P1, V1) is allowed to expand isothermally to a state (P2, V2). Then the gas is compressed adiabatically to its initial volume V1. Let the final pressure be P3 and the work done by the gas during the whole process be W, then

  1. P3> P1 and W < 0
  2. P3> P1 and W > 0
  3. P3< P1 and W > 0
  4. P3< P1 and W < 0

Answer: 1. P3> P1 and W < 0

Question 86. An ideal gas is taken through the process shown in the figure:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Ideal Gas Is Taken Through Process

  1. In process AB, work done by the system is positive
  2. In process AB, heat is rejected out of the system.
  3. In process AB, internal energy increases
  4. In process AB internal energy decreases and in process BC internal energy increases.

Answer: 2. In process AB, heat is rejected out of the system.

Question 87. If heat is supplied to an ideal gas in an isothermal process,

  1. The internal energy of the gas will increase
  2. The gas will do positive work
  3. The gas will do negative work
  4. The said process is not possible

Answer: 2. The gas will do positive work

Question 88. A system can be taken from the initial state p1, V1 to the final state p2, V2 by two different methods. Let ΔQ and ΔW represent the heat given to the system and the work done by the system. Which of the following must be the same in both methods?

  1. ΔQ
  2. ΔW
  3. ΔQ + ΔW
  4. ΔQ – ΔW

Answer: 4. ΔQ – ΔW

Question 89. In changing the state of a system from state A to state B adiabatically the work done on the system is 322 joule. If 100 calories of heat are given to the system in bringing it from state B to state A, then the work done on the system in this process will be –

  1. 98 joule
  2. 38.2 joule
  3. 15.9 calorie
  4. 15.9 joule

Answer: 1. 98 joule

Question 90. An ideal gas heat engine operates in a Carnot cycle between 227ºC and 127ºC. It absorbs 6 kcal at a higher temperature. The amount of heat (in kcal) converted into work is equal to:

  1. 1.6
  2. 1.2
  3. 4.8
  4. 3.5

Answer: 2. 1.2

Question 91. In a closed container of 44.8 liter, the volume of monoatomic gas is filled up. The heat required to raise the temperature by 10°C will be :

  1. R
  2. 10R
  3. 20R
  4. 30R

Answer: 4. 30R

Question 92. Two moles of an ideal gas are taken in a cyclic process abcda. During the process, ab and cd temperatures are 500 K and 300 K respectively. Calculate heat absorbed by the system (In 2 = 0.69 and R = 8.3 J/mol-K)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Two Mole Of An Idea Gas Is Taken In A Cyclic Process abcda

Answer: 2290.3j

Question 93. If Q, E, and W denote respectively the heat added, change in internal energy, and the work done in a closed cycle process, then

  1. W = 0
  2. Q = W = 0
  3. E = 0
  4. Q = 0

Answer: 3. E = 0

Question 94. Which of the following is incorrect regarding the first law of thermodynamics?

  1. It does not apply to any cycle process
  2. It is a restatement of the principle of conservation of energy
  3. It introduces the concept of the internal energy
  4. It introduces the concept of the entropy

Answer: (1,4)

Question 95. When a system is taken from state I to state f along the path, it is found that Q = 50 cal and W = 20 cal. Along the path ibf Q = 36 cal. W along the path ibf is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A System Is Taken From State I To State F Along The Path Iaf

  1. 6 cal
  2. 16 cal
  3. 66 cal
  4. 14 cal

Answer: 1. 6 cal

Question 96. When an ideal diatomic gas is heated at constant pressure, the fraction of the heat energy supplied which increases the internal energy of the gas is.

  1. \(\frac{2}{5}\)
  2. \(\frac{3}{5}\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{7}\)
  4. \(\frac{5}{7}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{5}{7}\)

Question 97. Boiling water is changing into steam. Under this condition, the specific heat of water is

  1. Zero
  2. One
  3. Infinite
  4. Less than one

Answer: 3. Infinite

Question 98. Supposing the distance between the atoms of a diatomic gas to be constant, its specific heat at constant volume per mole (gram mole) is

  1. \(\frac{5}{2} R\)
  2. \(\frac{3}{2} R\)
  3. R
  4. \(\frac{7}{2} R\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{5}{2} R\)

Question 99. A gas is formed of molecules each molecule possessing f degrees of freedom, then the value of γ = \(\frac{C_p}{C_V}\)is equal to:

  1. \(\frac{2}{\mathrm{f}}\)
  2. \(1+\frac{2}{f}\)
  3. \(1+\frac{f}{2}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{f}+\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer: 2. \(1+\frac{2}{f}\)

Question 100. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a gas is found to be proportional to the cube of its absolute temperature. The ratio Cp/CV for the gas is:

  1. 4/3
  2. 2
  3. 5/3
  4. 3/2

Answer: 4. 3/2

Question 101. Some students find values of CV and CP for gas in calorie/gm–mol K. Which pair is most correct?

  1. CV= 3, CP= 5
  2. CV= 4, CP= 6
  3. CV= 3, CP= 2
  4. CV= 3, CP= 4.2

Answer: 1. CV= 3, CP= 5

Question 102. The thermal capacity of anybody is:

  1. A measure of its capacity to absorb heat
  2. A measure of its capacity to provide heat
  3. The quantity of heat required to raise its temperature by a unit degree
  4. The quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of the body by a unit degree

Answer: 3. The quantity of heat required to raise its temperature by a unit degree

Question 103. 1 mole of a gas with γ = 7/5 is mixed with 1 mole of a gas with γ = 5/3, then the value of γ for the resulting mixture is:

  1. 7/5
  2. 2/5
  3. 24/16
  4. 12/7

Answer: 3. 24/16

Question 104. The molar heat capacity at a constant volume of oxygen gas at STP is nearly 2.5 R. As the temperature is increased, it gradually increases and approaches 3.5 R. The most appropriate reason for this behavior is that at high temperatures

  1. Oxygen does not behave as an ideal gas
  2. Oxygen molecules dissociate in atoms
  3. The molecules collide more frequently
  4. Molecular vibration gradually becomes effective

Answer: 3. The molecules collide more frequently

Question 105. The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 100 gm water from 20ºC to 40ºC will be –

  1. 100 calorie
  2. 2000 calorie
  3. 4000 calorie
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. 2000 calorie

Question 106. Two moles of ideal helium gas are in a rubber balloon at 30° C. The balloon is fully expandable and can be assumed to require no energy in its expansion. The temperature of the gas in the balloon is slowly changed to 35°C. The amount of heat required in raising the temperature is nearly (take R = 8.31 J/mol.K)

  1. 62J
  2. 104 J
  3. 124 J
  4. 208 J

Answer: 4. 208 J

Question 107. The molar specific heat at constant pressure of an ideal gas is \(\left(\frac{7}{2}\right)\) R. The ratio of specific heat at constant pressure to that at constant volume is:

  1. \(\frac{7}{5}\)
  2. \(\frac{8}{7}\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{7}\)
  4. \(\frac{9}{7}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{7}{5}\)

Question 108. One mole of ideal monoatomic gas (γ = 5/3) is mixed with one mole of diatomic gas (γ = 7/5). What is γ for the mixture? γ denotes the ratio of specific heat at constant pressure, to that at constant volume.

  1. 3/2
  2. 23/15
  3. 35/23
  4. 4/3

Answer: 1. 3/2

Question 109. A gaseous mixture consists of 16 g of helium and 16 g of oxygen. The ratio
Cof the mixture is:

  1. 1.59
  2. 1.62
  3. 1.4
  4. 1.54

Answer: 2. 1.62

Question 110. If CP and CV denote the specific heats of nitrogen per unit mass at constant pressure and constant volume respectively, then

  1. CP – CV = R / 28
  2. CP – CV = R / 14
  3. CP – CV = R
  4. CP – CV = 28R

Answer: 1. CP – CV = R/28

Question 111. A gas is contained in a metallic cylinder fitted with a piston. The piston is suddenly moved in to compress the gas and is maintained at this position. As time passes, after this pressure of the gas in the cylinder

  1. Increases
  2. Decreases
  3. Remains constant
  4. Increases or decreases depending on the nature of the gas.

Answer: 2. Decreases

Question 112. Two samples A and B are initially kept in the same state. Sample A is expanded through an adiabatic process and sample B through an isothermal process upto the same final volume. The final pressures in A and B are pA and pB respectively.

  1. pA> pB
  2. pA= pB
  3. pA< pB
  4. The relation between pA and pB cannot be deduced.

Answer: 3. pA< pB

Question 113. Let Ta and Tb be the final temperature of the samples A and B respectively in the previous question then:

  1. Ta< Tb
  2. Ta= Tb
  3. Ta> Tb
  4. The relation between Ta and Tb cannot be deduced.

Answer: 1. Ta< Tb

Question 114. Let ΔWa and ΔWb be the work done by the systems A and B respectively in the previous question then:

  1. ΔWa> ΔWb
  2. ΔWa= ΔWb
  3. ΔWa< ΔWb
  4. The relation between Wa and Wb cannot be deduced

Answer: 3. ΔWa< ΔWb

Question 115. Four curves A, B, C, and D are drawn in Figure. for a given amount of gas. The curves that represent adiabatic and isothermal changes are

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Curves Which Represent Adiabatic And Isothermal

  1. C and D respectively
  2. D and C respectively
  3. A and B respectively
  4. B and A respectively

Answer: 3. A and B respectively

Question 116. For an ideal gas, the heat capacity at constant pressure is larger than that at constant volume because

  1. Positive work is done during the expansion of the gas by the external pressure
  2. Positive work is done during expansion by the gas against external pressure
  3. Positive work is done during expansion by the gas against intermolecular forces of attraction
  4. More collisions occur per unit of time when volume is kept constant.

Answer: 2. Positive work is done during expansion by the gas against external pressure

Question 117. A gas has:

  1. One specific heat only
  2. Two specific heats only
  3. An infinite number of specific heats
  4. No specific heat

Answer: 3. Infinite number of specific heats

Question 118. For a solid with a small expansion coefficient,

  1. Cp– Cv= R
  2. Cp– Cv= R
  3. Cp is slightly greater than Cv
  4. Cp is slightly less than Cv

Answer: 3. Cp is slightly greater than Cv

Question 119. When an ideal gas undergoes an adiabatic change causing a temperature change ΔT

  1. There is no heat gained or lost by the gas
  2. The work done by the gas is equal to the change in internal energy
  3. The change in internal energy per mole of the gas is Cv ΔT, where Cvis the molar heat capacity at constant volume.
  1. (1), (2), (3) correct
  2. (1), (2) correct
  3. (1), (3) correct
  4. (1) correct

Answer: 3. (1), (3) correct

Question 120. The adiabatic bulk modulus of hydrogen gas (γ = 1.4) at NTP is:

  1. 1 × 105 N/m2
  2. 1 × 10-5 N/m2
  3. 1.4 N/m2
  4. 1.4 × 105 N/m2

Answer: 4. 1.4 × 105 N/m2

Question 121. A given quantity of a gas is at pressure P and absolute temperature T. The isothermal bulk modulus of the gas is:

  1. \(\frac{2}{3} P\)
  2. P
  3. \(\frac{3}{2} P\)
  4. 2P

Answer: 2. P

Question 122. A and B are two adiabatic curves for two different gases. Then A and B correspond to:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A And B Are Two Adiabatic Curves For Two Different Gases

  1. Ar and He respectively
  2. He and H2 respectively
  3. O2 and H2 respectively
  4. H2 and He respectively

Answer: 2. He and H2 respectively

Question 123. In a cyclic process shown in the figure an ideal gas is adiabatically taken from B and A., the work done on the gas during the process B → A is 30 J, and when the gas is taken from A → B the heat absorbed by the gas is 20 J. The change in internal energy of the gas in the process A → B is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics In A Cyclic Process In Internal Energy Of The Gas In The Process

  1. 20 J
  2. – 30 J
  3. 50 J
  4. – 10 J

Answer: 2. –30 J

Question 124. An ideal gas is allowed to expand freely against a vacuum in a rigid insulated container. The gas undergoes:

  1. An increase in its internal energy
  2. A decrease in its internal energy
  3. Neither an increase nor decrease in temperature or internal energy
  4. An increase in temperature

Answer: 1. An increase in its internal energy

Question 125. For free expansion of a gas in an adiabatic container which of the following is true?

  1. Q = W = 0 and ΔU = 0
  2. Q = 0, W > 0 and ΔU = Q
  3. W = 0, Q > 0 and ΔU = Q
  4. W = 0, Q < 0 and ΔU = 0

Answer: 1. Q = W = 0 and ΔU = 0

Question 126. In an adiabatic process on a gas with γ = 1.4, the pressure is increased by 0.5%. The volume decreases by about

  1. 0.36%
  2. 0.5%
  3. 0.7&
  4. 1%

Answer: 1. 0.36%

Question 127. A fixed mass of an ideal gas undergoes the change represented by XYZX below. Which one of the following sets could describe these changes?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Fixed Mass Of An Ideal Gas Undergoes The Chage Represented By XYZX

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Fixed Mass Of An Ideal Gas Undergoes The Chage Represented By XYZX

Answer: 4

Question 128. Starting with the same initial conditions, an ideal gas expands from volume V1 to V2 in three different ways. The work done by the gas is W1 if the process is isothermal, W2 if isobaric and W3 if adiabatic, then :

  1. W2> W1> W3
  2. W2> W3> W1
  3. W1> W2> W3
  4. W1> W3> W2

Answer: 1. W2> W1> W3

Question 129. A gas is expanded from volume V0 to 2V0 under three different processes. Process 1 is isobaric, process 2 is isothermal and process 3 is adiabatic. Let ΔU1, ΔU2, and ΔU3 be the change in internal energy of the gas in these three processes. Then:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Gas Is Expanded From Volume Under Three Different Processes

  1. ΔU1> ΔU2> ΔU3
  2. ΔU1< ΔU2< ΔU3
  3. ΔU2< ΔU1< ΔU3
  4. ΔU2< ΔU3< ΔU1

Answer: 1. ΔU1> ΔU2> ΔU3

Question 130. The molar heat capacity for the process shown in fig. is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Molar Heat Capacity

  1. C = Cp
  2. C = Cv
  3. C > Cv
  4. C = 0

Answer: 4. C = 0

Question 131. Find the amount of work done to increase the temperature of one mole of ideal gas by 30ºC. if it is expanding under the condition V ∝ T2/3 (R = 8.31 J/mol – K):

  1. 16.62 J
  2. 166.2 J
  3. 1662 J
  4. 1.662 J

Answer: 2. 166.2 J

Question 132. A gas undergoes a process in which its pressure P and volume V are related as VPn = constant. The bulk modulus of the gas in the process is:

  1. no
  2. P1/n
  3. P/n
  4. Pn

Answer: 3. P/n

Question 133. V = \(k\left(\frac{P}{T}\right)^{0.33}\) where k is constant. It is a,

  1. Isothermal process
  2. Adiabatic process
  3. Isochoric process
  4. Isobaric process

Answer: 3. Isochoric process

Question 134. For the adiabatic process of an ideal gas the value of \(\frac{d P}{P}\) is equal to –

  1. \(-\gamma \frac{d V}{V}\)
  2. \(-\gamma \frac{V}{d V}\)
  3. \(\frac{d V}{V}\)
  4. \(-\gamma^2 \frac{d V}{V}\)

Answer: 1. \(-\gamma \frac{d V}{V}\)

Question 135. The isobaric modulus of elasticity is –

  1. Zero
  2. 1
  3. \(\frac{C_p}{C_v}\)

Answer: 2. Zero

Question 136. Two samples of a gas A and B initially at the same temperature and pressure, are compressed to half their initial volume, A isothermally and B adiabatically. The final pressure in –

  1. A and B will be the same
  2. A will be more than in B
  3. A will be less than B
  4. A will be double that in B

Answer: 3. A will be less than in B

Question 137. The isothermal bulk modulus of elasticity of a gas is 1.5 × 105 N/m2. Its adiabatic bulk modulus of elasticity will be if γ = 1.4 –

  1. 1.5 × 105 N/m2
  2. 3 × 105 N/m2
  3. 2.1 × 105 N/m2

Answer: 3. 2.1 × 105 N/m2

Question 138. The pressure and volume of a diatomic gas are P and V respectively. It is compressed suddenly to 1/32 of its initial volume then its final pressure will be –

  1. 32 P
  2. 128 P
  3. P/128
  4. P/32

Answer: 2. 128 P

Question 139. The work done by gas in an adiabatic process depends on –

  1. Change in temperature
  2. Change in volume
  3. Change in pressure
  4. Change is heat

Answer: 1. Change in temperature

Question 140. The volume of a gas is reduced to 1/4 of its initial volume adiabatically at 27ºC. The final temperature of the gas will be if γ = 1.4 –

  1. 300 × (4)0.4 K
  2. 100 × (4)0.4 K
  3. 27 × (4)0.4 K
  4. 300 × (1/4)0.4 K

Answer: 1. 300 × (4)0.4 K

Question 141. 1 m3 of gas is compressed suddenly at atmospheric pressure and temperature 27ºC such that its temperature becomes 627ºC. The final pressure of the gas will be (γ = 1.5)-

  1. 27 × 106 N/m2
  2. 7.2 × 105 N/m2
  3. 2.7 × 105 N/m2
  4. 27 × 105 N/m2

Answer: 4. 27 × 105 N/m2

Question 142. If 1 kg air (γ = 1.4) is heated adiabatically from 0ºC to 10ºC then the increase in its internal energy will be (Cv= 0.172 cal/gmºC) –

  1. 1720 joule
  2. 7224 joule
  3. 172 calorie
  4. 7224 calorie

Answer: 2. 7224 joule

Question 143. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a gas is found to be proportional to the cube of its absolute temperature. The value of γ for the gas is –

  1. \(\frac{5}{3}\)
  2. \(\frac{7}{5}\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{11}{9}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{3}{2}\)

Question 144. 5.6 liter of helium gas at STP is adiabatically compressed to 0.7 liter. Taking the initial temperature to be T1, the work done in the process is:

  1. \(\frac{9}{8} \mathrm{RT}_1\)
  2. \(\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{RT}_1\)
  3. \(\frac{15}{8} R T_1\)
  4. \(\frac{9}{2} R T_1\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{9}{8} \mathrm{RT}_1\)

Question 145. An ideal gas is expanding such that PT2 = constant. The coefficient of volume expansion of the gas is

  1. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}}\)
  2. \(\frac{2}{\mathrm{~T}}\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{\mathrm{~T}}\)
  4. \(\frac{4}{\mathrm{~T}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{3}{\mathrm{~T}}\)

Question 146. One mole of an ideal gas at an initial temperature of T K does 6R joules of work adiabatically. If the ratio of specific heats of this gas at constant pressure and constant volume is 5/3, the final temperature of the gas will be :

  1. (T + 2.4) K
  2. (T – 2.4) K
  3. (T + 4) K
  4. (T – 4) K

Answer: 4. (T – 4) K

Question 147. 2 moles of He gas γ = 5/3 of 20-litre volume at 27ºC subjected to constant pressure is expanded to double the initial volume. Then, it is adiabatically taken to an initial temperature of 27ºC. What will be the work done in the isobaric process? Also find the final pressure, final volume, and work done in the adiabatic process.

  1. 7470 J
  2. 7074 J
  3. 7070 J
  4. 7474 J

Answer: 1. 7470 J

Question 148. A Carnot engine works between 600 K and 300 K. In each cycle of operations, the engine draws 1000 joules of energy from the source at 600 K. The efficiency of the engine is –

  1. 20%
  2. 50%
  3. 70%
  4. 90%

Answer: 2. 50%

Question 149. In the above problem, the useful work done by the engine is –

  1. 100 joule
  2. 500 joule
  3. 1000 joule
  4. 150 joule

Answer: 2. 500 joule

Question 150. In the above problem, the energy rejected by the sink is –

  1. 100 joule
  2. 500 joule
  3. 1000 joule
  4. 300 joule

Answer: 2. 500 joule

Question 151. A Carnot engine works between the ice point and the steam point. Its efficiency will be –

  1. 26.81 %
  2. 53.36 %
  3. 71.23 %
  4. 85.42 %

Answer: 1. 26.81 %

Question 152. In the above problem, to increase the efficiency of the engine by 20%, its sink temperature will have to be changed by –

  1. Increase by 20 K
  2. Decrease by 293 K
  3. Increase by 20ºC
  4. Decrease by 20ºC

Answer: 4. Decrease by 20ºC

Question 153. In the above problem, to increase the efficiency by 20%, its source temperature will have to be changed by –

  1. 402.5 K increase
  2. 129.5 K decrease
  3. 129.5 ºC increase
  4. 129.5 ºC decrease

Answer: 3. 129.5 ºC increase

Question 154. A Cannot engine work between 200ºC and 0ºC. Another Carnot engine works between 0ºC and –200ºC. In both cases, the working substance absorbs 4 kilocalories of heat from the source. The efficiency of the first engine will be –

  1. \(\frac{100}{473}\)
  2. \(\frac{200}{473}\)
  3. \(\frac{200}{273}\)
  4. \(\frac{273}{373}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{200}{473}\)

Question 155. In the above problem, the efficiency of the second engine will be –

  1. \(\frac{100}{273}\)
  2. \(\frac{173}{273}\)
  3. \(\frac{200}{273}\)
  4. \(\frac{273}{373}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{200}{273}\)

Question 156. In the above problem, the ratio of efficiencies of two engines will be –

  1. 0.18
  2. 0.38
  3. 0.58
  4. 0.78

Answer: 3. 0.58

Question 157. In the above problem, the amount of useful work done by the first engine is –

  1. 7.1 × 103 Joule
  2. 3.8 × 104 Joule
  3. 5.9 × 105 Joule
  4. 9.3 × 106 Joule

Answer: 1. 7.1 × 103 Joule

Question 158. In the above problem, the output work of the second engine is

  1. 2.93 × 103 calorie
  2. 12.3 × 103 calorie
  3. 12.3 × 103 joule
  4. 2.93 × 103 calorie

Answer: 1. 2.93 × 103 calorie

Question 159. In the above problem, the ratio of outputs of two engines is –

  1. 0.577
  2. 0.377
  3. 0.777
  4. 0.177

Answer: 1. 0.577

Question 160. The efficiency of the Carnot engine is 50% and the temperature of the sink is 500 K. If the temperature of the source is kept constant and its efficiency is to be raised to 60%; then the required temperature of the sink will be:

  1. 600 K
  2. 500 K
  3. 400 K
  4. 100 K

Answer: 3. 400 K

Question 161. Even the Carnot engine cannot give 100% efficiency because we cannot:

  1. Prevent radiation
  2. Find ideal sources
  3. Reach absolute zero temperature
  4. Eliminate friction

Answer: 3. Reach absolute zero temperature

Question 162. “Heat cannot be itself flow from a body at a lower temperature to a body at a higher temperature” is a statement or consequence of :

  1. Second law of thermodynamics
  2. Conservation of momentum
  3. Conservation of mass
  4. The first law of thermodynamics

Answer: 1. Second law of thermodynamics

Question 163. A Carnot engine takes 3 × 106 cal of heat from a reservoir at 627ºC and gives it to a sink at 27ºC. The work done by the engine is:

  1. 4.2 × 106 J
  2. 8.4 × 106 J
  3. 16.8 × 106 J
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. 8.4 × 106 J

Question 164. In a Carnot engine, the reservoir temperature is 7°C. Its efficiency is 50%. To increase efficiency to 70% by how much temperature of the source is to be raised.

  1. 840 K
  2. 280 K
  3. 560 K
  4. 373 K

Answer: 4. 373 K

Question 165. Which statement is incorrect?

  1. All reversible cycles have the same efficiency
  2. A reversible cycle has more efficiency than an irreversible one
  3. Carnot cycle is a reversible one
  4. Carnot cycle has the maximum efficiency in all cycles

Answer: 1. All reversible cycles have the same efficiency

Question 166. An ideal gas heat engine operates in cannot cycle between 227ºC and 127ºC. It absorbs 6 × 104 cal of heat at higher temperatures. The amount of heat converted to work is:

  1. 2.4 × 104 cal
  2. 6 × 104 cal
  3. 1.2 × 104 cal
  4. 4.8 × 104 cal

Answer: 3. 1.2 × 104 cal

Question 167. A Carnot engine whose sink is at 300 K has an efficiency of 40% By how much should the temperature of the source be increased to increase its efficiency by 50% of the original efficiency:-

  1. 275 K
  2. 325 K
  3. 250 K
  4. 380 K

Answer: 3. 250 K

Question 168. An engine has an efficiency of \(\frac{1}{6}\). When the temperature of the sink is reduced by 62ºC, its efficiency is doubled. The temperature of the source is:

  1. 124ºC
  2. 37ºC
  3. 62ºC
  4. 99ºC

Answer: 4. 99ºC

Question 169. The temperature-entropy diagram of a reversible engine cycle is given in the figure. Its efficiency is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Temperature Entropy Diagram Of A Reversible Engine Cycle

  1. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 170. A Carnot engine, having an efficiency of η = 1/10 as a heat engine, is used as a refrigerator. If the work done on the system is 10 J, the amount of energy absorbed from the reservoir at a lower temperature is

  1. 99 J
  2. 90 J
  3. 1 J
  4. 100 J

Answer: 2. 90 J

Question 171. The work of 146 kJ is performed to compress one-kilo mole of a gas adiabatically and in this process the temperature of the gas increases by 7C. The gas is (R = 8.3 J mol-1 K-1)

  1. Diatomic
  2. Triatomic
  3. A mixture of monoatomic and diatomic
  4. Monoatomic

Answer: 1. Diatomic

Question 172. A Carnot working between 300K and 600K has a work output of 800 J per cycle. What is the amount of heat energy supplied to the engine from the source per cycle

  1. 1800 J/cycle
  2. 1000 J/cycle
  3. 2000 J/cycle
  4. 1600 J/cycle

Answer: 4. 1600 J/cycle

Question 173. The coefficient of performance of a Carnot refrigerator working between 30° C and 0° C is

  1. 10
  2. 1
  3. 9
  4. 0

Answer: 3. 9

Question 174. If the door of a refrigerator is kept open then which of the following is true

  1. Room is cooled
  2. Room is heated
  3. The room is either cooled or heated
  4. The room is neither cooled nor heated

Answer: 2. Room is heated

Question 175. An Ideal gas heat engine operated in a Carnot’s cycle between 227° C and 127° C. It absorbs 6 × 104 J at high temperatures. The amount of heat converted into work is

  1. 4.8 × 104 J
  2. 3.5 × 104 J
  3. 1.6 × 104 J
  4. 1.2 × 104 J

Answer: 4. 1.2 × 104 J

Question 176. An ideal gas heat engine exhausting heat at 77° C does not have a 30% efficiency. It must take the heat at

  1. 127° C
  2. 227°C
  3. 327° C
  4. 673°C

Answer: 2. 227°C

Question 177. The efficiency of the Carnot engine is 100% if

  1. T2= 273 K
  2. T2= 0 K
  3. T1= 273 K
  4. T1= 0 K

Answer: 2. T2= 0 K

Question 178. The efficiency of Carnot’s engine operating between reservoirs, maintained at temperatures 27°C and 123°C, is

  1. 50%
  2. 24%
  3. 0.75%
  4. 0.4%

Answer: 1. 50%

Question 179. A Carnot engine operates between 227°C and 27°C. The efficiency of the engine will be

  1. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
  2. \(\frac{2}{5}\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
  4. \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 180. A Carnot engine has the same efficiency between 800 K to 500 K and x K to 600 K. The value of x is

  1. 1000 K
  2. 960 K
  3. 846K
  4. 754 K

Answer: 2. 960 K

Question 181. A scientist says that the efficiency of his heat engine which operates at source temperature 127°C and sink temperature 27°C is 26% then

  1. It is impossible
  2. It is possible but less probable
  3. It is quite probable
  4. Data are incomplete

Answer: 1. It is impossible

Question 182. A Carnot’s engine is made to work between 200°C and 0°C first and then between 0°C and –200°C. The ratio of efficiencies of the engine in the two cases is

  1. 1.73 :1
  2. 1:1.73
  3. 1:1
  4. 1: 2

Answer: 1. 1.73 :1

Question 183. The efficiency of a Carnot engine is 50% when the temperature of the outlet is 500 K. To increase up to 60% keeping the temperature of intake the same what is the temperature of the outlet

  1. 200K
  2. 400 K
  3. 600K
  4. 800 K

Answer: 2. 400 K

Question 184. If an ideal flask containing hot coffee is shaken, the temperature of the coffee will:

  1. Decrease
  2. Increase
  3. Remain same
  4. Decrease if temperature is below 4ºC and increase if temperature is equal to or more than 4ºC

Answer: 2. Increase

Question 185. An electric fan is switched on in a closed room. The air in the room is

  1. Cooled
  2. Heated
  3. Maintains its temperature
  4. Heated or cooled depending on the atmospheric pressure

Answer: 2. Heated

Question 186. A heat engine employing a Carnot cycle with an efficiency of η = 10% is used as a refrigerating machine, the thermal reservoirs being the same. The refrigerating efficiency ∈ is

  1. 12
  2. 8
  3. \(\frac{1}{10}\)
  4. 9

Answer: 4. 9

Question 187. An ideal gas is initially at temperature T and volume V. Its volume is increased by ΔV due to an increase in temperature ΔT, with pressure remaining constant. The quantity \(\delta=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V} \Delta \mathrm{T}}\) varies with temperature as:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics An Ideal Gas Is Initially At Temperature T And Volume V

Answer: 3

Question 188. A monoatomic ideal gas, initially at temperature T1, is enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a frictionless piston. The gas is allowed to expand adiabatically to a temperature T2 by releasing the piston suddenly. If L1 and L2 are the length of the gas column before and after expansion respectively, Then T1/T2 is given by:

  1. \(\left(\frac{L_1}{L_2}\right)^{2 / 3}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{L}_1}{\mathrm{~L}_2}\)
  3. \(\frac{L_2}{L_1}\)
  4. \(\left(\frac{L_2}{L_1}\right)^{2 / 3}\)

Answer: 4. \(\left(\frac{L_2}{L_1}\right)^{2 / 3}\)

Question 189. Which of the following graphs correctly represents the variation of β = –(dV/dP)/V with P for an ideal gas at constant temperature?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Following Graphs Correctly Represents The Variation Of Beta

Answer: 1

Question 190. An ideal gas undergoes a cyclic process as shown in the given P–T diagram, where the process AC is adiabatic. The process is also represented by :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Process AC Is Adiabatic

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Process AC Is Adiabatic.

Answer: 2

Question 191. Statement – 1

The total translational kinetic energy of all the molecules of a given mass of an ideal gas is 1.5 times the product of its pressure and volume. because

Statement – 2

The molecules of a gas collide with each other and the velocities of the molecules change due to the collision.

  1. Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1
  2. Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-1
  3. Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False
  4. Statement-1 is False, and Statement-2 is True.

Answer: 2. Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-1

Question 192. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas is taken along two cyclic processes E → F → G → E and E → F → H → E as shown in the PV diagram. The processes involved are purely isochoric, isobaric, isothermal, or adiabatic.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics One Mole Of A Monatomic Ideal Gas Is Taken Along Two Cyclic Processes

Match the paths in List 1 with the magnitudes of the work done in List 2 and select the correct answer using the codes given below the lists.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Match the paths in List 1 With The Magnitudes Of The Work Done In List 2

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Match the paths in List 1 With The Magnitudes Of The Work Done In List 2

Codes:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Monatomic Ideal Gas Of Codes

Answer: 1.

Question 193. Two containers of equal volume contain the same gas at pressure p1 and p2 and absolute temperature T1 and T2 respectively. On joining the vessels the gas reaches a common pressure p and common temperature T. The ratio p/T is equal to

  1. \(\frac{p_1}{T_1}+\frac{p_2}{T_2}\)
  2. \(\frac{p_1 T_1+p_2 T_2}{\left(T_1+T_2\right)^2}\)
  3. \(\frac{p_1 T_2+p_2 T_1}{\left(T_1+T_2\right)^2}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{p}_1}{2 \mathrm{~T}_1}+\frac{\mathrm{p}_2}{2 \mathrm{~T}_2}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{\mathrm{p}_1}{2 \mathrm{~T}_1}+\frac{\mathrm{p}_2}{2 \mathrm{~T}_2}\)

Question 194. If a diatomic gas is supplied heat Q in a process, it performs work \(\frac{Q}{4}\). What is the molar heat capacity of the gas in this process?

  1. \(\frac{2}{5} R\)
  2. \(\frac{5}{2} R\)
  3. \(\frac{10}{3} R\)
  4. \(\frac{6}{7} R\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{10}{3} R\)

Question 195. Two samples of air A and B having the same composition and initially at the same temperature T, pressure P, and volume V are taken. A and B are made to undergo the following process :

Case 1: A and B are compressed from volume V to volume V/2. A is compressed isothermally while B is compressed adiabatically. The final pressures are PAC and PBC respectively.

Case: 2 A and B are allowed to undergo expansion from volume V to volume 2V. A undergoes while B undergoes adiabatic expansion. The final pressure of A and B are PAE and PBE respectively.

  1. PAC = PBC and PAE = PBE
  2. PAC = PAE and PBC = PBE
  3. PAC > PBC and PAE < PBE
  4. PAC < PBC and PAE> PBE

Answer: 4. PAC < PBC and PAE > PBE

Question 196. 4 moles of an ideal monoatomic gas occupying volume V is adiabatically expanded from temperature 300 K to a volume of \(2 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~V}\). Find:

  1. Final temperature.
  2. Change in internal energy (R = 8.3 J/mol K)

Answer:

  1. 150K
  2. -7500 J

Question 197. The internal energy change in a system that has absorbed 2 kcal of heat and done 500 J of work is

  1. 8900 J
  2. 6400 J
  3. 5400 J
  4. 7900 J

Answer: 4. 7900 J

Question 198. If ΔU and ΔW represent the increase in internal energy and work done by the system respectively in a thermodynamical process, which of the following is true?

  1. ΔU = – ΔW, in a adiabatic process
  2. ΔU = ΔW, in a isothermal process
  3. ΔU = ΔW, in a adiabatic process
  4. ΔU = – ΔW, in an isothermal process

Answer: 1. ΔU = – ΔW, in a adiabatic process

Question 199. If Cpand Cvdenote the specific heats (per unit) mass of an ideal gas of molecular weight M, where R is gas constant, then (Mains)]

  1. Cp– Cv= R/M2
  2. Cp– Cv= R
  3. Cp– Cv= R/M
  4. Cp– Cv= MR

Answer: 3. Cp– Cv= R/M

Question 200. A monoatomic gas at pressure P1 and volume V1 is compressed adiabatically to \(\frac{1}{8} \text { th }\) of its original volume. What is the final pressure of the gas

  1. 64P1
  2. P1
  3. 16P1
  4. 32P1

Answer: 4. 32P1

Question 201. A mass of diatomic gas (γ = 1.4) at a pressure of 2 atmospheres is compressed adiabatically so that its temperature rises from 27ºC to 927ºC. The pressure of the gas in a final state is:

  1. 28 atm
  2. 68.7atm
  3. 256 atm
  4. 8 atm

Answer: 3. 256 atm

Question 202. A thermodynamic system is taken through the cycle ABCD as shown in the figure. Heat rejected by the gas during the cycle is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Thermodynamic System Is Taken Through The Cycle ABCD

  1. 2 PV
  2. 4 PV
  3. 12PV
  4. PV

Answer: 1. 2 PV

Question 203. One mole of an ideal gas goes from an initial state A to final state B via two processes: It first undergoes isothermal expansion from volume V to 3V and then its volume is reduced from 3V to V at constant pressure. The correct P-V diagram representing the two processes is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics An Ideal Gas Goes From An Initial State A To Final State B.

Answer: 4

Question 204. An ideal gas goes from state A to state B via three different processes as indicated in the P-V diagram:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Three Different Processes As Indicated In The PV Diagram

If Q1, Q2, Q3 indicate the heat absorbed by the gas along the three processes and ΔU1, ΔU2, and ΔU3 indicate the change in internal energy along the three processes respectively, then

  1. Q1> Q2> Q3 and ΔU1= ΔU2= ΔU3
  2. Q3> Q2> Q1and ΔU1= ΔU2= ΔU3
  3. Q1= Q2= Q3 and ΔU1> ΔU2> ΔU3
  4. Q3> Q2> Q1 and ΔU1> ΔU2> ΔU3

Answer: 1. Q1> Q2> Q3 and ΔU1= ΔU2= ΔU3

Question 205. A gas is taken through the cycle A → B → C → A, as shown. What is the net work done by the gas?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Gas Is Taken Through The Cycle The Net Work Done By The Gas

  1. 1000 J
  2. Zero
  3. –2000 J
  4. 2000 J

Answer: 1. 1000 J

Question 206. In the given (V–T) diagram, what is the relation between pressure P1 and P2?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Relation Between Pressure P1 And P2

  1. P2> P1
  2. P2< P1
  3. Cannot be predicted
  4. P2= P1

Answer: 2. P2< P1

Question 207. The molar-specific heats of an ideal gas at constant pressure and volume are denoted by Cp and Cv, respectively. If γ = \(\frac{C_p}{C_v}\) and R is the universal gas constant, then Cv is equal to:

  1. \(\frac{R}{(\gamma-1)}\)
  2. \(\frac{(\gamma-1)}{R}\)
  3. \(\gamma R\)
  4. \(\frac{1+\gamma}{1-\gamma}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{R}{(\gamma-1)}\)

Question 208. The amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of 1g of Helium at NTP, from T1K to T2K is:

  1. \(\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{~N}_{\mathrm{a}} \mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{B}}\left(\mathrm{T}_2-\mathrm{T}_1\right)\)
  2. \(\frac{3}{4} \mathrm{~N}_{\mathrm{a}} \mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{B}}\left(\mathrm{T}_2-\mathrm{T}_1\right)\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{4} N_a k_B \frac{T_2}{T_1}\)
  4. \(\frac{3}{8} N_a k_B\left(T_2-T_1\right)\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{3}{8} N_a k_B\left(T_2-T_1\right)\)

Question 209. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a gas is found to be proportional to the cube of its temperature. The ratio of \(\frac{C_p}{C_v}\) for the gas is:

  1. 2
  2. \(\frac{5}{3}\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{4}{3}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{3}{2}\)

Question 210. The mean free path of molecules of a gas (radius ‘r’) is inversely proportional to:

  1. r3
  2. r2
  3. r
  4. \(\sqrt{r}\)

Answer: 2. r2

Question 211. One mole of an ideal diatomic gas undergoes a transition from A to B along a path AB as shown in the figure,

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics One Mole Of An Ideal Diatomic Gas

The change in internal energy of the gas during the transition is:

  1. –20 kJ
  2. 20 J
  3. – 12 kJ
  4. 20 kJ

Answer: 1. –20 kJ

Question 212. A Carnot engine, having an efficiency of η=\(\frac{1}{10}\) as a heat engine, is used as a refrigerator. If the work done on the system is 10 J, the amount of energy absorbed from the reservoir at a lower temperature is:

  1. 99 J
  2. 90 J
  3. 1 J
  4. 100 J

Answer: 2. 90 J

Question 213. The ratio of the specific heats \(\frac{C_P}{C_v}\)= γin terms of degrees of freedom (n) is given by:

  1. \(\left(1+\frac{n}{3}\right)\)
  2. \(\left(1+\frac{2}{n}\right)\)
  3. \(\left(1+\frac{n}{2}\right)\)
  4. \(\left(1+\frac{1}{n}\right)\)

Answer: 2. \(\left(1+\frac{2}{n}\right)\)

Question 214. The figure below shows two paths that may be taken by a gas to go from a state A to a state C.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Two Paths That May Be Taken By A Gas To Go From A State A To A State C

In process AB, 400J of heat is added to the system, and in process BC, 100 J of heat is added to the system. The heat absorbed by the system in the process of AC will be:

  1. 500 J
  2. 460 J
  3. 300 J
  4. 380 J

Answer: 2. 460 J

Question 215. An ideal gas is compressed to half its initial volume using several processes. Which of the processes results in the maximum work done on the gas?

  1. Isobaric
  2. Isochoric
  3. Isothermal
  4. Adiabatic

Answer: 4. Adiabatic

Question 216. The coefficient of performance of a refrigerator is 5 if the temperature inside the freezer is –20°C, and the temperature of the surroundings to which it rejects heat is

  1. 41°C
  2. 11°C
  3. 21°C
  4. 31°C

Answer: 4. 31°C

Question 217. Two vessels separately contain two ideal gases A and B at the same temperature the pressure of A being twice that of B. Under such conditions, the density of A is found to be 1.5 times the density of B. The ratio of molecular weight of A and B is:

  1. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
  2. 2
  3. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 218. A gas is compressed isothermally to half its initial volume. The same gas is compressed separately through an adiabatic process until its volume is again reduced to half. Then:

  1. Which of the cases (whether compression through isothermal or through an adiabatic process) requires more work will depend upon the atomicity of the gas
  2. Compressing the gas isothermally will require more work to be done
  3. Compressing the gas through an adiabatic process will require more work to be done
  4. Compressing the gas isothermally or adiabatically will require the same amount of work

Answer: 3. Compressing the gas through adiabatic process will require more work to be done

Question 219. The molecules of a given mass of a gas have r.m.s. velocity of 200 ms-1 at 27ºC and 1.0×105 Nm-2 pressure. When the temperature and pressure of the gas are respectively, 127ºC and 0.05×105 Nm2, the r.m.s. velocity of velocity of its molecules in ms-1 is;

  1. \(\frac{100}{3}\)
  2. \(100 \sqrt{2}\)
  3. \(\frac{400}{\sqrt{3}}\)
  4. \(\frac{100 \sqrt{2}}{3}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{400}{\sqrt{3}}\)

Question 220. One mole of an ideal monatomic gas undergoes a process described by the equation PV3 = constant. The heat capacity of the gas during this process is :

  1. R
  2. \(\frac{3}{2} R\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{2} R\)
  4. 2R

Answer: 1. R

Question 221. The temperature inside a refrigerator is t2 ºC and the room temperature is t1 ºC. The amount of heat delivered to the room for each joule of electrical energy consumed ideally will be

  1. \(\frac{t_1+t_2}{t_1+273}\)
  2. \(\frac{t_1}{t_1-t_2}\)
  3. \(\frac{t_1+273}{t_1-t_2}\)
  4. \(\frac{t_2+273}{t_1-t_2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{t_1+273}{t_1-t_2}\)

Question 222. A given sample of an ideal gas occupies a volume V at a pressure P and absolute temperature T. The mass of each molecule of the gas is m. Which of the following gives the density of the gas?

  1. mkT
  2. P / (kT)
  3. Pm / (kT)
  4. P / (kTV)

Answer: 3. Pm / (kT)

Question 223. Thermodynamic processes are indicated in the following diagram:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Thermodynaic Processes Are Indicated

Match the following :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Thermodynaic Processes Are Indicated The Column 1 And Column 2

  1. 1 → A 2 → C, 3 → D, 4 → B
  2. 1 → C, 2 → A, 3 → D, 4 → B
  3. 1 → C, 2 → D, 3 → B, 4 → A
  4. 1 → D, 2 → B, 3 → A, 4 → C

Answer: 2. 1 → C, 2 → A, 3 → D, 4 → B

Question 224. A gas mixture consists of 2 moles of O2 and 4 moles of Ar at temperature T. Neglecting all vibrational modes, the total internal energy of the system is:

  1. 4 RT
  2. 15 RT
  3. 9 RT
  4. 11 RT

Answer: 4. 11 RT

Question 225. A Carnot engine having an efficiency of \(\frac{1}{10}\) as a heat engine, is used as a refrigerator. If the work done on the system is 10 J, the amount of energy absorbed from the reservoir at a lower temperature is:

  1. 1 J
  2. 90 J
  3. 99 J
  4. 100 J

Answer: 2. 90 J

Question 226. The volume (V) of a monatomic gas varies with its temperature (T), as shown in the graph. The ratio of work done by the gas, to the heat absorbed by it, when it undergoes a change from state A to state B, is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Volume Of A Monatomic Gas Varies With Its Temperature

  1. \(\frac{2}{5}\)
  2. \(\frac{2}{7}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 227. The efficiency of an ideal heat engine working between the freezing point and boiling point of water is

  1. 26.8 %
  2. 12.5 %
  3. 6.25 %
  4. 20 %

Answer: 1. 26.8 %

Question 228. At what temperature will the rms speed of oxygen molecules become just sufficient for escaping from the Earth’s atmosphere? (Given mass of oxygen molecule (m) = 2.76 × 10-26 kg Boltzmann’s constant kB =1.38×10-23 JK-1

  1. 2.508×104 K
  2. 1.254×104 K
  3. 5.016×104 K
  4. 8.360×104 K

Answer: 4. 8.360×104 K

Question 229. In which of the following processes, heat is neither absorbed nor released by a system?

  1. Isochoric
  2. Isothermal
  3. Adiabatic
  4. Isobaric

Answer: 3. Adiabatic

Question 230. An increase in the temperature of a gas-filled container would lead to the:

  1. Decrease in intermolecular distance
  2. Increase in its mass
  3. Increase in its kinetic energy
  4. Decrease in its pressure

Answer: 3. Increase in its kinetic energy

Question 231. The value of \(\gamma\left(=\frac{C_p}{C_v}\right)\), for hydrogen helium and another ideal diatomic gas X (whose molecules are not rigid but have an additional vibrational mode), are respectively equal to,

  1. \(\frac{7}{5}, \frac{5}{3}, \frac{9}{7}\)
  2. \(\frac{5}{3}, \frac{7}{5}, \frac{9}{7}\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{3}, \frac{7}{5}, \frac{7}{5}\)
  4. \(\frac{7}{5}, \frac{5}{3}, \frac{7}{5}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{7}{5}, \frac{5}{3}, \frac{9}{7}\)

Question 232. 1 g of water, of volume 1 cm3 at 100ºC, is converted into steam at the same temperature under normal atmospheric pressure ≈1 ×105 Pa. The volume of steam formed equals 1671 cm3. If the specific latent heat of vaporization of water is 2256 J/g, the change in internal energy is:

  1. 2423 J
  2. 2089 J
  3. 167 J
  4. 2256 J

Answer: 2. 2089 J

Question 233. The efficiency of a Carnot engine depends upon

  1. The temperature of the sink only
  2. The temperatures of the source and sink
  3. The volume of the cylinder of the engine
  4. The temperature of the source only

Answer: 4. The temperature of the source only

Question 234. The P-V diagram for an ideal gas in a piston-cylinder assembly undergoing a thermodynamic process is shown in the figure. The process is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics An Ideal Gas In A Piston Cylinder Assembly Undergoing A Thermodynamic Process

  1. Adiabatic
  2. Isochoric
  3. Isobaric
  4. Isothermal

Answer: 4. Isothermal

Question 235. The quantities of heat required to raise the temperature of two solid copper spheres of radii r1 and r2 (r1 = 1.5 r2) through 1K are in the ratio

  1. \(\frac{5}{3}\)
  2. \(\frac{27}{8}\)
  3. \(\frac{9}{4}\)
  4. \(\frac{3}{2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{9}{4}\)

Question 236. Two cylinders A and B of equal capacity are connected via a stop cock. A contains an ideal gas at standard temperature and pressure. B is completely evacuated. The entire system is thermally insulated. The stop cock is suddenly opened. The process is

  1. Isobaric
  2. Isothermal
  3. Adiabatic
  4. Isochoric

Answer: 4. Isochoric

Question 237. The mean free path for a gas molecule depends upon the diameter, d of the molecule as

  1. \(\ell \propto \frac{1}{\mathrm{~d}^2}\)
  2. \(\ell \propto d\)
  3. \(\ell \propto \mathrm{d}^2\)
  4. \(\ell \propto \frac{1}{d}\)

Answer: 1. \(\ell \propto \frac{1}{\mathrm{~d}^2}\)

Question 238. The average thermal energy for a mono-atomic gas is : (kB is Boltzmann constant and T, absolute temperature)

  1. \(\frac{7}{2} k_B T\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{2} k_B T\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{2} k_B T\)
  4. \(\frac{5}{2} k_B T\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{3}{2} k_B T\)

Question 239. The mean free path for a gas, with molecular diameter d and number density n, can be expressed as

  1. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} n^2 \pi^2 d^2}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} n \pi d}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} n \pi d^2}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} n^2 \pi d^2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} n \pi d^2}\)

Question 240. Match Column-1 and Column-2 and choose the correct match from the given choices.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Match Column1 And Column2 And Choose The Correct Answer

  1. 1–Q, 2–R, 3–S, 4–P
  2. 1–Q, 2–P, 3–S, 4–R
  3. 1–R, 2–Q, 3–P, 4–S
  4. 1–R, 2–P, 3–S, 4–Q

Answer: 2. 1–Q, 2–P, 3–S, 4–R

Question 241. n moles of a monoatomic gas is carried around the reversible rectangular cycle ABCDA as shown in the diagram. The temperature at A is T0. The thermodynamic efficiency of the cycle is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Thermodynamic Efficiency Of The Cycle

  1. 15%
  2. 50%
  3. 20%
  4. 25%

Answer: 2. 50%

Question 242. An engine has an efficiency of 1/6. When the temperature of the sink is reduced by 62ºC, its efficiency is doubled. The temperature of the source will be

  1. 37ºC
  2. 62ºC
  3. 99ºC
  4. 124ºC

Answer: 3. 99ºC

Question 243. Assertion: The melting point of ice decreases with the increase of pressure. Reason: Ice contracts on melting.

  1. If both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
  2. If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
  3. If Assertion is true but the reason is false.
  4. If both assertion and reason are false.

Answer: 1. If both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.

Question 244. 1 mole of H2 gas is contained in a box of volume V = 1.00 m3 at T = 300 K. The gas is heated to a temperature of T = 3000 K and the gas gets converted to a gas of hydrogen atoms. The final pressure would be (considering all gases to be ideal)

  1. Same as the pressure initially
  2. 2 times the pressure initially
  3. 10 times the pressure initially
  4. 20 times the pressure initially

Answer: 4. 20 times the pressure initially

Question 245. Assume the gas to be ideal the work done on the gas in taking it from A to B is :

  1. 200 R
  2. 300 R
  3. 400 R
  4. 500 R

Answer: 3. 400 R

Question 246. The work done on the gas in taking it from D to A is

  1. –414 R
  2. + 414 R
  3. – 690 R
  4. + 690 R

Answer: 2. + 414 R

Question 247. The net work done on the gas in the cycle ABCDA is:

  1. Zero
  2. 276 R
  3. 1076 R
  4. 1904 R

Answer: 2. 276 R

Question 248. One kg of a diatomic gas is at a pressure of 8 × 104 N/m2. The density of the gas is 4 kg/m3. What is the energy of the gas due to its thermal motion?

  1. 5 × 104J
  2. 6 × 104J
  3. 7 × 104J
  4. 3 × 104J

Answer: 1. 5 × 104J

Question 249. A diatomic ideal gas is used in a Carnot engine as the working substance. If during the adiabatic expansion part of the cycle, the volume of the gas increases from V to 32 V, the efficiency of the engine is:

  1. 0.5
  2. 0.75
  3. 0.99
  4. 0.25

Answer: 2. 0.75

Question 250. A Carnot engine operating between temperatures T1 and T2 has effeiciency \(\frac{1}{6}\). When T2 is lowered by 62 K, its efficiency increases to \(\frac{1}{3}\). Then T1 and T2 are, respectively:

  1. 372 K and 310 K
  2. 372 K and 330 K
  3. 330 K and 268 K
  4. 310 K and 248 K

Answer: 1. 372 K and 310 K

Question 251. Three perfect gases at absolute temperatures T1, T2, and T3 are mixed. The masses of molecules are m1, m2, and m3 and the number of molecules is n1,n2, and n3 respectively. Assuming no loss of energy, the final temperature of the mixture is:

  1. \(\frac{\left(\mathrm{T}_1+\mathrm{T}_2+\mathrm{T}_3\right)}{3}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_1 \mathrm{~T}_1+\mathrm{n}_2 \mathrm{~T}_2+\mathrm{n}_3 \mathrm{~T}_3}{\mathrm{n}_1+\mathrm{n}_2+\mathrm{n}_3}\)
  3. \(\frac{n_1 T_1^2+n_2 T_2^2+n_3 T_3^2}{n_1 T_1+n_2 T_2+n_3 T_3}\)
  4. \(\frac{n_1^2 T_1^2+n_2^2 T_2^2+n_3^2 T_3^2}{n_1 T_1+n_2 T_2+n_3 T_3}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_1 \mathrm{~T}_1+\mathrm{n}_2 \mathrm{~T}_2+\mathrm{n}_3 \mathrm{~T}_3}{\mathrm{n}_1+\mathrm{n}_2+\mathrm{n}_3}\)

Question 252. A thermally insulated vessel contains an ideal gas of molecular mass M and a ratio of specific heat γ. It is moving with speed v and is suddenly brought to rest. Assuming no heat is lost to the surroundings, its temperature increases by :

  1. \(\frac{(\gamma-1)}{2(\gamma+1) R} M v^2 K\)
  2. \(\frac{(\gamma-1)}{2 \gamma R} M^2 K\)
  3. \(\frac{\gamma M v^2}{2 R} K\)
  4. \(\frac{(\gamma-1)}{2 R} M^2 K\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{(\gamma-1)}{2 R} M^2 K\)

Question 253. A container with insulating walls is divided into equal parts by a partition fitted with a valve. One part is filled with an ideal gas at a pressure P and temperature T, whereas the other part is completely evacuated. If the valve is suddenly opened, the pressure and temperature of the gas will be:

  1. \(\frac{P}{2}, \frac{T}{2}\)
  2. P, T
  3. \(P, \frac{T}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{P}{2}, T\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{P}{2}, T\)

Question 254. Helium gas goes through a cycle ABCDA (consisting of two isochoric and isobaric lines) as shown in the figure. The efficiency of this cycle is nearly : (Assume the gas to be close to ideal gas)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Helium Gas Goes Through A Cycle ABCDA

  1. 15.4%
  2. 9.1%
  3. 10.5%
  4. 12.5%

Answer: 1. 15.4%

Question 255. A Carnot engine, whose efficiency is 40%, takes in heat from a source maintained at a temperature of 500K. It is desired to have an engine of efficiency of 60%. Then, the intake temperature for the same exhaust (sink) temperature must be:

  1. The efficiency of the Carnot engine cannot be made larger than 50%
  2. 1200 K
  3. 750 K
  4. 600 K

Answer: 3. 750 K

Question 256. The above p-v diagram represents the thermodynamic cycle of an engine, operating with an ideal monoatomic gas. The amount of heat, extracted from the source in a single cycle is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics The Above PV Diagram Represents The Thermodynamic Cycle Of An Engine

  1. \(\mathrm{P}_0 \mathrm{v}_0\)
  2. \(\left(\frac{13}{2}\right) p_0 \mathrm{v}_0\)
  3. \(\left(\frac{11}{2}\right) \mathrm{P}_0 \mathrm{v}_0\)
  4. \(4 p_0 v_0\)

Answer: 2. \(\left(\frac{13}{2}\right) p_0 \mathrm{v}_0\)

Question 257. One mole of diatomic ideal gas undergoes a cyclic process ABC as shown in the figure. The process BC is adiabatic. The temperatures at A, B, and C are 400K, 800K, and 600 K respectively. Choose the correct statement:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics One Mole Of Diatomic Ideal Gas Undergoes A Cyclic Process ABC

  1. The change in internal energy in the whole cyclic process is 250 R.
  2. The change in internal energy in the process CA is 700 R
  3. The change in internal energy in the process AB is – 350 R
  4. The change in internal energy in the process BC is – 500 R

Answer: 4. The change in internal energy in the process BC is – 500 R

Question 258. An open glass tube is immersed in mercury in such a way that a length of 8 cm extends above the mercury level. The open end of the tube is then closed and sealed and the tube is raised vertically up by an additional 46 cm. What will be the length of the air column above the mercury in the tube now? (Atmospheric pressure = 76 cm of Hg)

  1. 16 cm
  2. 22 cm
  3. 38 cm
  4. 6 cm

Answer: 1. 16 cm

Question 259. Consider a spherical shell of radius R at temperature T. The black body radiation inside it can be considered as an ideal gas of photons with internal energy per unit volume u = \(\frac{U}{V} \propto T^4\) and pressure P = \(\frac{1}{3}\left(\frac{U}{V}\right)\). If the shell now undergoes an adiabatic expansion the relation between T and R is

  1. \(\mathrm{T} \propto \mathrm{e}^{-\mathrm{R}}\)
  2. \(T \propto e^{-3 R}\)
  3. \(T \propto \frac{1}{R}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{T} \propto \frac{1}{\mathrm{R}^3}\)

Answer: 3. \(T \propto \frac{1}{R}\)

Question 260. A solid body of constant heat capacity 1 J/°C is being heated by keeping it in contact with reservoirs in two ways:

  1. Sequentially keeping in contact with 2 reservoirs so that each reservoir supplies the same amount of heat.
  2. Sequentially keeping in contact with 8 reservoirs, each reservoir supplies the same amount of heat.
  3. In both cases, the body is brought from the initial temperature of 100°C to the final temperature of 200°C. Entropy changes of the body in the two cases respectively is
  1. ln 2, 4ln2
  2. ln 2, ln 2
  3. ln 2, 2 ln 2
  4. 2 ln 2, 8 ln 2

Answer: 2. ln 2, ln 2

Question 261. Consider an ideal gas confined in an isolated closed chamber. As the gas undergoes an adiabatic expansion, the average time of collision between molecules increases as Vq, where V is the volume of the gas. The value of q is \(\left(\gamma=\frac{C_P}{C_V}\right)\)

  1. \(\frac{3 \gamma+5}{6}\)
  2. \(\frac{3 \gamma-5}{6}\)
  3. \(\frac{\gamma+1}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{\gamma-1}{2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\gamma+1}{2}\)

Question 262. ‘n’ moles of an ideal gas undergoes a process A▢B as shown in the figure. The maximum temperature of the gas during the process will be:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics N Moles Of An Ideal Gas Undergoes The Maximum Temperature Of The Gas

  1. \(\frac{3 P_0 V_0}{2 n R}\)
  2. \(\frac{9 P_0 V_0}{2 n R}\)
  3. \(\frac{9 P_0 V_0}{n R}\)
  4. \(\frac{9 P_0 V_0}{4 n R}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{9 P_0 V_0}{4 n R}\)

Question 263. Cp and Cv are specific heats at constant pressure and constant volume respectively. It is observed that

Cp – Cv = a for hydrogen gas

Cp – Cv = b for nitrogen gas

The correct relation between a and b is:

  1. a = 28 b
  2. \(a=\frac{1}{14} b\)
  3. a = b
  4. a = 14 b

Answer: 4. a = 14 b

Question 264. The temperature of an open room of volume 30 m3 increased from 17ºC to 27ºC due to the sunshine. The atmospheric pressure in the room remains 1 × 105 Pa. If ni and nf are the number of molecules in the room before and after heating, then nf – ni will be:

  1. – 2.5 × 1025
  2. – 1.61 × 1023
  3. 1.38 × 1023
  4. 2.5 × 1025

Answer: 1. – 2.5 × 1025

Question 265. Two moles of an ideal monoatomic gas occupy a volume V at 27°C. The gas expands adiabatically to a volume of 2V. Calculate

  1. The final temperature of the gas and
  2. Change in its internal energy.
  1. (1) 189 K (2) –2.7 kJ
  2. (1) 195 K (2) 2.7 kJ
  3. (1) 189 K (2) 2.7 kJ
  4. (1) 195 K (2) –2.7 kj

Answer: 1. (1) 189 K (2) –2.7 kJ

Question 266. A mixture of 2 moles of helium gas (atomic mass = 4u) and 1 mole of argon gas (atomic mass = 40u) is kept at 300 K in a container, the ratio of their rms speeds \(\left[\frac{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{rms}}(\text { helium })}{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{rms}}(\text { argon })}\right]\), is close to:

  1. 0.32
  2. 3.16
  3. 2.24
  4. 0.45

Answer: 2. 3.16

Question 267. A gas can be taken from A to B via two different processes ACB and ADB. When path ACB is used 60J of heat flows into the system and 30J of work is done by the system. If path ADB is used work done by the system is 10J. The heat flow into the system in path ADB is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics A Gas Can Be Taken From A To B Via Two Different Processes ACB And ADB

  1. 80J
  2. 100J
  3. 20J
  4. 40J

Answer: 4. 40J

Question 268. A 15 g mass of nitrogen gas is enclosed in a vessel at a temperature of 27º C. Amount of heat transferred to the gas so that the rms velocity of molecules is doubled, is about: [Take R = 8.3 J/K mole]

  1. 0.9 kJ
  2. 6 kJ
  3. 14 kJ
  4. 10 kJ

Answer: 4. 10 kJ

Question 269. Three Carnot engines operate in series between a heat source at temperature T1 and a heat sink at temperature T4 (see figure). There are two other reservoirs at temperatures T2 and T3 as shown, with T1 > T2 > T3 > T4. The three engines are equally efficient if:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory Of Gases And Thermodynamics Three Carnot Engines Operate In Series Between A Heat Source At A Temperature

  1. \(\mathrm{T}_2=\left(\mathrm{T}_1 \mathrm{~T}_4^2\right)^{1 / 3} ; \mathrm{T}_3=\left(\mathrm{T}_1^2 \mathrm{~T}_4\right)^{1 / 3}\)
  2. \(T_2=\left(T_1 T_4\right)^{1 / 2} ; T_3=\left(\mathrm{T}_1^2 \mathrm{~T}_4\right)^{1 / 3}\)
  3. \(T_2=\left(\mathrm{T}_1^3 \mathrm{~T}_4\right)^{1 / 4} ; \mathrm{T}_3=\left(\mathrm{T}_1 \mathrm{~T}_4^3\right)^{1 / 4}\)
  4. \(T_2=\left(T_1^2 T_4\right)^{1 / 3} ; T_3=\left(T_1 T_4^2\right)^{1 / 3}\)

Answer: 4. \(T_2=\left(T_1^2 T_4\right)^{1 / 3} ; T_3=\left(T_1 T_4^2\right)^{1 / 3}\)

Question 230. Two kg of a monoatomic gas is at a pressure of 4 × 104 N/m2. The density of the gas is 8 kg/m3. What is the order of energy of the gas due to its thermal motion?

  1. 105 J
  2. 104 J
  3. 106 J
  4. 103 J

Answer: 4. 103 J

Question 231. Half a mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is heated at a constant pressure of 1 atom from 20°C to 90°C. Work done by the gas is close to: (Gas constant R = 831 J/mol.K)

  1. 581 J
  2. 146 J
  3. 291 J
  4. 73 J

Answer: 3. 291 J

Question 232. When 100g of liquid A at 100°C is added to 50 g of liquid B at a temperature of 75°C, the temperature of the mixture becomes 90°C. The temperature of the mixture, if 100g of liquid A at 100°C is added to 50 g of liquid B at 50°C, will be:

  1. 80°C
  2. 60°C
  3. 70°C
  4. 85°C

Answer: 1. 80°C

Question 233. A rigid diatomic ideal gas undergoes an adiabatic process at room temperature. The relation between temperature and volume for this process is TVx = constant, then x is:

  1. \(\frac{2}{5}\)
  2. \(\frac{5}{3}\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{5}\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 234. An ideal gas enclosed in a cylinder at a pressure of 2 atm and temperature, of 300 K. The mean time between two successive collisions is 6 × 10–8 s. If the pressure is doubled and temperature is increased to 500 K, the mean time between two successive collisions will be close to:

  1. 3 × 10-6 s
  2. 4 × 10-8 s
  3. 2 × 10-7 s
  4. 05 × 10-8 s

Answer: 2. 4 × 10-8 s

Question 235. A vertical closed cylinder is separated into two parts by a frictionless piston of mass m and negligible thickness. The piston is free to move along the length of the cylinder. The length of the cylinder above the piston is l1, and that below the piston is l2, such that l1 > l2. Each part of the cylinder contains n moles of an ideal gas at equal temperature T. If the piston is stationary, its mass, m, will be given by:

(R is the universal gas constant g is the acceleration due to gravity.)

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{g}}\left[\frac{2 \ell_1+\ell_2}{\ell_1 \ell_2}\right]\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{ng}}\left[\frac{\ell_1-3 \ell_2}{\ell_1 \ell_2}\right]\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{nRT}}{\mathrm{g}}\left[\frac{1}{\ell_2}+\frac{1}{\ell_1}\right]\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{nRT}}{\mathrm{g}}\left[\frac{\ell_1-\ell_2}{\ell_1 \ell_2}\right]\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{\mathrm{nRT}}{\mathrm{g}}\left[\frac{\ell_1-\ell_2}{\ell_1 \ell_2}\right]\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 7 Gravitation Notes

Gravitation Introduction

The motion of celestial bodies such as the sun, the moon, the earth the planets etc. has been a subject of fascination since time immemorial.

  • Indian astronomers of ancient times have done brilliant work in this field, the most notable among them being Arya Bhatt the first person to assert that all planets including the Earth revolve around the sun.
  • A millennium later the Danish astronomer Tycobrahe (1546-1601) conducted a detailed study of planetary motion which was interpreted by his pupil Johnaase Kepler (1571-1630), ironically after the master himself had passed away.
  • Kepler formulated his important findings in three laws of planetary motion

Universal Law Of Gravitation: Newton’s Law

According to this law, “Each particle attracts every other particle. The force of attraction between them is directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them”.

⇒ \(\mathrm{F} \propto \frac{m_1 m_2}{r^2}\)

or \(\mathrm{F}=G \frac{m_1 m_2}{r^2}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation According To This Law

where G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2 kg-2 is the universal gravitational constant. This law holds good irrespective of the nature of two objects (size, shape, mass etc.) at all places and at all times. That is why it is known as a universal law of gravitation.

Dimensional Formula Of G:

G = \(\frac{F r^2}{m_1 m_2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\left[M L T^{-2}\right]\left[L^2\right]}{\left[M^2\right]}\)

= [M-1 L3 T-2]

Newton’s Law Of Gravitation In Vector Form:

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{12}=\frac{G m_1 m_2}{r^2} \hat{r}_{12}\)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}=\frac{G m_1 m_2}{r^2}\)

Where \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{12}\) is the force on mass m1 exerted by mass m2 and vice-versa.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Newtons Law Of Gravitation In Vector Form

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{12}=\frac{G m_1 m_2}{r^2} \hat{r}_{12}\)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}=\frac{G m_1 m_2}{r^2} \hat{\mathrm{r}}_{21}\)

Now \(\hat{r}_{12}=-\hat{r}_{21}\)

Thus \(\vec{F}_{21}=\frac{-G m_1 m_2}{r^2} \hat{r}_{12}\) Comparing above, we get \(\vec{F}_{12}=-\vec{F}_{21}\)

Important Characteristics Of Gravitational Force

  1. Gravitational force between two bodies forms an action and reaction pair i.e. the forces are equal in magnitude but opposite in direction.
  2. Gravitational force is a central force i.e. it acts along the line joining the centres of the two interacting bodies.
  3. Gravitational force between two bodies is independent of the nature of the medium, in which they lie.
  4. The gravitational force between two bodies does not depend upon the presence of other bodies.
  5. Gravitational force is negligible in the case of light bodies but becomes appreciable in the case of massive bodies like stars and planets.
  6. Gravitational force is long range-force i.e., gravitational force between two bodies is effective even if their separation is very large. For example, the gravitational force between the sun and the earth is of the order of 1027 N although the distance between them is 1.5 × 107 km

Question 1. The centres of two identical spheres are at a distance of 1.0 m apart. If the gravitational force between them is 1.0 N, then find the mass of each sphere. (G = 6.67 × 10-11 m3 kg-1 sec-1)
Answer:

Gravitational force F = \(\frac{G m \cdot m}{r^2}\)

on substituting F = 1.0 N , r = 1.0 m and G = 6.67 × 10-11 m3 kg-1 sec-1

we get m = 1.225 × 105 kg

Principle Of Superposition

The force exerted by a particle or other particle remains unaffected by the presence of other nearby particles in space.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Principle Of Superposition

The total force acting on a particle is the vector sum of all the forces acted upon by the individual masses when they are taken alone.

⇒ \(\vec{F}_1=\vec{F}_1+\vec{F}_2+\vec{F}_3+\ldots \ldots\)

Question 2.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Four Point Masses Each Of Mass M Are Placed On The Corner Of Square Of Side A

Four point masses each of mass ‘m’ are placed on the corner of a square of side ‘a’. Calculate the magnitude of gravitational force experienced by each particle.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Four Point Masses Each Of Mass M Are Placed On The Corner Of Square Of Side A.

Answer:

Fr= resultant force on each particle = 2F cos 45º + F1

⇒ \(\frac{2 G \cdot m^2}{a^2} \cdot \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}+\frac{G m^2}{(\sqrt{2} a)^2}=\frac{G \cdot m^2}{2 a^2}(2 \sqrt{2}+1)\)

Gravitational Field

The space surrounding the body within which its gravitational force of attraction is experienced by other bodies is called the gravitational field.

  • A gravitational field is very similar to an electric field in electrostatics where charge ‘q’ is replaced by mass ‘m’ and electric constant ‘K’ is replaced by gravitational constant ‘G’.
  • The intensity of the gravitational field at a point is defined as the force experienced by a unit mass placed at that point.

⇒ \(\vec{E}=\frac{\vec{F}}{m}\)

The unit of the intensity of the gravitational field is N kg-1.

Intensity of gravitational field due to point mass:

The force due to mass m on test mass m0 placed at point P is given by :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Intensity Of Gravitational Field Due To Point Mass

⇒ \(\mathrm{F}=\frac{\mathrm{GMm}_0}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)

Hence \(E=\frac{F}{m_0}\)

⇒ \(E=\frac{G m}{r^2}\)

In vector form \(\vec{E}=-\frac{G M}{r^2} \hat{r}\)

Dimensional formula of intensity of gravitational field = \(\frac{F}{m}=\frac{\left[M L T^{-2}\right]}{[M]}\)

⇒ \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}M^0 & L T^{-2}\end{array}\right]\)

Question 1. Find the relation between the gravitational field on the surface of two planets A and B of masses mA, mB and radius RA and RB respectively if

  1. They have equal mass
  2. They have equal (uniform) density

Answer: Let EA and EB be the gravitational field intensities on the surface of planets A and B.

then, \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{A}}=\frac{G m_A}{R_A^2}=\frac{G \frac{4}{3} \pi R_A^3 \rho_A}{R_A^2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{4 G \pi}{3} \rho_A R_A\)

Similarly, \(E_B=\frac{G m_B}{R_{B^2}}=\frac{4 G}{3} \pi \rho_{\mathrm{B}} \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{B}}\)

For \(m_A=m_B\)

⇒ \(\frac{E_A}{E_B}=\frac{R_B^2}{R_A^2}\)

For \(\rho_{\mathrm{A}}=\rho_{\mathrm{B}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{E_A}{E_B}=\frac{R_A}{R_B}\)

Gravitational Potential

The gravitational potential at a point in the gravitational field of a body is defined as the amount of work done by an external agent in bringing a body of unit mass from infinity to that point, slowly (no change in kinetic energy). Gravitational potential is very similar to electric potential in electrostatics.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Gravitational Potential Is Very Similar To Electric Potential In Electrostatics

Gravitational Potential Due To A Point Mass :

Let the unit mass be displaced through a distance dr towards mass M, then work done is given by

dW = F dr = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm}}{\mathrm{r}^2} \mathrm{dr}\)

The total work done in displacing the particle from infinity to point P is −

⇒ \(\mathrm{W}=\int d W=\int_{\infty}^r \frac{G M}{r^2} d r=\frac{-G M}{r}\)

Thus gravitational potential, \(V=-\frac{G M}{r}\)

The unit of gravitational potential is J kg-1. Dimensional Formula of gravitational potential

⇒ \(\frac{\text { work }}{\text { mass }}=\frac{\left[\mathrm{ML}^2 \mathrm{~T}^{-2}\right]}{[\mathrm{M}]}\)

= [M°L2 T-2].

Question 1. Find out the potential at P and Q due to the two-point mass system. Find out work done by external agents in bringing unit mass from P to Q. Also find work done by gravitational force.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Work Done By External Agent In Bringing Unit Mass From P To Q

Answer: VP1 = potential at P due to mass ‘m’ at ‘l’ = –\(\frac{G m}{\ell}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{P} 2}=-\frac{G m}{\ell}\)

∴ \(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{p}}=\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{P} 1}+\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{P} 2}=-\frac{2 G m}{\ell}\)

⇒ \(V_{Q 1}=-\frac{G M}{\ell / 2}\)

⇒ \(V_{Q 2}=-\frac{G m}{\ell / 2}\)

∴ \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{Q}}=\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{Q} 1}+\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{Q} 2}=-\frac{G m}{\ell / 2}-\frac{G m}{\ell / 2}=-\frac{4 G m}{\ell}\)

Force at point Q = 0

Work done by external agent = \(\left(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{Q}}-\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{P}}\right) \times 1=-\frac{2 G M}{\ell}\)

Work done by gravitational force = VP– VQ = \(\frac{2 G M}{\ell}\)

Question 2. Find the potential at a point ‘P’ at a distance ‘x’ on the axis away from the centre of a uniform ring of mass M and radius R.
Answer:

The ring can be considered to be made of a large number of point masses (m1, m2 ………. etc) Ring

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Ring Can Be Considered To Be Made Of Large Number Of Point Masses

⇒ \(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{p}}=-\frac{G m_1}{\sqrt{R^2+x^2}}-\frac{G m_2}{\sqrt{R^2+x^2}}-\ldots \ldots .\)

⇒ \(-\frac{G}{\sqrt{R^2+x^2}}\left(m_1+m_2 \ldots . .\right)=-\frac{G M}{\sqrt{R^2+x^2}}\) where, M = m1+m2+m3+……..

Potential at centre of ring = \(-\frac{G \cdot M}{R}\)

Relation Between Gravitational Field And Potential

The work done by an external agent to move unit mass from one point to another point in the direction of the field E, slowly through an infinitesimal distance dr = Force by external agent × distance moved = – Edr.

Thus dV = – Edr

⇒ E = – \(\frac{d V}{d r}\)

Therefore, the gravitational field at any point is equal to the negative gradient at that point.

Uniform Solid Sphere

Point P inside the shell. r ≤ a, then

V = \(-\frac{\mathrm{Gm}}{2 \mathrm{a}^3}\left(3 \mathrm{a}^2-\mathrm{r}^2\right)\)

and E = \(-\frac{G M r}{a^3}\) ,and at the centre V = \(-\frac{3 G M}{2 a}\) and E = 0

Point P outside the shell. r > a, then V = \(-\frac{G M}{r}\) and E = \(-\frac{G M}{r^2}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Point P Outside The Shell

Uniform Thin Spherical Shell

Point P Inside the shell. r ≤ a , then V = \(-\frac{G M}{a}\) and E = 0

Point P outside shell. r ≥ a, then V = \(-\frac{G M}{r}\) and E = \(-\frac{G M}{r^2}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Uniform Thin Spherical Shell.

Gravitational Potential Energy

The gravitational potential energy of two mass systems is equal to the work done by an external agent in assembling them, while their initial separation was infinity.

Consider a body of mass m placed at a distance r from another body of mass M. The gravitational force of attraction between them is given by

⇒ \(\mathrm{F}=\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)

Now, Let the body of mass m is displaced from a point. C to B through a distance ‘dr’ towards the mass M, then work done by internal conservative force (gravitational) is given by,

⇒ \(\mathrm{dW}=\mathrm{F} \mathrm{dr}=\frac{G M m}{r^2} \mathrm{dr}\)

⇒ \(\int d W=\int_{\infty}^r \frac{G M m}{r^2} \mathrm{dr}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Gravitational Potential Energy

∴ Gravitational potential energy, \(\mathrm{U}=-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{r}\)

Increase In Gravitational Potential Energy:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Increase In Gravitational Potential Energy

Suppose a block of mass m on the surface of the earth. We want to lift this block by ‘h’ height. Work required in this process = increase in P.E. = Uf– Ui= m(Vf– Vi)

⇒ \(\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{ext}}=\Delta \mathrm{U}=(\mathrm{m})\left[-\left(\frac{G M_c}{R_e+h}\right)-\left(-\frac{G M_c}{R_e}\right)\right]\)

Wext = ΔU = \(\mathrm{GM}_e \mathrm{~m}\left(\frac{1}{R_e}-\frac{1}{R_e+h}\right)=\frac{G M_e m}{R_e}\left(1-\left(1+\frac{h}{R_e}\right)^{-1}\right)\)

(as h << Re, we can apply the Binomial theorem)

Wext = ΔU = \(\frac{G M_e m}{R_e}\left(1-\left(1-\frac{h}{R_e}\right)\right)=(\mathrm{m})\left(\frac{G M_e}{R_e^2}\right) \mathrm{h}\)

Wext = ΔU = mgh

This formula is valid only when h << Re

Question 1. A body of mass m is placed on the surface of the earth. Find the work required to lift this body by a height

  1. h = \(\frac{R_c}{1000}\)
  2. h = Re

Answer: h = \(\frac{R_c}{1000}\) as h << Re , so

we can apply

Wext = \(\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{ext}}=\mathrm{U} \uparrow=\mathrm{mgh}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{ext}}=\left(\frac{G M_e}{R_e{ }^2}\right)\left(\frac{R_e}{1000}\right)(\mathrm{m})=\frac{G M_e m}{1000 R_e}\)

h = Re, in this case, h is not much less than Re, so we cannot apply ΔU = mgh so we cannot apply ΔU = mgh

Wext = U↑ = Uf– Ui= m(Vf– Vi)

⇒ \(\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{ext}}=\mathrm{m}\left[\left(-\frac{G M_e}{R_e+R_e}\right)-\left(-\frac{G M_e}{R_e}\right)\right]\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{ost}}=-\frac{G M_e m}{2 R_e}\)

Acceleration Due To Gravity

It is the acceleration, a freely falling body near the earth’s surface acquires due to the earth’s gravitational pull.

  • The property by virtue of which a body experiences or exerts a gravitational pull on another body is called gravitational mass mG, and the property by virtue of which a body opposes any change in its state of rest or uniform motion is called its inertial mass
  • m1 thus if \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}\) is the gravitational field intensity due to the earth at a point P, and g is acceleration due to gravity at the same point, then \(m_1 \vec{g}=m_G \vec{E}\)
  • Now the value of inertial and gravitational mass happens to be exactly the same to a great degree of accuracy for all bodies. Hence,\(\vec{g}=\vec{E}\)

The gravitational field intensity on the surface of the earth is therefore numerically equal to the acceleration due to gravity (g), there. Thus we get,

⇒ \(g=\frac{G M_e}{R_e^2}\)

where, Me= Mass of earth

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Acceleration Due To Gravity

Re = Radius of earth

Note: Here the distribution of mass in the earth is taken to be spherical and symmetrical so that its entire mass can be assumed to be concentrated at its centre for the purpose of calculation of g.

Variation Of Acceleration Due To Gravity

Effect of Altitude

Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth is given by,

g = \(\frac{G M_e}{R_e^2}\)

Now, consider the body at a height ‘h’ above the surface of the earth, then the acceleration due to gravity at height ‘h’ given by

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Effect Of Altitude

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}_{\mathrm{h}}=\frac{G M_e}{\left(R_e+h\right)^2}=\mathrm{g}\left(1+\frac{h}{R_e}\right)^{-2} \simeq \mathrm{g}\left(1-\frac{2 h}{R_e}\right)\)

when h << R.

The decrease in the value of ‘g’ with height h = g – gh= \(\frac{2 g h}{R_e}\)

The percentage decrease in the value of \(‘ \mathrm{~g}^{\prime}=\frac{g-g_h}{g} \times 100=\frac{2 h}{R_e} \times 100 \%\)

Effect Of Depth

The gravitational pull on the surface is equal to its weight i.e. mg = \(\frac{G M_e m}{R_e^2}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Effect Of Depth

∴ \(\mathrm{mg}=\frac{G \times \frac{4}{3} \pi R_e^3 \rho m}{R_e^2}\)

or \(\mathrm{g}=\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{GR}_{\mathrm{e}} \rho\) ………(1)

When the body is taken to a depth d, the mass of the sphere of radius (Re – d) will only be effective for the gravitational pull and the outward shall will have no resultant effect on the mass. If the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the solid sphere is gd, then

⇒ \(g_d=\frac{4}{3} \pi G\left(R_e-d\right) \rho\) ……………(2)

By dividing equation (2) by equation (1)

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}_{\mathrm{d}}=\mathrm{g}\left(1-\frac{d}{R_e}\right)\)

Important Points

At the center of the earth, d = Re, so gcentre = \(g\left(1-\frac{R_e}{R_e}\right)\) = 0.

Thus, the weight (mg) of the body at the centre of the earth is zero.

Percentage decrease in the value of ‘g’ with the depth

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Percentage Decrease In The Value Of G With The Depth

⇒ \(\left(\frac{g-g_d}{g}\right) \times 100=\frac{d}{R_e} \times 100\)

Effect Of The Surface Of Earth:

The equatorial radius is about 21 km longer than its polar radius.

We know, g = \(\frac{G M_e}{R_e^2}\) Hence gpole > gequator.

The weight of the body increases as the body is taken from the equator to the pole.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Effect Of The Surface Of Earth

Effect of rotation of the Earth: The earth rotates around its axis with angular velocity ω. Consider a particle of mass m at latitude θ. The angular velocity of the particle is also ω.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Effect Of Rotation Of The Earth

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}^{\prime}=\mathrm{g}\left[1-\frac{R_e \omega^2}{g} \cos ^2 \theta\right]\)

At pole θ = 90° ⇒ gpole = g,

At equator θ = 0 ⇒ gequator = g \(\left[1-\frac{R_e \omega^2}{g}\right]\)

Hence g pole > g equator

If the body is taken from the pole to the equator, then g′ = g\(\left(1-\frac{R_e \omega^2}{g}\right)\)

Hence % change in weight = \(\frac{m g-m g\left(1-\frac{R_e \omega^2}{g}\right)}{m g} \times 100\)

⇒ \(\frac{m R_e \omega^2}{m g} \times 100\)

⇒ \(\frac{R_e \omega^2}{g} \times 100\)

Escape Speed

The minimum speed required to send a body out of the gravity field of a planet (send it to r → ∞)

Escape Speed At Earth’s Surface:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Escape Speed At Earths Surface

Suppose a particle of mass m is on the earth’s surface

We project it with a velocity V from the earth’s surface so that it just reaches r → ∞ (at r → ∞, its velocity becomes zero)

Applying energy conservation between the initial position (when the particle was at the earth’s surface) and finding positions (when the particle just reaches r → ∞)

Ki+ Ui= Kf+ Uf

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2+m_0\left(-\frac{G M_e}{R}\right)\)

⇒ \(0+\mathrm{m}_0\left(-\frac{G M_e}{(r \rightarrow \infty)}\right)\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{v}=\sqrt{\frac{2 G M_0}{R}}\)

Escape speed from earth is surface \(V_e=\sqrt{\frac{2 G M_e}{R}}\)

If we put the values of G, Me, and R we get

Ve = 11.2 km/s.

Escape Speed Depends On :

  1. Mass (Me) and size (R) of the planet
  2. Position from where the particle is projected.

Escape Speed Does Not Depend On :

  1. Mass of the body which is projected (m0)
  2. The angle of projection.

If a body is thrown from the Earth’s surface with escape speed, it goes out of the earth’s gravitational field and never returns to the Earth’s surface. But it starts revolving around the sun.

Kepler’s Law For Planetary Motion

Suppose a planet is revolving around the sun, or a satellite is revolving around the earth, then the planetary motion can be studied with the help of Kepler’s three laws.

Kepler’s Law Of Orbit

Each planet moves around the sun in a circular path or elliptical path with the sun at its focus. (In fact circular path is a subset of an elliptical path)

Law Of Areal Velocity:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Law Of Areal Velocity

To understand this law, let us understand the angular momentum conservation for the planet.

  • If a planet moves in an elliptical orbit, the gravitation force acting on it always passes through the centre of the sun. So torque of this gravitation force about the centre of the sun will be zero.
  • Hence we can say that the angular momentum of the planet about the centre of the sun will remain conserved (constant) τ about the sun = 0

⇒ \(\frac{d J}{d t}\) = 0

Jplanet/ sun = constant

⇒ mvr sinθ = constant

Now we can easily study Kapler’s law of areal velocity.

If a planet moves around the sun, the radius vector \((\vec{r})\) also rotates are sweeps area as shown in the figure. Now let’s find a rate of area swept by the radius vector \((\vec{r})\).

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Kaplers Law Of Areal Velocity

Suppose a planet is revolving around the sun and at any instant its velocity is v, and the angle between radius vector \((\vec{r})\) and velocity \((\vec{v})\). In dt time, it moves by a distance vdt, during this dt time, the area swept by the radius vector will be OAB which can be assumed to be a triangle

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation A Planet Is Revolving Around The Sun And At Any Instant Its Velocity

dA = 1/2 (Base) (Perpendicular height)

dA = 1/2 (r) (vdtsinθ)

so rate of area swept \(\frac{d A}{d t}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{vr} \sin \theta\)

we can write \(\frac{d A}{d t}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{m v r \sin \theta}{m}\)

where mvr sinθ = angular momentum of the planet about the sun, which remains conserved (constant)

⇒ \(\frac{d A}{d t}=\frac{L_{\text {planet } / \text { sun }}}{2 m}\)= constant

so the Rate of area swept by the radius vector is constant

Kepler’s Law Of Time Period: Suppose a planet is revolving around the sun in a circular orbit

then \(\frac{m_0 v^2}{r}=\frac{G M_s m_0}{r^2}\)

v = \(\sqrt{\frac{G M_s}{r}}\)

Time period of the revolution is

⇒ \(\frac{2 \pi r}{v}=2 \pi \mathrm{r} \sqrt{\frac{r}{G M_s}}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation A Planet Is Revolving Around The Sun In Circular Orbit

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}^2=\left(\frac{4 \pi^2}{G M_s}\right) \mathrm{r}^3\)

For all the planets of a sun, T2 ∝ r3

Circular Motion Of A Satellite Around A Planet

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Circular Motion Of A Satilite Around A Planet

Suppose a satellite of mass m0 is at a distance r from a planet. If the satellite does not revolve, then due to the gravitational attraction, it may collide with the planet.

To avoid a collision, the satellite revolves around the planet, in a circular motion of a satellite.

⇒ \(\frac{G M_e m_0}{r^2}=\frac{m_0 v^2}{r}\) ….

⇒ v = \(\sqrt{\frac{G M_e}{r}}\) this velocity is called orbital velocity (v0)

⇒ \(\mathrm{v}_0=\sqrt{\frac{G M_e}{r}}\)

Total Energy Of The Satellite Moving In Circular Orbit:

KE = \(\frac{1}{2} m_0 v^2\) and from equation …..(1)

⇒ \(\frac{m_0 v^2}{r}=\frac{G M_e m_0}{r^2}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{m}_0 \mathrm{v}^2=\frac{G M_e m_0}{r}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{KE}=\frac{1}{2} m_0 v^2=\frac{G M_e m_0}{2 r}\)

Potential energy

⇒ \(\mathrm{U}=-\frac{G M_e m_0}{r}\)

Total energy = KE + PE = \(\left(\frac{G M_e m_0}{2 r}\right)+\left(\frac{-G M_e m_0}{r}\right)\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{TE}=-\frac{G M_e m_0}{2 r}\)

The total energy is –ve. It shows that the satellite is still bounded by the planet.

Geo – Stationery Satelite

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Geo Stationery Satellite

We know that the earth rotates about its axis with angular velocity ωearth and time period Tearth = 24 hours.

Suppose a satellite is set in an orbit which is in the plane of the equator, whose ω is equal to ωearth, (or its T is equal to Tearth = 24 hours) and whose direction is also the same as that of earth. Then as seen from Earth, it will appear to be stationary. This type of satellite is called geostationary satellite. For a geo-stationery satellite,

wsatelite = wearth

⇒ Tsatelite = Tearth= 24 hr.

So time period of a geo-stationery satellite must be 24 hours. To achieve T = 24 hours, the orbital radius geo-stationery satellite :

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}^2=\left(\frac{4 \pi^2}{G M_e}\right) \mathrm{r}^3\)

Putting the values, we get an orbital radius of geo stationary satellite r = 6.6 Re(here Re = radius of the earth) height from the surface h = 5.6 Re.

Path Of A Satellite According To Different Speed Of Projection

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Path Of Satilites According To Different Speed Of Projection

Suppose a satellite is at a distance r from the centre of the earth. If we give different velocities (v) to the satellite, its path will be different

If v < v0 \(\left(\text { or } v<\sqrt{\frac{G M_e}{r}}\right)\) then the satellite will move in an elliptical path and strike the earth’s surface.

But if the size of the earth were small, the satellite would complete the elliptical orbit, and the centre of the earth would be at its farther focus.

If v = v0 \(\left(\text { or } \quad v=\sqrt{\frac{G M_e}{r}}\right)\), then the satellite will revolve in a circular orbit.

If v0 > V > v0 \(\left(\text { or } \sqrt{\frac{2 G M_e}{r}}>v>\sqrt{\frac{G M_e}{r}}\right)\), then the satellite will revolve in an elliptical orbital, and the centre of the earth will be at its nearer focus.

If v = ve \(\left(\begin{array}{ll}\text { or } and v=\sqrt{\frac{2 G M_e}{r}}
\end{array}\right)\), then the satellite will just escape with a parabolic path.

Question 1. Suppose a planet is revolving around the sun in an elliptical path given by \(\frac{x^2}{a^2}+\frac{y^2}{b^2}=1\). Find a period of revolution. The angular momentum of the planet about the sun is L.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Angular Momentum Of The Planet About The Sun Is L

Answer: Rate of area swept = \(\frac{d A}{d t}=\frac{L}{2 m}\) constant

⇒ \(\mathrm{dA}=\frac{L}{2 m} d t\)

⇒ \(\int_{A=0}^{A=\pi a b} d A=\int_{t=0}^{t=T} \frac{L}{2 m} d t\)

⇒ \(\pi \mathrm{ab}=\frac{L}{2 m} \mathrm{~T}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}=\frac{2 \pi m a b}{L}\)

Question 2. The Earth and Jupiter are two planets of the sun. The orbital radius of the earth is 107 m and that of Jupiter is 4 × 107 m. If the time period of the revolution of earth is T = 365 days, find the time period of revolution of the Jupiter.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Earth And Jupiter Are Two Planets Of The Sun

Answer:

For both the planets T2 ∝ r3

⇒ \(\left(\frac{T_{\text {jupitar }}}{T_{\text {earth }}}\right)^2=\left(\frac{T_{\text {jupiter }}}{r_{\text {earhh }}}\right)^3\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{T_{\text {juppicr }}}{365 \text { days }}\right)^2=\left(\frac{4 \times 10^7}{10^7}\right)^3\)

Tjupiter = 8 × 365 days

Question 3.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Gravitational Potential Energy Of The Mass Due To Earth

Suppose earth has radius R and mass M. A point mass m0 is at a distance r from the centre. Find the gravitational potential energy of the mass due to the earth.
Answer:

Ug= (m0) (Vearth)

⇒ \(\mathrm{U}_{\mathrm{g}}=\left(\mathrm{m}_0\right)\left(-\frac{G M_e}{r}\right)=\left(-\frac{G M_e m_0}{r}\right)\)

Question 4.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Earth Has Mass And Radius R We Project The Particle So That It May Escape Out Of The Gravity Field

Suppose the earth has mass and radius R. A small groove in made and point mass m0is placed at the centre of the sphere. With what minimum velocity should we project the particle so that it may escape out of the gravity field (reaches to r → ∞)
Answer:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Earth Has Mass And Radius R We Project The Particle So That It May Escape Out Of The Gravity Field.

Suppose the particle is projected with speed v, and to send it to infinity, its velocity should be zero at r → ∞. Applying energy conservation between its initial position (centre) and final position (r → ∞) Ki+ Ui= kf+ Uf

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} m_0 v^2+\left(m_0\right)\left(v_{\text {earth }}\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~m}_0 \mathrm{v}^2+\left(\mathrm{m}_0\right)\left(-\frac{3 G M_e}{2 R}\right)\)

⇒ 0+m0(0)

⇒ \(\mathrm{v}=\left(\sqrt{\frac{3 G M_e}{R}}\right)\)

Summary

Newton’s Law Of Gravitation:

Gravitational attraction force between two point masses

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Newtons Law Of Gravitation

⇒ \(\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{g}}=\frac{G m_1 m_2}{r^2}\) and its direction will be attractive.

Gravitational force on (1) due to (2) in vector form

⇒ \(\vec{F}_{12}=\frac{G m_1 m_2}{r^2}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Newtons Law Of Gravitation In Vector Form

Gravitational Field: Gravitational force acting on unit mass.

⇒ \(\mathbf{g}=\frac{F}{m}\)

Gravitational Potential:

⇒ \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{g}}=\frac{U}{m}\)

Gravitation potential energy of unit mass

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}=-\frac{d V_g}{d r}\)

and \(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{B}}-\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{A}}=-\int_A^B \vec{g} \cdot d \vec{r}\)

For point mass: GM

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}=\frac{G M}{r^2}, \mathrm{~V}=-\frac{G M}{r}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation For Point Mass

For circular ring g = \(\frac{G M x}{\left(R^2+x^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{v}=-\frac{G M}{\sqrt{R^2+x^2}}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation For Circular Ring

For thin circular disc

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation For Thin Circular Disc

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}=\frac{2 G M}{R^2}\left(1-\frac{1}{\sqrt{1+\left(\frac{R}{x}\right)^2}}\right)\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{v}=\frac{-2 G M}{R^2}\left(\sqrt{R^2+x^2}-x\right)\)

Uniform thin spherical shell: 

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Uniform Thin Spherical Shell

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}_{\text {out }}=\frac{G M}{r^2}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}_{\text {surface }}=\frac{G M}{R^2}\)

gin = 0

Potential:

⇒ \(\mathrm{v}_{\text {out }}=-\frac{G M}{r}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{V}_{\text {surtace }}=-\frac{G M}{R}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{in}}=-\frac{G M}{R}\)

Uniform solid sphere: (Most Important)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Uniform Solid Sphere

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}_{\text {out }}=\frac{G M}{r^2}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}_{\text {surface }}=\frac{G M}{R^2}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}_{\mathrm{in}}=\frac{G M}{R^3} r\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}_{\text {centre }}=0\)

Potential: \(\mathrm{V}_{\text {out }}=-\frac{G M}{r}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{in}}=-\frac{G M}{2 R^3}\left(3 R^2-r^2\right)\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{V}_{\text {surtace }}=-\frac{G M}{R}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{V}_{\text {centre }}=-\frac{3}{2} \frac{G M}{R}\)

Self Energy:

Surface = \(\mathrm{U}_{\text {self }}=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{G M^2}{R}0\)

Gravitational Self energy of a Uniform Sphere = Uself= \(-\frac{3}{5} \frac{G M^2}{R}\)

Escape speed from earth’s surface

⇒ \(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{e}}=\sqrt{\frac{2 G M_e}{R}}\)

= 11.2km/sec.

If a satellite is moving around the Earth in a circular orbit, then its orbital speed is

⇒ \(\mathrm{V}_0=\sqrt{\frac{G M_e}{r}}\)

where r is the distance of the satellite from the centre of the earth.

PE . of the satellite = – \(\frac{G M_e m}{r}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The R Is Distance Of Satellite From The Centre Of Earth

KE of the satellite = \(\frac{1}{2} m v_0^2=\frac{G M_e m}{2 r}\)

TE of the satellite = \(-\frac{G M_e m}{2 r}\)

Time Period of Geo-stationary satellite = 24 hours

Kapler’s laws: 

  1. Law of Orbit: If a planet is revolving around a sun, its path is either elliptical (or circular)
  2. Law of Area :

View (1) If a planet is revolving around a sun, the angular momentum of the planet about the sun remains conserved

View (2) The radius vector from the sum to the planet sweeps the area at a constant rate

Areal velocity = \(\frac{d A}{d t}=\frac{L}{2 m}\) = constant

(3) For all the planets of a sun T2 ∝ R3

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}^2=\left(\frac{4 \pi^2}{G M_s}\right) \mathrm{R}^3\)

Factors Affecting Acceleration Due to Gravity

1. Effect Of Altitude: \(\mathrm{g}_{\mathrm{n}}=\frac{G M_e}{\left(R_e+h\right)^2}\)

\(\mathrm{g}\left(1+\frac{h}{R_e}\right)^{-2} \simeq \mathrm{g}\left(1-\frac{2 h}{R_e}\right)\) when h << R.

2. Effect Of Depth: \(\mathrm{g}_{\mathrm{d}}=\mathrm{g}\left(1-\frac{d}{R_e}\right)\)

3. Effect Of The Surface Of Earth

The equatorial radius is about 21 km longer than its polar radius.

We know, g = \(\frac{G M_e}{R_e^2}\)

Hence gpole > gequator.

4. Effect Of Rotation Of The Earth

Consider a particle of mass m at latitude θ. g′ = g – ω2Re cos2θ

At pole θ = 90°

⇒ gpole = g , At equator θ = 0

⇒ gequator = g – ω2Re.

Hence gpole > gequator

 

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 7 Gravitation Multiple Choice Question Ans Answers

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 7 Gravitation Multiple Choice Question Ans Answers

Question 1. Weight of an object is :

  1. Normal reaction between ground and the object
  2. Gravitational force exerted by earth on the object.
  3. Dependent on frame of reference.
  4. Net force on the object

Answer: 2. Gravitational force exerted by earth on the object

Question 2. The weight of a body at the centre of the earth is –

  1. Zero
  2. Infinite
  3. Same as on the surface of earth
  4. None of the above

Answer: 1. Zero

Question 3. If the distance between two masses is doubled, the gravitational attraction between them.

  1. Is doubled
  2. Becomes four times
  3. Is reduced to half
  4. Is reduced to a quarter

Answer: 4. Is reduced to a quarter

Question 4. The gravitational force between two stones of mass 1 kg each separated by a distance of 1 metre in vacuum is –

  1. Zero
  2. 6.675 × 10-5 Newton
  3. 6.675 × 10-11 Newton
  4. 6.675 × 10-8 Newton

Answer: 3. 6.675 × 10-11 newton

Question 5. Two particles of equal mass go round a circle of radius R under the action of their mutual gravitational attraction. The speed of each particle is –

  1. \(\mathrm{v}=\frac{1}{2 R} \sqrt{\frac{1}{G m}}\)
  2. \(\mathrm{v}=\sqrt{\frac{G m}{2 R}}\)
  3. \(\mathrm{v}=\frac{1}{2} \sqrt{\frac{G m}{R}}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{v}=\sqrt{\frac{4 G m}{R}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\mathrm{v}=\frac{1}{2} \sqrt{\frac{G m}{R}}\)

Question 6. Reason of weightlessness in a satellite is –

  1. Zero gravity
  2. Centre of mass
  3. Zero reaction force by satellite surface
  4. None

Answer: 3. Zero reaction force by satellite surface

Question 7. The gravitational force Fgbetween two objects does not depend on –

  1. Sum of the masses
  2. Product of the masses
  3. Gravitational constant
  4. Distance between the masses

Answer: 1. Sum of the masses

Question 8. A mass M splits into two parts m and (M – m), which are then separated by a certain distance. What ratio (m/M) maximies the gravitational force between the parts?

  1. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
  2. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 9. On a planet (whose size is the same as that of Earth and mass 4 times of the Earth) the energy needed to lift a 2kg mass vertically upwards through a 2m distance on the planet is (g = 10m/sec2 on surface of earth)

  1. 16 J
  2. 32 J
  3. 160 J
  4. 320 J

Answer: 3. 160 J

Question 10. The dimensions of universal gravitational constant are :

  1. [M-1L3T-2]
  2. [ML2T-1]
  3. [M-2L3T-2]
  4. [M-2L2T-1]

Answer: 1. [M-1L3T-2]

Question 11. If the change in the value of ‘g’ at a height h above the surface of the earth is the same as at a depth x below it, then (both x and h being much smaller than the radius of the earth) –

  1. x = h
  2. x = 2h
  3. x = \(\frac{h}{2}\)
  4. x = h2

Answer: 2. x = 2h

Question 12. The moon’s radius is 1/4 that of the Earth and its mass is 1/80 time that of the earth. If g represents the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth, that on the surface of the moon is

  1. g/4
  2. g/5
  3. g/6
  4. g/8

Answer: 2. g/5

Question 13. Assuming the earth to be a homogeneous sphere of radius R, its density in terms of G (constant of gravitation) and g (acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth) is

  1. 3g/(4πRG)
  2. 4πg/(3RG)
  3. 4πRg/(3G)
  4. 4πRG/(3g)

Answer: 1. 3g/(4πRG)

Question 14. An object is placed at a distance of R/2 from the centre of earth. Knowing mass is distributed uniformly, acceleration of that object due to gravity at that point is: (g = acceleration due to gravity on the surface of earth and R is the radius of earth)

  1. g
  2. 2 g
  3. g/2
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. g/2

Question 15. Altitude at which acceleration due to gravity decreases by 0.1% approximately : (Radius of earth = 6400 km)

  1. 3.2 km
  2. 6.4 km
  3. 2.4 km
  4. 1.6 km

Answer: 1. 3.2 km

Question 16. An iron ball and a wooden ball of the same radius are released from a height ‘h’ in vacuum. The time taken by both of them to reach the ground is –

  1. Unequal
  2. Exactly equal
  3. Roughly equal
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. Exactly equal

Question 17. The correct answer to above question is based on –

  1. Acceleration due to gravity in vacuum is same irrespective of size and mass of the body
  2. Acceleration due to gravity in v
  3. acuum depends on the mass of the body
  4. There is no acceleration due to gravity in vacuum
  5. In vacuum there is resistance offered to the motion of the body and this resistance depends on the mass of the body

Answer: 1. Acceleration due to gravity in vacuum is same irrespective of size and mass of the body

Question 18. When a body is taken from the equator to the poles, its appearent weight –

  1. Remains constant
  2. Increases
  3. Decreases
  4. Increases at N-pole and decreases at S-pole

Answer: 2. Increases

Question 19. A body of mass m is taken to the bottom of a deep mine. Then –

  1. Its mass increases
  2. Its mass decreases
  3. Its weight increases
  4. Its weight decreases

Answer: 4. Its weight decreases

Question 20. As we go from the equator to the poles, the value of g

  1. Remains the same
  2. Decreases
  3. Increases
  4. Decreases upto a latitude of 45º

Answer: 3. Increases

Question 21. Force of gravity is least at

  1. The equator
  2. The poles
  3. A point in between equator and any pole
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. The equator

Question 22. Spot the wrong statement :

  1. The acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ decreases if –
  2. We go down from the surface of the earth towards its centre
  3. We go up from the surface of the earth
  4. We go from the equator towards the poles on the surface of the earth
  5. The rotational velocity of the earth is increased

Answer: 3. We go from the equator towards the poles on the surface of the earth

Question 23. Choose the correct statement from the following : Weightlessness of an astronaut moving in a satellite is a situation of –

  1. Zero g
  2. No gravity
  3. Zero mass
  4. Free fall

Answer: 4. Free fall

Question 24. If the earth suddenly shrinks (without changing mass) to half of its present radius, the acceleration due to gravity will be –

  1. g/2
  2. 4g
  3. g/4
  4. 2g

Answer: 2. 4g

Question 25. The moon’s radius is 1/4 that of the earth and its mass is 1/80 times that of the earth. If g represents the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth, that on the surface of the moon is –

  1. g/4
  2. g/5
  3. g/6
  4. g/8

Answer: 2. g/5

Question 26. The radius of the earth is around 6000 km. The weight of a body at a height of 6000 km from the earth’s surface becomes –

  1. Half
  2. One-fourth
  3. One third
  4. No change

Answer: 2. One-fourth

Question 27. At what height from the ground will the value of ‘g’ be the same as that in a 10 km deep mine below the surface of the earth –

  1. 20 km
  2. 10 km
  3. 15 km
  4. 5 km

Answer: 4. 5 km

Question 28. At what distance from the centre of the earth, the value of acceleration due to gravity g will be half that on the surface (R = Radius of earth)

  1. 2R
  2. R
  3. 1.414 R
  4. 0.414 R

Answer: 3. 1.414 R

Question 29. What will be the acceleration due to gravity at height h if h >> R. Where R is the radius of the earth and g is the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth.

  1. \(\frac{g}{\left(1+\frac{h}{R}\right)^2}\)
  2. \(g\left(1-\frac{2 h}{R}\right)\)
  3. \(\frac{g}{\left(1-\frac{h}{R}\right)^2}\)
  4. \(g\left(1-\frac{h}{R}\right)\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{g}{\left(1+\frac{h}{R}\right)^2}\)

Question 30. If the density of the earth is doubled keeping its radius constant then acceleration due to gravity will be (g = 9.8 m/s2)

  1. 19.6 m/s2
  2. 9.8 m/s2
  3. 4.9 m/s2
  4. 2.45 m/s2

Answer: 1. 19.6 m/s2

Question 31. The acceleration due to gravity at the pole and equator can be related as –

  1. gp< ge
  2. gp= ge= g
  3. gp= ge< g
  4. gp> ge

Answer: 4. gp> ge

Question 32. The depth at which the effective value of acceleration due to gravity is \(\frac{g}{4}\) is

  1. R
  2. \(\frac{3 R}{4}\)
  3. \(\frac{R}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{R}{4}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{R}{2}\)

Question 33. Two bodies of mass 100 kg and 104 kg are lying one meter apart. At what distance from a 100 kg body will the intensity of the gravitational field be zero

  1. \(\frac{1}{9} m\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{10} m\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{11} m\)
  4. \(\frac{10}{11} \mathrm{~m}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{1}{11} m\)

Question 34. Figure shows a hemispherical shell having uniform mass density. The direction of gravitational field intensity at point P will be along:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation A Hemispherical Shell Having Uniform Mass Density

  1. a
  2. b
  3. c
  4. d

Answer: 3. c

Question 35. Two bodies of mass 102 kg and 103 kg are lying 1m apart. The gravitational potential at the mid-point of the line joining them is

  1. 0
  2. –1.47 Joule/kg
  3. 1.47 Joule/kg
  4. –1.47 × 10-9 joule/kg

Answer: 4. –1.47 × 10-9 joule/kg

Question 36. A simple pendulum has a period T1 when on the earth’s surface, and T2 when taken to a height R above the earth’s surface, where R is the radius of the earth. The value of T2/T1 is:

  1. 1
  2. \(\sqrt{2}\)
  3. 4
  4. 2

Answer: 4. 2

Question 37. Near earth time period of a satellite is 4 h. Find its time period at a distance 4R from the centre of earth:

  1. 32 h
  2. \(\left(\frac{1}{8^3 \sqrt{2}}\right) h\)
  3. \(8^3 \sqrt{2} h\)
  4. 16 h

Answer: 1. 32 h

Question 38. The radius of the orbit of a planet is two times that of the Earth. The time period of a planet is:

  1. 4.2 T
  2. 2.8 T
  3. 5.6 T
  4. 8.4 T

Answer: 2. 2.8 T

Question 39. In the case of earth:

  1. The field is zero, both at the centre and infinity
  2. The potential is zero, both at the centre and infinity
  3. The potential is the same, both at centre and infinity but not zero
  4. The potential is maximum at the centre

Answer: 1. Field is zero, both at the centre and infinity

Question 40. What would be the angular speed of the earth, so that bodies lying on the equator may appear weightless? (g = 10m/s2 and radius of earth = 6400 km)

  1. 1.25 × 10-3 rad/sec
  2. 1.25 × 10-2 rad/sec
  3. 1.25 × 10-4 rad/sec
  4. 1.25 × 10-1 rad/sec

Answer: 1. 1.25 × 10-3 rad/sec

Question 41. The speed with which the earth has to rotate on its axis so that a person on the equator would weigh (3/5)th as much as present will be (Take the equatorial radius as 6400 km.)

  1. 3.28 × 10-4 rad/sec
  2. 7.826 × 10-4 rad/sec
  3. 3.28 × 10-3 rad/sec
  4. 7.28 × 10-3 rad/sec

Answer: 2. 7.826 × 10-4 rad/sec

Question 42. A body of mass m is lifted up from the surface of the earth to a height three times the radius of the earth. The change in potential energy of the body is (g = gravity field at the surface of the earth)

  1. mgR
  2. \(\frac{3}{4} \mathrm{mgR}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{3} \mathrm{mgR}\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{3} \mathrm{mgR}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{3}{4} \mathrm{mgR}\)

Question 43. The change in potential energy when a body of mass m is raised to a height n R from the earth’s surface is (R = Radius of earth)

  1. mgR
  2. nmgR
  3. \(\mathrm{mgR} \frac{n^2}{n^2+1}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{mgR} \frac{n}{n+1}\)

Answer: 4. \(\mathrm{mgR} \frac{n}{n+1}\)

Question 44. If the mass of the earth is M, the radius is R and the gravitational constant is G, then work done to take 1 kg mass from the earth’s surface to infinity will be –

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{2 R}}\)
  2. \(\frac{G M}{R}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{R}}\)
  4. \(\frac{G M}{2 R}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{G M}{R}\)

Question 45. A rocket is launched with a velocity of 10 km/s. If the radius of the earth is R, then the maximum height attained by it will be

  1. 2R
  2. 3R
  3. 4R
  4. 5R

Answer: 3. 3R

Question 46. What is the intensity of the gravitational field at the centre of a spherical shell –

  1. Gm/r2
  2. g
  3. Zero
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. Zero

Question 47. The escape velocity of a body of 1 kg mass on a planet is 100 m/sec. The gravitational Potential energy of the body on the Planet is –

  1. – 5000 J
  2. – 1000 J
  3. – 2400 J
  4. 5000 J

Answer: 1. – 5000 J

Question 48. The kinetic energy needed to project a body of mass m from the earth’s surface (radius R) to infinity is –

  1. mgR/2
  2. 2 mgR
  3. mgR
  4. mgR/4

Answer: 3. mgR

Question 49. The escape velocity of a sphere of mass m from Earth having mass M and radius R is given by –

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{R}}\)
  2. \(2 \sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M m}{R}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{R}}\)

Question 50. If g is the acceleration due to gravity at the earth’s surface and r is the radius of the earth, the escape velocity for the body to escape out of the earth’s gravitational field is –

  1. gr
  2. \(\sqrt{2 g r}\)
  3. g/r
  4. r/g

Answer: 2. \(\sqrt{2 g r}\)

Question 51. For the moon to cease to remain the earth’s satellite, its orbital velocity has to increase by a factor of –

  1. 2
  2. \(\sqrt{2}\)
  3. \(1 / \sqrt{2}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{3}\)

Answer: 2. \(\sqrt{2}\)

Question 52. Escape velocity on a planet is ve. If the radius of the planet remains the same and the mass becomes 4 times, the escape velocity becomes –

  1. 4ve
  2. 2ve
  3. ve
  4. ve

Answer: 2. 2ve

Question 53. How many times is the escape velocity (Ve), of orbital velocity (V0) for a satellite revolving near Earth –

  1. \(\sqrt{2}\) times
  2. 2 times
  3. 3 times
  4. 4 times

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{2}\) times

Question 54. If the radius of a planet is R and its density is, the escape velocity from its surface will be –

  1. \(v_e \propto R\)
  2. \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{e}} \propto \mathrm{R} \sqrt{p}\)
  3. \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{e}} \propto \frac{\sqrt{\rho}}{R}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{e}} \propto \frac{1}{\sqrt{\rho R}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{e}} \propto \mathrm{R} \sqrt{p}\)

Question 55. If V, R and g denote respectively the escape velocity from the surface of the earth radius of the earth, and acceleration due to gravity, then the correct equation is –

  1. \(v=\sqrt{g R}\)
  2. \(V=\sqrt{\frac{4}{3} g R^3}\)
  3. \(\mathrm{V}=\mathrm{R} \sqrt{g}\)
  4. \(V=\sqrt{2 g R}\)

Answer: 4. \(V=\sqrt{2 g R}\)

Question 56. If the radius of a planet is four times that of Earth and the value of g is the same for both, the escape velocity on the planet will be –

  1. 11.2 km/s
  2. 5.6 km/s
  3. 22.4 km/s
  4. None

Answer: 3. 22.4 km/s

Question 57. If the radius and acceleration due to gravity both are doubled, the escape velocity of the earth will become.

  1. 11.2 km/s
  2. 22.4 km/s
  3. 5.6 km/s
  4. 44.8 km/s

Answer: 2. 22.4 km/s

Question 58. If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth’s surface, the gain in P.E. of an object of mass m raised from the surface of the earth to a height of the radius R of the earth is

  1. mgR
  2. 2mgR
  3. 12mgR
  4. 14mgR

Answer: 3. 12mgR

Question 59. A missile is launched with a velocity less than the escape velocity. The sum of kinetic energy and potential energy will be

  1. Positive
  2. Negative
  3. Negative or positive, uncertain
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. Negative

Question 60. If ve is escape velocity and v0 is the orbital velocity of a satellite for orbit close to the earth’s surface, then these are related by :

  1. \(\mathrm{v}_0=\sqrt{2} v_e\)
  2. \(v_0=v_e\)
  3. \(v_e=\sqrt{2 v_0}\)
  4. \(v_e=\sqrt{2} v_0\)

Answer: 4. \(v_e=\sqrt{2} v_0\)

Question 61. An artificial satellite moving in a circular orbit around the earth has a total (kinetic + potential) energy E0. Its potential energy is :

  1. − Eº
  2. 1.5 Eº
  3. 2 Eº

Answer: 3. 2 Eº

Question 62. The mass and radius of the earth and moon are M1, R1 and M2, R2 respectively. Their centres are d distance apart. With what velocity should a particle of mass m be projected from the midpoint of its centres so that it may escape out to infinity?

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{G\left(M_1+M_2\right)}{d}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G\left(M_1+M_2\right)}{d}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{4 G\left(M_1+M_2\right)}{d}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{G M_1 M_2}{d}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\sqrt{\frac{4 G\left(M_1+M_2\right)}{d}}\)

Question 63. A satellite has to revolve around the earth in a circular orbit of radius 8 × 103 km. The velocity of projection of the satellite in this orbit will be

  1. 16 km/sec
  2. 8 km/sec
  3. 3 km/sec
  4. 7.08 km/sec

Answer: 4. 7.08 km/sec

Question 64. The ratio of the radius of the earth to that of the moon is 10. The ratio of g an earth to the moon is 6. The ratio of the escape velocity from the Earth’s surface to that from the moon is approximately

  1. 10
  2. 8
  3. 4
  4. 2

Answer: 2. 8

Question 65. Acceleration due to gravity on a planet is 10 times the value on the Earth. Escape velocity for the planet and the earth are Vp and Ve respectively Assuming that the radii of the planet and the earth are the same, then

  1. \(V_{\mathrm{P}}=10 \mathrm{~V}_{\mathrm{e}}\)
  2. \(V_P=\sqrt{10} V_e\)
  3. \(V_P=\frac{V_e}{\sqrt{10}}\)
  4. \(V_P=\frac{V_e}{10}\)

Answer: 3. \(V_P=\frac{V_e}{\sqrt{10}}\)

Question 66. A space shuttle is launched in a circular orbit near the Earth’s surface. The additional velocity given to the space shuttle to get free from the influence of gravitational force will be

  1. 1.52 km/s
  2. 2.75 km/s
  3. 3.28 km/s
  4. 5.18 km/s

Answer: 3. 3.28 km/s

Question 67. A body of mass m is situated at a distance 4Re above the earth’s surface, where Re is the radius of the earth. How much minimum energy be given to the body so that it may escape

  1. mgRe
  2. 2mgRe
  3. \(\frac{m g R_e}{5}\)
  4. \(\frac{m g R_e}{16}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{m g R_e}{5}\)

Question 68. The potential energy of a body of mass 3kg on the surface of a planet is 54 joule. The escape velocity will be

  1. 18m/s
  2. 162 m/s
  3. 36 m/s
  4. 6 m/s

Answer: 4. 6 m/s

Question 69. The escape velocity from a planet is v0. The escape velocity from a planet having twice the radius but the same density will be

  1. 0.5 v0
  2. v0
  3. 2v0
  4. 4v0

Answer: 3. 2v0

Question 70. If the kinetic energy of a satellite orbiting around the earth is doubled then

  1. The satellite will escape into space.
  2. The satellite will fall down on the earth
  3. The radius of its orbit will be doubled
  4. The radius of its orbit will become half

Answer: 1. The satellite will escape into the space.

Question 71. The escape velocity from the earth does not depend upon

  1. Mass of earth
  2. Mass of the body
  3. Radius of earth
  4. Acceleration due to gravity

Answer: 2. Mass of the body

Question 72. There is no atmosphere on the moon because

  1. It is near the earth
  2. It is orbiting around the earth
  3. There was no gas at all
  4. The escape velocity of gas molecules is less than their root-mean-square velocity

Answer: 4. The escape velocity of gas molecules is less than their root-mean-square velocity

Question 73. The escape velocity is

  1. 2gR
  2. gR
  3. \(\sqrt{g R}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{2g R}\)

Answer: 4. \(\sqrt{2g R}\)

Question 74. A particle of mass m is taken through the gravitational field produced by a source S, from A to B, along the three paths as shown in the figure. If the work done along the paths 1, 2 and 3 is W1, W2 and W3 respectively, then

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation A Particle Of Mass M Is Taken Through The Gravitational Field

  1. W1= W2= W3
  2. W2> W3= W2
  3. W3= W2> W1
  4. W1> W2> W3

Answer: 1. W1= W2= W3

Question 75. The escape velocity of a particle of mass m varies as :

  1. m2
  2. m
  3. m0
  4. m-1

Answer: 3. m0

Question 76. Acceleration due to gravity at the earth’s surface is g ms-2. Find the effective value of gravity at a height of 32 km from sea level : (Re= 6400 km) (Re= 6400 km)

  1. 0.5 g ms-2
  2. 0.99 g ms-2
  3. 1.01 g ms-2
  4. 0.90 g ms-2

Answer: 2. 0.99 g ms-2

Question 77. The radius of orbit of the satellite of earth is R. Its kinetic energy is proportional to :

  1. \(\frac{1}{R}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{R}}\)
  3. R
  4. \(\frac{1}{R^{3 / 2}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{1}{R}\)

Question 78. A cosmonaut is orbiting earth in a spacecraft at an altitude h = 630 km with a speed of 8 km/s. If the radius of the earth is 6400 km, the acceleration of the cosmonaut is

  1. 9.10 m/s2
  2. 9.80 m/s2
  3. 10.0 m/s2
  4. 9.88 m/s2

Answer: 1. 9.10 m/s2

Question 79. A very very large number of particles of the same mass m are kept at horizontal distances of 1m, 2m, 4m, 8m and so on from (0,0) point. The total gravitational potential at this point is (addition of G.P. of infinite terms = \(\frac{a}{1-r}\) where a = first term, r = common ratio) :

  1. – 8G m
  2. – 3G m
  3. – 4G m
  4. – 2G m

Answer: 4. – 2G m

Question 80. A body starts from rest at a point, distance R0 from the centre of the earth of mass M, radius R. The velocity acquired by the body when it reaches the surface of the earth will be

  1. \(\mathrm{GM}\left(\frac{1}{R}-\frac{1}{R_0}\right)\)
  2. \(2 \mathrm{GM}\left(\frac{1}{R}-\frac{1}{R_0}\right)\)
  3. \(\sqrt{2 G M\left(\frac{1}{R}-\frac{1}{R_0}\right)}\)
  4. \(2 \mathrm{GM} \sqrt{\left(\frac{1}{R}-\frac{1}{R_0}\right)}\)

Answer: 3. \(\sqrt{2 G M\left(\frac{1}{R}-\frac{1}{R_0}\right)}\)

Question 81. The relation between the escape velocity from the earth and the velocity of a satellite orbiting near the earth’s surface is

  1. ve = 3v
  2. ve= v
  3. ve= 2v
  4. ve= v/2

Answer: 2. ve= v

Question 82. A body attains a height equal to the radius of the earth. The velocity of the body with which it was projected is :

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{R}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{5}{4} \frac{G M}{R}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{3 G M}{R}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}}\)

Question 83. A satellite of mass m is circulating around the earth with constant angular velocity. If the radius of the orbit is R0 and the mass of the earth is M, the angular momentum about the centre of the earth is

  1. \(M \sqrt{G M R_0}\)
  2. \(M \sqrt{G m R_0}\)
  3. \(M \sqrt{\frac{G M}{R_0}}\)
  4. \(M \sqrt{\frac{G M}{R_0}}\)

Answer: 1. \(M \sqrt{G M R_0}\)

Question 84. Which of the following quantities is conserved for a satellite revolving around the earth in a particular orbit?

  1. Angular velocity
  2. Force
  3. Angular momentum
  4. Velocity

Answer: 3. Angular momentum

Question 85. The distance of Neptune and Saturn from sun are nearly 1013 and 1012 meters respectively. Assuming that they move in circular orbits, their periodic times will be in the ratio –

  1. \(\sqrt{10}\)
  2. 100
  3. \(10 \sqrt{10}\)
  4. \(1 / \sqrt{10}\)

Answer: 3. \(10 \sqrt{10}\)

Question 86. The period of a satellite in a circular orbit of radius R is T, and the period of another satellite in a circular orbit of radius 4R is –

  1. 4T
  2. T/4
  3. 8T
  4. T/8

Answer: 3. 8T

Question 87. If a body describes a circular motion under an inverse square field, the time taken to complete one revolution T is related to the radius of the circular orbit as –

  1. T ∝ r
  2. T ∝ r2
  3. T2 ∝ r3
  4. T ∝ r4

Answer: 3. T2 ∝ r3

Question 88. The escape velocity of a sphere of mass m from Earth having mass M and radius R is given by –

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{R}}\)
  2. \(2 \sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M m}{R}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{R}}\)

Question 89. The escape velocity from the earth is about 11 km/second. The escape velocity from a planet having twice the radius and the same mean density as the Earth is –

  1. 22km/sec
  2. 11 km/sec
  3. 5.5 km/sec
  4. 15.5 km/sec

Answer: 1. 22km/sec

Question 90. A satellite which is geostationary in a particular orbit is taken to another orbit. Its distance from the centre of the earth in the new orbit is 2 times that of the earlier orbit. The time period in the second orbit is –

  1. 4.8 hours
  2. \(48 \sqrt{2}\) hours
  3. 24 hrs
  4. Infinite

Answer: 2. \(48 \sqrt{2}\) hours

Question 91. Two satellites A and B go around planet P in circular orbits having radial 4R and R respectively. If the speed of the satellite A is 3V, the speed of the satellite B will be

  1. 12 V
  2. 6 V
  3. 4/3 V
  4. 3/2 V

Answer: 2. 6 V

Question 92. The escape velocity for a rocket from earth is 11.2 km/sec. Its value on a planet where the acceleration due to gravity is double that on the earth and the diameter of the planet is twice that of the earth will be in km/sec-

  1. 11.2
  2. 5.6
  3. 22.4
  4. 53.6

Answer: 3. 22.4

Question 93. A satellite revolves around the earth in an elliptical orbit. Its speed

  1. Is the same at all points in the orbit
  2. Is greatest when it is closest to the earth
  3. Is greatest when it is farthest from the earth
  4. Goes on increasing or decreasing continuously depending upon the mass of the satellite

Answer: 2. Is greatest when it is closest to the earth

Question 94. Time period of revolution of a satellite around a planet of radius R is T. The Period of revolution around another planet, whose radius is 3R but has the same density is –

  1. \(\frac{T}{3 \sqrt{3}}\)
  2. 3T
  3. 9T
  4. \(3 \sqrt{3} T\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{T}{3 \sqrt{3}}\)

Question 95. If Veand V0 represent the escape velocity and orbital velocity of a satellite corresponding to a circular orbit of radius R, then –

  1. \(V_e=V_0\)
  2. \(\sqrt{2} V_0=V_e\)
  3. \(V_e=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} V_o\)
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. \(\sqrt{2} V_0=V_e\)

Question 96. A spherical planet far out in space has a mass of M0 and a diameter D0. A particle will experience acceleration due to gravity which is equal to

  1. GM0/D02
  2. 2mGM0/D02
  3. 4GM0/D02
  4. GmM0/D02

Answer: 3.4GM0/D02

Question 97. A satellite can be in a geostationary orbit around a planet at a distance r from the centre of the planet. If the angular velocity of the planet about its axis doubles, a satellite can now be in a geostationary orbit around the planet if its distance from the centre of the planet is

  1. \(\frac{r}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{r}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)
  3. \(\frac{r}{(4)^{1 / 3}}\)
  4. \(\frac{r}{(2)^{1 / 3}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{r}{(4)^{1 / 3}}\)

Question 98. Consider a satellite going around the earth in an orbit. Which of the following statements is wrong –

  1. It is a freely falling body
  2. It suffers no acceleration
  3. It is moving at a constant speed
  4. Its angular momentum remains constant

Answer: 2. It suffers no acceleration

Question 99. The period of a satellite in a circular orbit around a planet is independent of –

  1. The mass of the planet
  2. The radius of the planet
  3. The mass of the satellite
  4. All the three parameters (1), (2) and (3)

Answer: 3. The mass of the satellite

Question 100. A small satellite is revolving near the earth’s surface. Its orbital velocity will be nearly.

  1. 8 km/sec
  2. 11.2 km/sec
  3. 4 km/sec
  4. 6 km/sec

Answer: 1. 8 km/sec

Question 101. A satellite revolves around the earth in an elliptical orbit. Its speed.

  1. Is the same at all points in the orbit
  2. Is greatest when it is closest to the earth
  3. Is greatest when it is farthest from the earth
  4. Goes on increasing or decreasing continuously depending upon the mass of the satellite

Answer: 2. Is greatest when it is closest to the earth

Question 102. If the height of a satellite from the earth is negligible in comparison to the radius of the earth R, the orbital velocity of the satellite is –

  1. gR
  2. gR/2
  3. \(\sqrt{g / R}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{g R}\)

Answer: 4. \(\sqrt{g R}\)

Question 103. Orbital velocity of an artificial satellite does not depend upon –

  1. Mass of the earth
  2. Mass of the satellite
  3. Radius of the earth
  4. Acceleration due to gravity

Answer: 2. Mass of the satellite

Question 104. The time period of a geostationary satellite is –

  1. 24 hours
  2. 12 hours
  3. 365 days
  4. One month

Answer: 1. 24 hours

Question 105. Which one of the following statements regarding artificial satellites of the earth is incorrect –

  1. The orbital velocity depends on the mass of the satellite
  2. A minimum velocity of 8 km/sec is required by a satellite to orbit quite close to the earth
  3. The period of revolution is large if the radius of its orbit is large
  4. The height of a geostationary satellite is about 36000 km from earth

Answer: 1. The orbital velocity depends on the mass of the satellite

Question 106. Two identical satellites are at R and 7R away from the earth’s surface, the wrong statement is (R = Radius of the earth)

  1. The ratio of total energy will be 4
  2. The ratio of kinetic energies will be 4
  3. The ratio of potential energies will be 4
  4. The ratio of total energy will be 4 but the ratio of potential and kinetic energies will be 2

Answer: 4. Ratio of total energy will be 4 but the ratio of potential and kinetic energies will be 2

Question 107. For a satellite escape velocity is 11 km/s. If the satellite is launched at an angle of 60º with the vertical, then the escape velocity will be –

  1. 11 km/s
  2. \(11 \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~km} / \mathrm{s}\)
  3. \(\frac{11}{\sqrt{3}} \mathrm{~km} / \mathrm{s}\)
  4. 33 km/s

Answer: 1. 11 km/s

Question 108. The distance of a geo-stationary satellite from the centre of the earth (Radius R = 6400 km) is nearest to –

  1. 5 R
  2. 7 R
  3. 10 R
  4. 18 R

Answer: 2. 7 R

Question 109. Periodic time of a satellite revolving above Earth’s surface at a height equal to R, radius of Earth, is [g is acceleration due to gravity at Earth’s surface]

  1. \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{2 R}{g}}\)
  2. \(4 \sqrt{2} \pi \sqrt{\frac{R}{g}}\)
  3. \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{R}{g}}\)
  4. \(8 \pi \sqrt{\frac{R}{g}}\)

Answer: 2. \(4 \sqrt{2} \pi \sqrt{\frac{R}{g}}\)

Question 110. Given the radius of Earth ‘R’ and length of a day ‘T’ the height of a geostationary satellite is [G-Gravitational constant. M-Mass of Earth]

  1. +R
  2. – R
  3. – R
  4. None

Answer: 3. – R

Question 111. The distance of a geostationary satellite from the surface of the earth radius (Re= 6400 km) in terms of Re is –

  1. 13.76 Re
  2. 10.76 Re
  3. 5.56 Re
  4. 2.56 Re

Answer: 3. 5.56 Re

Question 112. The orbital velocity of a planet revolving close to the earth’s surface is –

  1. \(\sqrt{2 g R}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{g R}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 g}{R}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{g}{R}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\sqrt{g R}\)

Question 113. A satellite moves around the earth in a circular orbit of radius r with speed v. If the mass of the satellite is M, its total energy is –

  1. \(-\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Mv}^2\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{2} M v^2\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{2} M v^2\)
  4. Mv2

Answer: 1. \(-\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Mv}^2\)

Question 114. If a satellite is shifted towards the earth. The time period of the satellite will be –

  1. Increase
  2. Decrease
  3. Unchanged
  4. Nothing can be said

Answer: 2. Decrease

Question 115. Two satellites A and B go around a planet in circular orbits having radii 4R and R, respectively. If the speed of satellite A is 3v, then the speed of satellite B is –

  1. \(\frac{3 v}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{4 v}{2}\)
  3. 6v
  4. 12v

Answer: 3. 6v

Question 116. If gravity field due to a point mass follows \(\mathrm{g} \propto \frac{1}{r^3}\) instead of \(\frac{1}{r^2}\), then the relation between time period of a satellite near earth’s surface and radius of its orbit r will be –

  1. T2 ∝ r3
  2. T ∝ r2
  3. T2 ∝ r
  4. T ∝ r

Answer: 2. T ∝ r2

Question 117. A satellite appears to be at rest when seen from the equator. Its height from the earth’s surface is nearly

  1. 35800km
  2. 358000 km
  3. 6400km
  4. Such a satellite cannot exist

Answer: 1. 35800km

Question 118. A body is dropped by a satellite in its geostationary orbit

  1. It will burn on entering the atmosphere
  2. It will remain in the same place with respect to the earth
  3. It will reach the earth in 24 hours
  4. It will perform uncertain motion

Answer: 2. It will remain in the same place with respect to the earth

Question 119. A satellite of Earth can move only in those orbits whose plane coincides with

  1. The plane of a great circle of the earth
  2. The plane passing through the poles of the earth
  3. The plane of a circle at any latitude on earth
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. The plane of a great circle of the earth

Question 120. A satellite launching station should be

  1. Near the equatorial region
  2. Near the polar region
  3. On the polar axis
  4. All locations are equally good

Answer: 1. Near the equatorial region

Question 121. The minimum number of satellites needed to be placed at the surface of the earth for worldwide communication between any two locations is –

  1. 6
  2. 4
  3. 3
  4. 5

Answer: 3. 3

Question 122. A geostationary satellite orbits around the earth in a circular orbit with a radius of 36000 km. Then, the time period of a spy satellite orbiting a few hundred kilometres above the earth’s surface (REarth = 6400 km) will approximately be :

  1. 1/2 hr
  2. 1 hr
  3. 2 hr
  4. 4 hr

Answer: 3. 2 hr

Question 123. A satellite is moving with a constant speed ‘V’ in a circular orbit about the earth. An object of mass ‘m’ is ejected from the satellite such that it just escapes from the gravitational pull of the earth. At the time of its ejection, the kinetic energy of the object is

  1. \(\frac{1}{2} m V^2\)
  2. mV2
  3. \(\frac{3}{2} m V^2\)
  4. 2mV2

Answer: 2. mV2

Question 124. Two satellites of earth, S1 and S2 are moving in the same orbit. The mass of S1 is four times the mass of S2. Which one of the following statements is true:

  1. The time period of S1 is four times that of S2
  2. The potential energies of the earth and satellite in the two cases are equal
  3. S1 and S2 are moving at the same speed
  4. The kinetic energies of the two satellites are equal

Answer: 3. S1 and S2 are moving at the same speed

Question 125. The orbital speed of a satellite revolving near the earth is :

  1. \(\sqrt{2 g R}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{g R}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{g / R}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{2 g / R}\)

Answer: 2. \(\sqrt{g R}\)

Question 126. If the radius of the earth is decreased by 1% and mass remains constant, then the acceleration due to gravity

  1. Decrease by 2%
  2. Decrease by 1%
  3. Increase by 1%
  4. Increase by 2%

Answer: 4. Increase by 2%

Question 127. The escape velocity for a rocket is 11.2 km/s. If it is taken to a planet where the radius and acceleration due to gravity are double that of earth, then the escape velocity will be :

  1. 5.6 m/s
  2. 11.2 m/s
  3. 22.4 km/s
  4. 44.2 m/s

Answer: 3. 22.4 km/s

Question 128. Suppose the radius of the moon’s orbit around the earth is doubled. Its period around the earth will become:

  1. 1/2 times
  2. \(\sqrt{2}\) times
  3. 22/3 times
  4. 23/2 times

Answer: 4. 23/2 times

Question 129. In the case of an orbiting satellite if the radius of the orbit is decreased :

  1. Its Kinetic Energy decreases
  2. Its Potential Energy increase
  3. Its Mechanical Energy decreases
  4. Its speed decreases

Answer: 3. Its Mechanical Energy decreases

Question 130. A satellite of the earth is revolving in a circular orbit with a uniform speed v. If the gravitational force suddenly disappears, the satellite will

  1. Continue to move with velocity v along the original orbit
  2. Move with a velocity v, tangentially to the original orbit
  3. Fall down with increasing velocity
  4. Ultimately come to rest somewhere in the original orbit

Answer: 2. Move with a velocity v, tangentially to the original orbit

Question 131. The time period of a satellite of earth is 5 hours. If the separation between the earth and the satellite is increased to 4 times the previous value, the new time period becomes

  1. 10 hour
  2. 80 hour
  3. 40 hour
  4. 20 hour

Answer: 3. 40 hour

Question 132. The escape velocity for a body projected vertically upwards from the surface of the earth is 11 km/s. If the body is projected at an angle of 45º with the vertical, the escape velocity will be :

  1. \(11 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~km} / \mathrm{s}\)
  2. 22 km/s
  3. 11 km/s
  4. \(11 / \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\) m/s

Answer: 3. 11 km/s

Question 133. A satellite of mass m revolves around the earth of radius R at a height x from its surface. If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth, the orbital speed of the satellite is :

  1. gx
  2. \(\frac{g R}{R-x}\)
  3. \(\frac{g R^2}{R+x}\)
  4. \(\left(\frac{g R^2}{R+x}\right)^{1 / 2}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{g R}{R-x}\)

Question 134. The time period of an earth satellite in a circular orbit is independent of :

  1. The mass of the satellite
  2. The radius of its orbit
  3. Both the mass and radius of the orbit
  4. Neither the mass of the satellite nor the radius of its orbit

Answer: 1. The mass of the satellite

Question 135. If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth’s surface, the gain in the potential energy of an object of mass m raised from the surface of the earth to a height equal to the radius R of the earth, is :

  1. 2mgR
  2. \(\frac{1}{2} m g R\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{4} m g R\)
  4. mgR

Answer: 2. \(\frac{1}{2} m g R\)

Question 136. The change in the value of ‘g’ at a height ‘h’ above the surface of the earth is the same as at a depth ‘d’ below the surface of the earth. When both ‘d’ and ‘h’ are much smaller than the radius of the earth, then, which one of the following is correct?

  1. \(\mathrm{d}=\frac{h}{2}\)
  2. \(\mathrm{d}=\frac{3 h}{2}\)
  3. d = 2h
  4. d = h

Answer: 3. d = 2h

Question 137. A particle of mass 10 kg is kept on the surface of a uniform sphere of mass 100 kg and radius 10 cm. Find the work to be done against the gravitational force between them, to take the particle far away from the sphere (you may take G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2);

  1. 13.34 × 10-10 J
  2. 3.33 × 10-10 J
  3. 6.67 × 10-9 J
  4. 6.67 × 10-7 J

Answer: 4. 6.67 × 10-7 J

Question 138. If gE and gm are the accelerations due to gravity on the surfaces of the earth and the moon respectively and if Millikan’s oil drop experiment could be performed on the two surfaces, one will find the ratio

  1. 1
  2. 0
  3. gE/gM
  4. gM/gE

Answer: 1. 1

Question 139. A planet in a distant solar system is 10 times more massive than the earth and its radius is 10 times smaller. Given that the escape velocity from the earth is 11 km s-1, the escape velocity from the surface of the planet would be

  1. 11 km s-1
  2. 110 km s-1
  3. 0.11 km s-1
  4. 1.1 km s-1

Answer: 2. 110 km s-1

Question 140. The distance of neptune and saturn from the sun is nearly 1013 and 1012 meters respectively. Assuming that they move in circular orbits, their periodic times will be in the ratio –

  1. \(\sqrt{10}\)
  2. 100
  3. 10
  4. 1/10

Answer: 3. 10

Question 141. The period of a satellite in a circular orbit of eradius R is T, and the period of another satellite in a circular orbit of radius 4R is.

  1. 4T
  2. T/4
  3. 8T
  4. T/8

Answer: 3. 8T

Question 142. Two planets move around the sun. The periodic times and the mean radii of the orbits are T1, T2 and r1, r2 respectively. The ratio T1/ T2 is equal to –

  1. (r1/ r2)1/2
  2. r1/ r2
  3. (r1/ r2)2
  4. (r1/ r2)3/2

Answer: 4. (r1/ r2)3/2

Question 143. The rotation period of an earth satellite close to the surface of the earth is 83 minutes. The time period of another earth satellite in an orbit at a distance of three earth radii from its surface will be –

  1. 83 minute
  2. 83 × \(\sqrt{8}\) minutes
  3. 664 minutes
  4. 249 minutes

Answer: 3. 664 minutes

Question 144. A satellite of mass m is circulating around the earth with constant angular velocity. If the radius of the orbit is R0 and the mass of the earth is M, the angular momentum about the centre of the earth is –

  1. \(\mathrm{m} \sqrt{G M R_0}\)
  2. \(\mathrm{M} \sqrt{G M R_0}\)
  3. \(\mathrm{m} \sqrt{\frac{G M}{R_0}}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{M} \sqrt{\frac{G M}{R_0}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\mathrm{m} \sqrt{G M R_0}\)

Question 145. A planet revolves around the sun whose mean distance is 1.588 times the mean distance between the earth and the sun. The revolution time of the planet will be –

  1. 1.25 years
  2. 1.59 years
  3. 0.89 years
  4. 2 years

Answer: 4. 2 years

Question 146. If the mass of a satellite is doubled and the time period remains constant the ratio of orbit in the two cases will be –

  1. 1: 2
  2. 1: 1
  3. 1 : 3
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. 1:1

Question 147. The earth revolves around the sun in one year. If the distance between them becomes double, the new period of revolution will be –

  1. 1/2 years
  2. \(2 \sqrt{2}\) years
  3. 4 years
  4. 8 years

Answer: 2. \(2 \sqrt{2}\) years

Question 148. A body revolved around the sun 27 times faster than the earth what is the ratio of their radii

  1. 1/3
  2. 1/9
  3. 1/27
  4. 1/4

Answer: 2. 1/9

Question 149. The orbital angular momentum of a satellite revolving at a distance r from the centre is L. If the distance is increased to 16r, then the new angular momentum will be –

  1. 16 L
  2. 64 L
  3. \(\frac{L}{4}\)
  4. 4 L

Answer: 4. 4 L

Question 150. The ratio of the distance of two planets from the sun is 1.38. The ratio of their period of revolution around the sun is –

  1. 1.38
  2. 1.383/2
  3. 1.381/2
  4. 1.383

Answer: 2. 1.383/2

Question 151. Kepler’s second law (law of areas) is nothing but a statement of –

  1. Work energy theorem
  2. Conservation of linear momentum
  3. Conservation of angular momentum
  4. Conservation of energy

Answer: 3. Conservation of angular momentum

Question 152. In an elliptical orbit under gravitational force, in general.

  1. Tangential velocity is constant
  2. Angular velocity is constant
  3. Radial velocity is constant
  4. Areal velocity is constant

Answer: 4. Areal velocity is constant

Question 153. What does not change in the field of central force?

  1. Potential energy
  2. Kinetic energy
  3. Linear momentum
  4. Angular momentum

Answer: 4. Angular momentum

Question 154. A planet is moving in an elliptic orbit. If T, V, E, L stand respectively for their kinetic energy, gravitational potential energy, total energy and magnitude of angular momentum about the centre of force, which of the following statements is correct

  1. T is conserved
  2. V is always positive
  3. E is always negative
  4. L is conserved but the direction of the vector changes continuously

Answer: 3. E is always negative

Question 155. Three identical stars of mass M are located at the vertices of an equilateral triangle with side L. The speed at which they will move if they all revolve under the influence of one another’s gravitational force in a circular orbit circumscribing the triangle while still preserving the equilateral triangle :

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{L}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{L}}\)
  3. \(2 \sqrt{\frac{G M}{L}}\)
  4. Not possible at all

Answer: 2. \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{L}}\)

Question 156. Periodic-time of a satellite revolving very near to the surface of the earth is – (ρ is the density of the earth)

  1. Proportional to \(\frac{1}{\rho}\)
  2. Proportional to \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\rho}}\)
  3. Proportional ρ
  4. Does not depend on ρ.

Answer: 2. Proportional to \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\rho}}\)

Question 157. A satellite is moving around the earth. In order to make it move to infinity, its velocity must be increased by

  1. 20%
  2. It is impossible to do so
  3. 82.8%
  4. 41.4%

Answer: 4. 41.4%

Question 158. If the radius of the earth is to decrease by 4% and its density remains the same, then its escape velocity will

  1. Remain same
  2. Increase by 4%
  3. Decrease by 4%
  4. Increase by 2%

Answer: 3. Decrease by 4%

Question 159. An earth satellite is moved from one stable circular orbit to another higher stable circular orbit. Which one of the following quantities increases for the satellite as a result of this change

  1. Gravitational force
  2. Gravitational potential energy
  3. Centripetal acceleration
  4. Linear orbital speed

Answer: 2. Gravitational potential energy

Question 160. The relay satellite transmits the television programme continuously from one part of the world to another because its

  1. A period is greater than the period of rotation of the earth
  2. Period is less than the period of rotation of the earth about its axis
  3. Period has no relation with the period of the earth about its axis
  4. Period is equal to the period of rotation of the earth about its axis

Answer: 4. Period is equal to the period of rotation of the earth about its axis

Question 161. If the universal constant of gravitation were decreasing uniformly with time, then a satellite in orbit would still maintain its

  1. Radius
  2. Tangential speed
  3. Angular momentum
  4. Period of revolution

Answer: 3. Angular momentum

Question 162. A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit around the earth. The mass of the satellite is very small compared to the mass of the earth :

  1. The acceleration of S is always directed towards the centre of the earth
  2. The angular momentum of S about the centre of the earth changes in direction, but its magnitude remains constant
  3. The total mechanical energy of S varies periodically with time
  4. The linear momentum of S remains constant in magnitude.

Answer: 1. The acceleration of S is always directed towards the centre of the earth

Question 163. The moon revolves around the Earth 13 times in one year. If the ratio of sun-earth distance to earth-moon distance is 392, then the ratio of masses of sun and earth will be

  1. 3.56 × 105
  2. 3.56 × 106
  3. 3.56 × 107
  4. 3.56 × 108

Answer: 1. 3.56 × 105

Question 164. The earth revolves around the sun in an elliptical orbit. If \(\frac{O A}{O B}\)= x, the ratio of speeds of earth at B and A will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Earth Is Revolving Round The Sun In An Elliptical Orbit

  1. x
  2. \(\sqrt{x}\)
  3. x2
  4. \(x \sqrt{x}\)

Answer: 1. x

Question 165. The time period of a satellite of earth is 5 h. If the separation between the earth and the satellite is increased to 4 times the previous value, the new time period will become

  1. 10 h
  2. 80 h
  3. 40 h
  4. 20 h

Answer: 3. 40 h

Question 166. If two spheres of the same masses and radius are brought in contact, then the force of attraction between them will be proportional to (for a given density ρ) :

  1. r2
  2. r3
  3. r6
  4. r4

Answer: 4. r4

Question 167. Assume the earth to be a sphere of radius R. If g is the acceleration due to gravity at any point on the earth’s surface, the mass of the earth is :

  1. \(\frac{g R}{G}\)
  2. \(\frac{g^2 R^2}{G}\)
  3. \(\frac{g R^2}{G}\)
  4. \(\frac{g^2 R}{G}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{g R^2}{G}\)

Question 168. Energy required to transfer a 400 kg satellite in a circular orbit of radius 2 R to a circular orbit of radius 4 R, where R is the radius of the earth. [Given g = 9.8 ms-2, R = 6.4 × 106 m]

  1. 1.65 × 109 J
  2. 3.13 × 109 J
  3. 6.26 × 109 H
  4. 4.80 × 109 J

Answer: 2. 3.13 × 109 J

Question 169. Suppose the gravitational force varies inversely as the 4th power of the distance. If a satellite describes a circular orbit of radius R under the influence of this force, then the time period T of the orbit is proportional to

  1. R3/2
  2. R5/2
  3. R2
  4. R7/2

Answer: 2. R5/2

Question 170. A double star system consists of two stars A and B which have time periods TA and TB. Radius RA and RB and mass MA and MB. Choose the correct option.

  1. If TA> TB then RA> RB
  2. If TA> TB then MA> MB
  3. \(\left(\frac{T_A}{T_B}\right)^2=\left(\frac{R_A}{R_B}\right)^3\)
  4. TA = TB

Answer: 4. TA = TB

Question 171. Mass M is uniformly distributed only on the curved surface of a thin hemispherical shell. A, B and C are three points on the circular base of a hemisphere, such that A is the centre. Let the gravitational potential at points A, B and C be VA, VB, VC respectively. Then

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Mass M Is Uniformly Distributed Only On Curved Surface Of A Thin Hemispherical Shell

  1. VA> VB>VC
  2. VC> VB>VA
  3. VB>VA and VB> VC
  4. VA= VB=VC

Answer: 4. VA= VB=VC

Question 172. The figure shows the elliptical orbit of a planet m about the sun S. The shaded area SCD is twice the shaded area SAB. If t1is the time for the planet to move from C to D and t2 is the time to move from A to B, then:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Elliptical Orbit Of A Planet M About The Sun S

  1. t1> t2
  2. t1= 4t2
  3. t1= 2t2
  4. t1= t2

Answer: 3. t1= 2t2

Question 173. A particle of mass M is situated at the centre of a spherical shell of the same mass and radius a. The gravitational potential at a point situated at \(\frac{a}{2}\) distance from the centre, will be

  1. \(-\frac{3 G M}{a}\)
  2. \(-\frac{2 G M}{a}\)
  3. \(-\frac{G M}{a}\)
  4. \(-\frac{4 G M}{a}\)

Answer: 1. \(-\frac{3 G M}{a}\)

Question 174. The additional kinetic energy to be provided to a satellite of mass m revolving around a planet of mass M, to transfer it from a circular orbit of radius R1 to another of radius R2(R2> R1) is

  1. \(G m M\left(\frac{1}{R_1^2}-\frac{1}{R_2^2}\right)\)
  2. \({GmM}\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)\)
  3. \(-\frac{G M}{a}\)
  4. \(-\frac{4 G M}{a}\)

Answer: 4. \(-\frac{4 G M}{a}\)

Question 175. The radii of circular orbits of two satellites A and B of the earth, are 4R and R, respectively. If the speed of satellite A is 3V, then the speed of satellite B will be

  1. \(\frac{3 V}{4}\)
  2. 6V
  3. 12 V
  4. \(\frac{3 V}{2}\)

Answer: 2. 6V

Question 176. The dependence of acceleration due to gravity g on the distance r from the centre of the earth, assumed to be a sphere of radius R of uniform density is as shown in the figures below. The correct figure is.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Dependence Of Acceleration Due To Gravity G On The Distance R From The Centre Of The Earth

Answer: 4

Question 177. A planet moving along an elliptical orbit is closest to the sun at a distance r1 and farthest away at a distance of r2. If v1 and v2 are the linear velocities at these points respectively, then the ratio \(\frac{v_1}{v_2}\) is:

  1. (r1/r2)2
  2. r2/r1
  3. (r2/r1)2
  4. r1/r2

Answer: 2. r2/r1

Question 178. A body projected vertically from the Earth reaches a height equal to the earth’s radius before returning to the earth. The power exerted by the gravitational force is greatest :

  1. At the highest position of the body
  2. At the instant just before the body hits the earth
  3. It remains constant all through
  4. At the instant just after the body is projected

Answer: 2. At the instant just before the body hits the earth

Question 179. A particle of mass m is thrown upwards from the surface of the earth, with a velocity u. The mass and the radius of the earth are, respectively, M and R. G is gravitational constant and g is acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth. The minimum value of u so that the particle does not return back to earth, is :

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{R}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{R^2}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{2 g R^2}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{R^2}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{R}}\)

Question 180. A particle of mass M is situated at the centre of a spherical shell of mass and radius a. The magnitude of the gravitational potential at a point situated at a/2 distance from the centre will be:

  1. \(\frac{2 G M}{a}\)
  2. \(\frac{3 G M}{a}\)
  3. \(\frac{4 G M}{a}\)
  4. \(\frac{G M}{a}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{3 G M}{a}\)

Question 181. Which one of the following plots represents the variation of gravitational field on a particle with distance r due to a thin spherical shell of radius R ? (r is measured from the centre of the spherical shell)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Plots Represents The Variation Of Gravitational Field

Answer: 2

Question 182. The height at which the weight of a body becomes 1/16th, its weight on the surface of the earth (radius R), is :

  1. 5R
  2. 15R
  3. 3R
  4. 4R

Answer: 3. 3R

Question 183. A spherical planet has a mass MP and diameter DP. A particle of mass m falling freely near the surface of this planet will experience an acceleration due to gravity, equal to :

  1. 4GMP/DP2
  2. GMPm/DP2
  3. GMP/DP2
  4. 4GMPm/DP2

Answer: 1. 4GMP/DP2

Question 184. A geostationary satellite is orbiting the earth at a height of 5R above the surface of the earth, R is the radius of the earth. The time period of another satellite in hours at a height of 2R from the surface of the earth is :

  1. 5
  2. 10
  3. \(6 \sqrt{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{6}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Answer: 3. \(6 \sqrt{2}\)

Question 185. A body of mass ‘m’ is taken from the earth’s surface to a height equal to twice the radius (R) of the earth. The change in potential energy of the body will be:

  1. \(\frac{2}{3} m g R\)
  2. 3mgR
  3. \(\frac{1}{3} m g R\)
  4. mg2R

Answer: 1. \(\frac{2}{3} m g R\)

Question 186. Infinite number of bodies, each of mass 2 kg are situated on the x-axis at distances 1m, 2m, 4m, 8m, …….. respectively, from the origin. The resulting gravitational potential due to this system at the origin will be :

  1. \(-\frac{8}{3} G\)
  2. \(-\frac{4}{3} G\)
  3. –4G
  4. – G

Answer: 3. –4G

Question 187. A block hole is an object whose gravitational field is so strong that even light cannot escape from it. To what approximate radius would earth (mass = 5.98×1024 kg) have to be compressed to be a black hole?

  1. 10-9 m
  2. 10-6 m
  3. 10-2 m
  4. 100 m

Answer: 3. 10-2 m

Question 188. Dependence of intensity of gravitational field (E) of the earth with distance (r) from the centre of the earth is correctly represented by:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Gravitational Field

Answer: 1

Question 189. Kepler’s third law states that the square of the period of revolution (T) of a planet around the sun, is proportional to the third power of average distance r between the sun and planet i.e. T2 = Kr3 here K is constant. If the masses of the sun and planet are M and m respectively then as per Newton’s law of gravitation force of attraction between them is \(\mathrm{F}=\frac{G M m}{r^2}\) r, here G is gravitational constant. The relation between G and K is described as:

  1. GMK = 4π2
  2. K = G
  3. \(\mathrm{K}=\frac{1}{G}\)
  4. GK = 4π2

Answer: 1. GMK = 4π2

Question 190. A remote-sensing satellite of the earth revolves in a circular orbit at a height of 0.25 × 106 m above the surface of the earth. If the earth’s radius is 6.38 × 106 m and g = 9.8 ms-2, then the orbital speed of the satellite is :

  1. 8.56 km s-1
  2. 9.13 km s-1
  3. 6.67 km s-1
  4. 7.76 km s-1

Answer: 4. 7.76 km s-1

Question 191. At what height from the surface of the earth are the gravitational potential and the value of g –5.4 × 107 J kg-2 and 6.0 ms-2 respectively? Take the radius of the earth as 6400 km.

  1. 2000 km
  2. 2600 km
  3. 1600 km
  4. 1400 km

Answer: 2. 2600 km

Question 192. A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit around the earth. The mass of the satellite is very small compared to the mass of the earth. Then,

  1. The total mechanical energy of S varies periodically with time.
  2. The linear momentum of S remains constant in magnitude.
  3. The acceleration of S is always directed towards the centre of the earth.
  4. The angular momentum of S about the centre of the earth changes in direction, but its magnitude remains constant.

Answer: 3. The acceleration of S is always directed towards the centre of the earth.

Question 193. The ratio of escape velocity at earth (ve) to the escape velocity at a planet (vp) whose radius and mean density are twice that of earth is:

  1. \(1: \sqrt{2}\)
  2. 1: 2
  3. \(1: 2 \sqrt{2}\)
  4. 1: 4

Answer: 3. \(1: 2 \sqrt{2}\)

Question 194. Starting from the centre of the earth having radius r, the variation of g (acceleration due to gravity) is shown by

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Centre Of The Earth Having Radius R The Variation Of G Acceleration Due To Gravity

Answer: 3

Question 195. A satellite of mass m is orbiting the earth (of radius R) at a height h from its surface. The total energy of the satellite in terms of g0, the value of acceleration due to gravity at the earth’s surface, is

  1. \(-\frac{2 m g_0 R^2}{R+h}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}_0 \mathrm{R}^2}{2(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
  3. \(-\frac{m g_0 R^2}{2(R+h)}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{Rmg}_0 \mathrm{R}^2}{\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h}}\)

Answer: 3. \(-\frac{m g_0 R^2}{2(R+h)}\)

Question 196. A physical quantity of the dimensions of length that can be formed out of c, G and \(\frac{e^2}{4 \pi \epsilon_0}\) is the velocity of light, G is a universal constant of gravitation and e is charge] :

  1. \(\frac{1}{c^2}\left[G \frac{e^2}{4 \pi \epsilon_0}\right]^{1 / 2}\)
  2. \(c^2\left[G \frac{e^2}{4 \pi \epsilon_0}\right]^{1 / 2}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{c^2}\left[\frac{e^2}{G 4 \pi \epsilon_0}\right]^{1 / 2}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{c} G \frac{e^2}{4 \pi \epsilon_0}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{1}{c^2}\left[G \frac{e^2}{4 \pi \epsilon_0}\right]^{1 / 2}\)

Question 197. Suppose the charge of a proton and an electron differ slightly. One of them is – e, and the other is (e + Δe). If the net of electrostatic force and the gravitational force between two hydrogen atoms placed at a distance d (much greater than atomic size) apart is zero, then Δe is of the order of [Given the mass of hydrogen mh = 1.67 × 10-27 kg]

  1. 10-20 C
  2. 10-23 C
  3. 10-37 C
  4. 10-47 C

Answer: 3. 10-37 C

Question 198. Two astronauts are floating in gravitational-free space after having lost contact with their spaceship. The two will :

  1. Keep floating at the same distance between them
  2. Move towards each other
  3. Move away from each other
  4. Will become stationary

Answer: 2. Move towards each other

Question 199. The kinetic energies of a planet in an elliptical orbit about the Sun, at positions A, B and C are KA, KB and KC, respectively. AC is the major axis and SB is perpendicular to AB at the position of the Sun S as shown in the figure. Then

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation The Kinetic Energies Of A Planet In An Elliptical Orbit

  1. KA < KB < KC
  2. KB > KA > KC
  3. KB < KA < KC
  4. KA > KB > KC

Answer: 4. KA > KB > KC

Question 200. If the mass of the Sun were ten times smaller and the universal gravitational constant were ten times larger in magnitude, which of the following is not correct?

  1. Raindrops will fall faster.
  2. ‘g’ on the Earth will not change
  3. Time period of a simple pendulum on the Earth would decrease.
  4. Walking on the ground would become more difficult.

Answer: 2. ‘g’ on the Earth will not change

Question 201. The work done to raise a mass m from the surface of the earth to a height h, which is equal to the radius of the earth, is :

  1. \(\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{mgR}\)
  2. mgR
  3. 2 mgR
  4. \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mgR}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mgR}\)

Question 202. The time period of a geostationary satellite is 24 h, at a height of 6RE (RE is the radius of the earth) from the surface of the earth. The time period of another satellite whose height is 2.5 RE from the surface will be :

  1. \(6 \sqrt{2} h\)
  2. \(12 \sqrt{2} h\)
  3. \(\frac{24}{2.5} h\)
  4. \(\frac{12}{2.5} h\)

Answer: 1. \(6 \sqrt{2} h\)

Question 203. Assuming that the gravitational potential energy of an object at infinity is zero, the change in potential energy (final – initial) of an object of mass m, when taken to a height h from the surface of the earth (of radius R), is given by :

  1. \(-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h}}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{GMmh}}{\mathrm{R}(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
  3. mgh
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mathrm{GMmh}}{\mathrm{R}(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)

Question 204. A body weight of 72N on the surface of the earth. What is the gravitational force on it at a height equal to half the radius of the earth?

  1. 24N
  2. 48 N
  3. 32 N
  4. 30 N

Answer: 3. 32 N

Question 205. The escape velocity from the Earth’s surface is υ. The escape velocity from the surface of another planet having a radius, four times that of Earth and the same mass density is:

  1. υ

Answer: 3. 4υ

Question 206. A particle of mass ‘m’ is projected with a velocity u = kVe (k < 1) from the surface of the earth. (Ve = escape velocity) The maximum height above the surface reached by the particle is

  1. \(\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{\mathrm{k}}{1+\mathrm{k}}\right)^2\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{R}^2 \mathrm{k}}{1+\mathrm{k}}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{Rk}^2}{1-\mathrm{k}^2}\)
  4. \(R\left(\frac{k}{1-k}\right)^2\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mathrm{Rk}^2}{1-\mathrm{k}^2}\)

Question 207. The height at which the acceleration due to gravity becomes \(\) (where g = the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth) in terms of R, the radius of the earth, is

  1. \(\frac{R}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  2. \(\frac{R}{2}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{2} R\)
  4. 2R

Answer: 4. 2R

Question 208. Two bodies of masses m and 4 m are placed at a distance r. The gravitational potential at a point on the line joining them where the gravitational field is zero is:

  1. Zero
  2. \(-\frac{4 G m}{r}\)
  3. \(-\frac{6 G m}{r}\)
  4. \(-\frac{9 G m}{r}\)

Answer: 4. \(-\frac{9 G m}{r}\)

Question 209. Two particles of equal mass ‘m’ go around a circle of radius R under the action of their mutual gravitational attraction. The speed of each particle with respect to its centre of mass is:

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{G m}{4 R}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{G m}{3 R}}\)
  3. \(\frac{G m M}{2 R}\)
  4. \(\frac{G m M}{3 R}\)

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{\frac{G m}{4 R}}\)

Question 210. What is the minimum energy required to launch a satellite of mass m from the surface of a planet of mass M and radius R in a circular orbit at an altitude of 2R?

  1. \(\frac{5 G m M}{6 R}\)
  2. \(\frac{2 G m M}{3 R}\)
  3. \(\frac{G m M}{2 R}\)
  4. \(\frac{G m M}{3 R}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{5 G m M}{6 R}\)

Question 211. Four particles, each of mass M and equidistant from each other move along a circle of radius R under the action of their mutual gravitational attraction. the speed of each particle is:

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{2 \sqrt{2} \frac{G M}{R}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}(1+2 \sqrt{2})}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{2} \sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}(1+2 \sqrt{2})}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{1}{2} \sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}(1+2 \sqrt{2})}\)

Question 212. From a solid sphere of mass M and radius R, a spherical portion of radius R/2 is removed, as shown in the figure. Taking gravitational potential V = 0 at r = ∞, the potential at the centre of the cavity thus formed is :(G = gravitational constant)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 7 Gravitation Gravitational Constant

  1. \(\frac{-G M}{2 R}\)
  2. \(\frac{-G M}{R}\)
  3. \(\frac{-2 G M}{3 R}\)
  4. \(\frac{-2 G M}{R}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{-G M}{R}\)

Question 213. If the angular momentum of a planet of mass m, moving around the sun in a circular orbit is L, about the centre of the Sun, its areal velocity is:

  1. \(\frac{2 L}{m}\)
  2. \(\frac{4 \mathrm{~L}}{\mathrm{~m}}\)
  3. \(\frac{L}{2 m}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{m}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{L}{2 m}\)

Question 214. The energy required to take a satellite to a height ‘h’ above Earth’s surface (radius or Earth = 6.4 × 103 km) is E1 and the kinetic energy required for the satellite to be in a circular orbit at this height is E2. The value of h for which E1 and E2 are equal is :

  1. 1.28 × 104 km
  2. 6.4 × 103 km
  3. 3.2 × 103 km
  4. 1.6 × 103 km

Answer: 3. 3.2 × 103 km

Question 215. A satellite is moving with a constant speed v in a circular orbit around the earth. An object of mass ‘m’ is ejected from the satellite such that it just escapes from the gravitational pull of the earth. At the time of ejection, the kinetic energy of the object is :

  1. \(\frac{3}{2} m v^2\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\)
  3. 2mv2
  4. mv2

Answer: 4. mv2

Question 216. Two stars of masses 3 × 1031 kg each, and at distance 2 × 1011 m rotate in a plane about their common centre of mass O. A meteorite passes through O moving perpendicular to the star’s rotation plane. In order to escape from the gravitational field of this double star, the minimum speed that a meteorite should have at O is (Take Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2 kg-2) What is the order of energy of the gas due to its thermal motion?

  1. 3.8 × 104 m/s
  2. 1.4 × 105 m/s
  3. 2.8 × 105 m/s
  4. 2.4 × 104 m/s

Answer: 3. 2.8 × 105 m/s

Question 217. A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit at a height h from the earth’s surface, such that h<<R where R is the radius of the earth. Assuming that the effect of the earth’s atmosphere can be neglected. The minimum increase in the speed required so that the satellite could escape from the gravitational field of the earth is :

  1. \(\sqrt{g R}(\sqrt{2}-1)\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{g R}{2}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{gR}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{g R}\)

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{g R}(\sqrt{2}-1)\)

Question 218. The mass and the diameter of a planet are three times the respective values for the Earth. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum on the Earth is 2 s. The period of oscillation of the same pendulum on the planet would be: 

  1. \(\frac{3}{2} s\)
  2. \(\frac{2}{\sqrt{3}} \mathrm{~s}\)
  3. \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2} s\)
  4. \(2 \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~s}\)

Answer: 4. \(2 \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~s}\)

Question 219. A straight rod of length L extends from x = a to x = L + a. The gravitational force it exerts on a point mass ‘m’ at x = 0, if the mass per unit length of the rod is A + Bx2, is given by

  1. \(G m\left[A\left(\frac{1}{a+L}-\frac{1}{a}\right)-B L\right]\)
  2. \({Gm}\left[A\left(\frac{1}{a+L}-\frac{1}{a}\right)+B L\right]\)
  3. \({Gm}\left[A\left(\frac{1}{a}-\frac{1}{a+L}\right)+B L\right]\)
  4. \(G m\left[A\left(\frac{1}{a}-\frac{1}{a+L}\right)-B L\right]\)

Answer: 3. \({Gm}\left[A\left(\frac{1}{a}-\frac{1}{a+L}\right)+B L\right]\)

Question 220. A satellite of mass M is in a circular orbit of radius R about the centre of the earth. A meteorite of the same mass, falling towards the earth, collides with the satellite completely inelastically. The speeds of the satellite and the meteorite are the same, just before the collision. the subsequent motion of the combined body will be :

  1. In the same circular orbit of radius R
  2. Such that it escapes to infinity
  3. In an elliptical orbit
  4. In a circular orbit of a different radius

Answer: 3. In an elliptical orbit

Question 221. Two satellites, A and B, have masses of m and 2m respectively. A is in a circular orbit of radius R, and B is in a circular orbit of radius 2R around the earth. The ratio of their kinetic energies, \(\frac{T_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{B}}}\) is:

  1. 1
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{1}{2}}\)
  3. 2
  4. \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer: 1. 1

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 6 Friction Notes

Friction Contact Force

When two bodies are kept in contact, electromagnetic forces act between the charged particles (molecules) at the surfaces of the bodies.

Thus, each body exerts a contact force on the other. The magnitudes of the contact forces acting on the two bodies are equal but their directions are opposite and therefore the contact forces obey Newton’s third law.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Contact Forces

  • The direction of the contact force acting on a particular body is not necessarily perpendicular to the contact surface.
  • We can resolve this contact force into two components, one perpendicular to the contact surface and the other parallel to it.
  • In the figure, the perpendicular component to the contact surface is called the normal contact force or normal force (generally written as N) and the parallel component is called friction (generally written as f). Therefore if R is the contact force then

⇒ \(\mathrm{R}=\sqrt{f^2+N^2}\)

Reasons For Friction

  1. Ιnter-locking of extended parts of one object into the extended parts of the other object.
  2. Bonding between the molecules of the two surfaces or objects in contact.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Reasons For Friction

Friction Force Is Of Two Types.

  1. Kinetic
  2. Static

1. Kinetic Friction Force

Kinetic friction exists between two contact surfaces only when there is relative motion between the two contact surfaces. It stops acting when relative motion between two surfaces ceases.

Direction Of Kinetic Friction On An Object

  • Ιt is opposite to the relative velocity of the object considered with respect to the other object in contact.
  • Note that its direction is not opposite to the force applied it is opposite to the relative motion of the body considered which is in contact with the other surface.

Magnitude Of Kinetic Friction

The magnitude of the kinetic friction is proportional to the normal force acting between the two bodies. We can write

fk= μk N

where N is the normal force. The proportionality constant μk is called the coefficient of kinetic friction and its value depends on the nature of the two surfaces in contact.

Question 1. Find the direction of the kinetic friction force

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Direction Of Kinetic Friction Force

  1. On the block, exerted by the ground.
  2. On the ground, exerted by the block.

Answer:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction On The Block Exerted By The Ground

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Friction Forces On The Block And Ground Respectively

where f1 and f2 are the friction forces on the block and ground respectively.

Question 2. In the above example, the correct relation between the magnitude of f1 and f2 is

  1. f1> f2
  2. f2> f1
  3. f1= f2
  4. It is not possible to decide due to insufficient data.

Answer: By Newton‘s third law the above friction forces are action-reaction pairs, equal but opposite to each other in direction. Hence (3).

Also, note that the direction of kinetic friction has nothing to do with applied force F.

Question 3. All surfaces as shown in the figure are rough. Draw the friction force on A and B

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction All Surfaces Are Rough Draw The Friction Force

Answer:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Kinetic Friction Acts In Such A Way So As To Reduce Relative Motion

Kinetic friction acts in such a way so as to reduce relative motion.

Question 4. Find out the distance travelled by the blocks shown in the figure before it stops.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Distance Travelled By The Blocks

Answer:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Distance Travelled By The Blocks.

N – 10 g = 0

N = 100 N

fk= µkN

fk= 0.5 × 100 = 50 N

fk= ma

50 = 10 a

⇒ a = 5

∴ v2 = u2 + 2as

02 = 102 + 2 (–5) (S)

∴ S = 10 m

Question 5. Find out the distance travelled by the block on the incline before it stops. The initial velocity of the block is 10 m/s and the coefficient of friction between the block and incline is μ = 0.5.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Acceleration Of The Block If The Block Is Initially At Rest

Answer:

N = mg cos37°

∴ mg sin 37° + µN = ma

a = 10 m/s2 down the incline

Now v2 = u2 + 2as

0 = 102 + 2(–10) S

∴ S = 5 m

Question 6. Find the time taken in the above example by the block before it stops.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Time Taken In The Above Example By The Block Before It Stops

Answer:

a = g sin 37° + µg cos 37°

∴ a = 10 m/s2 down the incline

∴ S = \(u t+\frac{1}{2} at^2\)

5 = \(\frac{1}{2} \times 10 \times \mathrm{t}^2\)

∴ t = 1sec.

Question 7. A block is given a velocity of 10 m/s and a force of 100 N in addition to friction force is also acting on the block. Find the retardation of the block?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A Force Of 100 N In Addition To Friction Force Is Also Acting On The Block

Answer:

As there is relative motion

∴ kinetic friction will act to reduce this relative motion.

fk = µN = 0.1 × 10 × 10 = 10 N

100 + 10 = 10a

a = 11 m/s2

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Relative Motion

Static Friction: Ιt exists between the two surfaces when there is a tendency of relative motion but no relative motion occurs along the two contact surfaces.

  • For Question consider a bed inside a room; when we gently push the bed with a finger, the bed does not move.
  • This means that the bed has a tendency to move in the direction of the applied force but does not move as there exists static friction force acting in the opposite direction of the applied force.

Question 8. What is the value of static friction force on the block?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Value Of Static Friction Force On The Block

Answer:

In the horizontal direction acceleration is zero.

Therefore Σ F = 0.

∴ ƒ = 0

Direction Of Static Friction Force: The static friction force on an object is opposite to its impending motion relative to the surface.

The following steps should be followed in determining the direction of static friction force on an object.

  1. Draw the free body diagram with respect to the other object on which it is kept.
  2. Include pseudo force also if the contact surface is accelerating.
  3. Decide the resultant force and the component parallel to the surface of this resultant force.
  4. The direction of static friction is opposite to the above component of the resultant force.

Note: Here once again the static friction is involved when there is no relative motion between two surfaces.

Question 9. In the following figure, an object of mass M is kept on a rough table as seen from above. Forces are applied to it as shown. Find the direction of static friction if the object does not move.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Direction Of Static Friction If The Object

Answer:

In the above problem, we first draw the free-body diagram to find the resultant force.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Free Body Diagram To Find The Resultant Force

As the object does not move this is not a case of limiting friction. The direction of static friction is opposite to the direction of the resultant force FR as shown in the figure by fs. Its magnitude is equal to 25 N.

Magnitude Of Kinetic And Static Friction

Kinetic Friction:

The magnitude of the kinetic friction is proportional to the normal force acting between the two bodies. We can write

fk= μk N

where N is the normal force. The proportionality constant μk is called the coefficient of kinetic friction and its value depends on the nature of the two surfaces in contact.

If the surfaces are smooth μk will be small, if the surfaces are rough μk will be large. It also depends on the materials of the two bodies in contact.

Static Friction:

The magnitude of static friction is equal and opposite to the external force exerted, till the object at which force is exerted is at rest. This means it is a variable and self-adjusting force. However, it has a maximum value called limiting friction.

fmax = μsN

The actual force of static friction may be smaller than μsN and its value depends on other forces acting on the body. The magnitude of frictional force is equal to that required to keep the body at relative rest.

0, fs, fsmax

Here μsand μk are proportionality constants. μs is called the coefficient of static friction and μk is called the coefficient of kinetic friction. They are dimensionless quantities independent of shape and area of contact. It is a property of the two contact surfaces.

Note: μs> μk for a given pair of surfaces. If not mentioned then μs= μk can be taken. The value of μ can be from 0 to ∞.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Static Friction

The following table gives a rough estimate of the values of the coefficient of static friction between certain pairs of materials.

The actual value depends on the degree of smoothness and other environmental factors. For example, wood may be prepared at various degrees of smoothness and the friction coefficient will vary.

table

Rolling Friction: When a body (say wheel) rolls on a surface the resistance offered by the surface is called rolling friction.

  • Rolling friction forces arise as, for example, a rubber tyre rolls on pavement, primarily because the tyre deforms as the wheel rolls. The sliding of molecules against each other within the rubber causes energy to be lost.
  • The velocity of the point of contact with respect to the surface remains zero.
  • The rolling friction is negligible in comparison to static or kinetic friction which may be present simultaneously i.e., µR< µk< µS

Angle Of Friction

The angle of friction is the angle which the resultant of limiting friction FS and normal reaction N makes with the normal reaction. It is represented by λ, Thus from the figure.

⇒ \(\tan \lambda=\frac{F_S}{N}\) ( Fs= µ N) ortan

or \(\frac{F_S}{N}\) = θtan λ = µ

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Angle Of Friction

For smooth surfaces, λ = 0 (zero)

Angle Of Repose (θ)

If a body is placed on an inclined plane and if its angle of inclination is gradually increased, then at some angle of inclination θ the body will just begin to slide down this angle is called the angle of repose (θ).

FS = mg sinθ and N = mg cosθ

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Angle Of Repose

So, or µ = tanθ

Relation between angle of friction (λ) and angle of repose (θ)

We know that tan λ = µ and µ = tan θ

hence tan λ = tan θ or θ = λ

Thus, angle of repose = angle of friction

Question 1. Find the acceleration of the block. Initially, the block is at rest.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Acceleration Of block Is Rest

Answer: Zero

Question 2. Find out the acceleration of the block. Initially, the block is at rest.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Initially The Block Is At Rest

Answer:

N + 24 – 100 = 0 for vertical direction

∴ N = 76 N

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Initially The Block Is At Rest.

Now 0 ≤ fs ≤ µs N

0 ≤ fs ≤ 76 × 0.5

0 ≤ fs≤ 38 N

∴ 32 < 38 Hence f = 32

∴ acceleration of the block is zero.

Question 3. Find out the acceleration of the block for different ranges of F.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Acceleration Of The Block For Different Ranges Of F

Answer:

0 ≤ f ≤ µsN

⇒ 0 ≤ f ≤ µsmg

a = 0 if F ≤ µsmg

⇒ a = \(\frac{F-\mu M g}{M}\) if F > µMg M

Question 4. Find out the acceleration of the block. Initially, the block is at rest.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Acceleration Of The Block Initially The Block Is At Rest

Answer:

0 ≤ fs ≤ µsN

⇒ 0 ≤ fs≤ 50

Now 51 > 50

∴ The block will move but if the block starts moving then kinetic friction is involved.

fk= µk N = 0.3 × 100 = 30 N

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction If The Block Starts Moving Then Kinetic Friction Is Involved

∴ 51 – 30 = 10 a

∴ a = 2.1 m/s2

Question 5. Find out the minimum force that must be applied on the block vertically downwards so that the block doesn’t move.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Minimum Force That Must Be Applied On The Block

Answer:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Minimum Force That Must Be Applied On The Block.

100-fs = 0

∴ fs= 100 ……..

F + 10 g = N ⇒ N = 100 + F ……….. (2)

Now 0 ≤ fs≤ μN

100 ≤ 0.5 N

100 ≤ 0.5 [100 + F]

200 ≤ 100 + F

F ≥ 100 N

∴ Minimum F = 100 N

Question 6. A particle of mass 5 kg is moving on a rough fixed inclined plane with a constant velocity of 5 m/s as shown in the figure. Find the friction force acting on a body by plane.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Friction Force Acting On A Body By Plane

Answer:

fk= μkN = μk mg cos 37° = mg sin30° = 5 (10)\(\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)\)

⇒ fk= 25 N

Question 7. The angle of inclination is slowly increased. Find out the angle at which the block starts moving.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Angle Of Inclination Is Slowly Increased

Answer:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Angle Of Inclination Is Slowly Increased.

0 ≤ f ≤ µs N

mg sinθ > fsmax

mg sin θ > µN

mg sinθ > µ mg cos θ

∴ tan θ > µ

θ = tan-1 µ

for tan θ ≤ µ no sliding on an inclined plane.

This method is used to find out the value of µ practically.

Question 8. Find out the acceleration of the block. If the block is initially at rest.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Acceleration Of The Block If The Block Is Initially At Rest

Answer: (FBD of the block excluding friction) N = 10 g cos 37° = 80 N

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction FBD Of The Block Excluding Friction

Now 0 ≤ fs≤ µN

0 ≤ fs≤ 0.5 × 80

∴ fs≤ 40 N

We will put a value of f in the last i.e. in the direction opposite to the resultant of other forces. f acts down the incline and its value is of = 75 – 60 = 15 N

So acceleration is zero

Question 9. In the above problem, how much force should be added to 75 N force so that the block starts to move up the incline?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction In The Above Problem How Much Force Should Be Added To 75 N Force

Answer:

∴ 60 + 40 = 75 + fextra

∴ fs= 25 N

Question 10. In the above problem, what is the minimum force by which 75 N force should be replaced so that the block does not move?
Answer:

In this case, the block has a tendency to move downwards.

Hence friction acts upwards.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Block Has A Tendency To Move Downwards

∴ F + 40 = 60

∴ F = 20 N

Question 11. The top view of a block on a table is shown (g = 10 m/s2). Find out the acceleration of the block.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Top View Of A Block On A Acceleration Of The Block

Answer:

Now fs≤ µN

∴ fs≤ 50

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Top View Of A Block On A Acceleration Of The Block.

Hence the block will move.

a = \(\frac{40 \sqrt{2}-50}{10}\)

⇒ \((4 \sqrt{2}-5) \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)

Question 12. Find minimum µ so that the blocks remain stationary.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Minimum Mu So That The Blocks Remain Stationary

Answer: T = 100 g = 1000 N

∴ f = 1000 to keep the block stationary

Now fmax= 1000

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Minimum Mu So That The Blocks Remain Stationary.

µN = 1000

µ = 2

Can µ be greater than 1?

Yes 0 < µ ≤ ∝

Question 13. Find out the minimum acceleration of block A so that the 10 kg block doesn’t fall.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Minimum Acceleration Of Block A.

Answer:

Applying NL in a horizontal direction

N = 10 a ………(1)

Applying NL in a vertical direction

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Minimum Acceleration Of Block A

10 g = µ N …….(2)

10 g = µ 10 a from (1) and (2)

∴ a = 20 m/s2

Question 14. In the following figure force F is gradually increased from zero. Draw the graph between applied force F and tension T in the string. The coefficient of static friction between the block and the ground is μs.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction In The Following Figure Force F Is Gradually Increased From Zero

Answer:

As the external force F is gradually increased from zero it is compensated by the friction and the string bears no tension. When limiting friction is achieved by increasing force F to a value till μsmg, the further increase in F is transferred to the string.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction When Limiting Friction Is Achieved By Increasing Force F

Question 15. Find the acceleration of the two blocks. The system is initially at rest and the friction coefficient is as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Acceleration Of The Two Blocks The System Is Initially At Rest And The Friction Coefficient

Answer:

fmax= 50 N

∴ f ≤ 50 N

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Acceleration Of The Two Blocks.

If they move together a = \(\frac{101}{20}\)

= 5.05 m/s2

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction If They Move Together The System Is Initially At Rest And The Friction Coefficient

Check friction on B

f = 10 × 5.05 = 50.5 (required)

50.5 > 50 (therefore required > available)

Hence they will not move together.

Hence they move separately so kinetic friction is involved.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction They Move Separately Kinetic Friction

∴ for \(\mathrm{a}_{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{50}{10}=5.1 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)

⇒ \(a_A=\frac{101-50}{10}=5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)

Also, aA > aB as force is applied on A.

Question 16. Find the acceleration of the two blocks. The system is initially at rest and the friction coefficient is as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Acceleration Of The Two Blocks

Answer:

Move Together Move Separately No need to calculate.

a = 2 m/s2

Check friction on 20 kg.

f = 20 × 2

f = 40 (which is required)

40 < 50 (therefore required < available)

∴ will move together.

Question 17. In the above example, find the maximum F for which two blocks will move together.
Answer:

Observing the critical situation where friction becomes limiting.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Observing The Critical Situation Where Friction Becomes Limiting

∴ F – fmax= 10 a ………(1)

fmax = 20 a ……….(2)

∴ F = 75 N

Question 18. Initially, the system is at rest. find out the minimum value of F for which sliding starts between the two blocks.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Minimum Value Of F For Which Sliding Starts Between The Two Blocks

Answer:

At just sliding conditions limiting friction is acting.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Sliding Condition Limiting Friction

F – 50 = 20 a ………..(1)

f = 10 a ………………(2)

50 = 10 a

∴ a = 5 m/s2

Hence F = 50 + 20 × 5 = 150 N

∴ Fmin = 150 N

It is Easier to Pull Than to Push a Body. Why –

Let a force P be applied to pull a body of weight Mg.

The applied force is resolved into two components : P cosθ and P sinθ The normal reaction, R = (Mg – P sinθ)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Easier To Pull Than To Push A Body

Now, the kinetic force of friction is given by

F1= μk R = μk(Mg – P sinθ) …….(1)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Kinetic Force Of Friction

On the other hand, when the same force is applied to push a body of weight Mg, then a normal reaction,

R = (Mg + P sinθ) …….(2)

∴ Kinetic force of friction is F2= μk R = μk(mg + P sinθ)

From eqn (1) and (2), it is clear and F2> F1

That is, the force of friction in the case of push is more than that in the case of pull.

Hence, it is easier to pull than to push the body.

Friction is a Necessary Evil :

Friction is a necessary evil. It means it has advantages as well as disadvantages. In other words, friction is not desirable but without friction, we cannot think of survival.

Disadvantages :

  1. A significant amount of energy of a moving object is wasted in the form of heat energy to overcome the force of friction.
  2. The force of friction restricts the speed of moving vehicles like buses, trains, aeroplanes, rockets etc.
  3. The efficiency of machines decreases due to the presence of force of friction.
  4. The force of friction causes a lot of wear and tear in the moving parts of a machine.
  5. Sometimes, a machine gets burnt due to the friction force between different moving parts.

Advantages :

  1. The force of friction helps us to move on the surface of the earth. In the absence of friction, we cannot think of walking on the surface. That is why, we fall down while moving on a smooth surface.
  2. The force of friction between the tip of a pen and the surface of paper helps us to write on the paper. It is not possible to write on the glazed paper as there is no force of friction.
  3. The force of friction between the tyres of a vehicle and the road helps the vehicle to stop when the brake is applied. In the absence of friction, the vehicle skid off the road when the brake is applied.
  4. Moving belts remain on the rim of a wheel because of friction.
  5. The force of friction between a chalk and the blackboard helps us to write on the board. Thus, we observe that irrespective of the various disadvantages of friction, it is very difficult to part with it. So, friction is a necessary evil.

Methods Of Reducing Friction

As friction causes the wastage of energy it becomes necessary to reduce the friction. Friction can be reduced by the following methods.

  1. Polishing the surface. We know, that friction between rough surfaces is much greater than between the polished surfaces. So we polish the surface to reduce the friction. The irregularities on the surface are filled with polish and hence the friction decreases.
  2. Lubrication. To reduce friction, lubricants like oil or grease are used. When the oil or grease is put in between the two surfaces, the irregularities remain apart and do not interlock tightly. Thus, the surfaces can move over each other with less friction between them.
  3. By providing a streamlined shape. When a body (e.g. bus, train, aeroplane etc.) moves with high speed, air resistance (friction) opposes its motion. The effect of air resistance on the motion of the objects (stated above) is decreased by providing them with a streamlined shape.
  4. Converting sliding friction into rolling friction. Since rolling friction is much less than sliding friction, we convert the sliding friction into rolling friction. This is done by using a ball bearings arrangement. Ball bearings are placed in between the axle (A) and hub (B) of the wheel as shown in the figure. The ball bearing tends to roll around the axle as the wheel turns and as such the frictional force is diminished.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Methods Of Reducing Friction

Friction Key Concept

Part of the contact force that is tangential to the surface is called friction force. Microscopically friction force because of attraction between molecules of the two surfaces.

The friction force is of two types:

  1. Kinetic friction
  2. Static friction

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Friction force is Kinetic Friction And Static Friction

Kinetic Friction Force:

Kinetic friction exists between two surfaces (in the case of a block), two points (in the case of a sphere), or two lines (in the case of a cylinder) when there is relative motion. It stops acting when relative motion ceases to exist.

Direction Of Kinetic Friction:

It is opposite to the relative velocity of contact surfaces.

Note: Its direction is not opposite to the force applied it is opposite to the motion of the body considered which is in contact with the other surface.

Kinetic friction fk= μkN

The proportionality constant μk is called the coefficient of kinetic friction and its value depends on the nature of the two surfaces in contact.

Static Friction:

When two surfaces in contact have a relative velocity of zero, but there is a tendency of relative motion then the friction force acting will be static.

Direction Of Static Friction: If there is a tendency to slide between the contact surfaces, it will act in such a direction to prevent sliding.

Static friction is a variable and self-adjusting force. It can adjust its value upto a limit which is called limiting friction force (fsmax).

fsmax= μsN

Here μs is the coefficient of static friction which depends on the nature of two contact surfaces. The actual force of static friction may be smaller than μsN and its value depends on other forces acting on the body. The magnitude of frictional force is equal to that required to keep the body at relative rest.

0 fs fsmax

The following steps should be followed in determining the direction of static friction force on an object.

  1. Draw the free-body diagram to the other object on which it is kept.
  2. Include pseudo force also if the contact surface is accelerating.
  3. Decide the resultant force and the component parallel to the surface of this resultant force.
  4. The direction of static friction is opposite to the above component of the resultant force.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Direction Of Static Friction

Here μs and μk are dimensionless quantities independent of shape and area of contact. It is a property of the two contact surfaces. In general μs > μk for a given pair of surfaces. If it is not mentioned separately the μs = μk can be taken.

μs and μk can also be represented as angles. If θs and θk are angles of static friction and kinetic friction respectively, then

θs= tan-1 μs

θk= tan-1 μk

θs is also called the angle of repose.

Rolling Friction:

When a body rolls on a surface the resistance offered by the surface is called rolling friction.

Rolling Friction Is Less Than Sliding Friction

In sliding motion, elevation collides. This introduces friction. In rolling motion, elevations are crossed over. This avoids friction.

Rolling Friction Zero In Ideal Case:

  • In ideal rolling the contact with the cylindrical surface of the body and lower surface must be along a straight line. Elevations must be crossed over and no friction be present.
  • But no rolling is ideal. Due to the deformation of the moving cylindrical surface (wheel of a loaded truck), or the deformation of the lower surface (mud street), contact becomes over a flat surface. This introduces sliding, which causes friction.

 

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 6 Friction Multiple Choice Question And Answers

Friction Multiple Choice Question And Answers

Question 1. If the normal force is doubled, the coefficient of friction is:

  1. Halved
  2. Doubled
  3. Tripled
  4. Not changed

Answer: 4. Halved

Question 2. If the coefficient of friction of a plane inclined at 45º is 0.5, then the acceleration of a body sliding freely on it is (g = 9.8m/s2)-

  1. 4.9 m/s2
  2. 9.8 m/s2
  3. \(\frac{9.8}{\sqrt{2}} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)
  4. \(\frac{9.8}{2 \sqrt{2}} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2 \)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{9.8}{2 \sqrt{2}} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2 \)

Question 3. A body of mass 100 g is sliding downward from an inclined plane of inclination 30°. What is the frictional force experienced if µ = 1.7 –

  1. \(1.7 \times \sqrt{2} \times \frac{1}{\sqrt{3}} \mathrm{~N}\)
  2. \(1.7 \times \sqrt{3} \times \frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~N}\)
  3. \(1.7 \times \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~N}\)
  4. \(1.7 \times \sqrt{2} \times \frac{1}{3} \mathrm{~N}\)

Answer: 2. \(1.7 \times \sqrt{3} \times \frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~N}\)

Question 4. A car is moving along a straight horizontal road with a speed v0. If the coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road is µ then the shortest distance in which the car can be stopped is-

  1. \(\frac{v_0^2}{2 \mu \mathrm{g}}\)
  2. \(\frac{v_0}{\mu g}\)
  3. \(\left(\frac{v_0}{\mu g}\right)^2\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{v_0^2}{2 \mu \mathrm{g}}\)

Question 5. A block of mass 10 kg is moving up an inclined plane of inclination 30° with an initial speed of 5 m/s. It stops after 0.5 s, what is the value of the coefficient of kinetic friction?

  1. 0.5
  2. 0.6 cm
  3. \(\sqrt{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)

Question 6. A particle is projected along a rough plane inclined at an angle of 45° with the horizontal if the \(\frac{1}{2}\) coefficient of friction is g

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2}\)
  3. \(\frac{g}{\sqrt{2}}\left(1+\frac{1}{2}\right)\)
  4. \(\frac{g}{\sqrt{2}}\left(1-\frac{1}{2}\right)\)
  5. Answer: 3. \(\frac{g}{\sqrt{2}}\left(1+\frac{1}{2}\right)\)

Question 7. A body of mass 10 kg lies on a rough horizontal surface. When a horizontal force of F newtons acts on it, it gets an acceleration of 5 m/s2. And when the horizontal force is doubled, it gets an acceleration of 18 m/s2. The coefficient of friction between the body and the horizontal surface is- (Take g = 10 m/s2)

  1. 0.2
  2. 0.4
  3. 0.6
  4. 0.8

Answer: 4. 0.8

Question 8. On the horizontal surface of a truck, a block of mass 1kg is placed (μ = 0.6) and the truck is moving with acceleration 5 m/sec2, then frictional force on the block will be –

  1. 5 N
  2. 6 N
  3. 5.88 N
  4. 8 N

Answer: 1. 5 N

Question 9. A 10 kg box is placed on a surface. The coefficient of friction between the surface and box is μ = 0.5. If horizontal force 100 N is applied acceleration of the box will be (g = 10 m/sec2) –

  1. 2.5 m/s2
  2. 5 m/s2
  3. 7.5 m/s2
  4. None

Answer: 2. 5 m/s2

Question 10. A block B is pushed momentarily along a horizontal surface with an initial velocity v. If μ is the coefficient of sliding friction between B and the surface, block B will come to rest after a time:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A Block B Is Pushed Momentarily Along A Horizontal Surface With An Initial Velocity V

  1. \(\frac{v}{g \mu}\)
  2. \(\frac{g \mu}{v}\)
  3. \(\frac{g}{v}\)
  4. \(\frac{v}{g}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{v}{g \mu}\)

Question 11. A block of mass 5 kg is placed on a horizontal surface and a pushing force of 20 N is acting on the back as shown in the figure. If the coefficient of friction between the block and surface is 0.2, then calculate the frictional force and speed of the block after 15 seconds. (Given g = 10 m/s2)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A Block Of Mass 5 kg Is Placed On Horizontal Surface And A Pushing Force 20 N

  1. 2.936 MS-1
  2. 4.936 MS-1
  3. 3.936 MS-1
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. 3.936 MS-1

Question 12. A marble block of mass 2 kg lying on ice when given a velocity of 6 m/s is stopped by friction in 10s. Then the coefficient of friction is :

  1. 0.02
  2. 0.03
  3. 0.06
  4. 0.01

Answer: 3. 0.06

Question 13. Consider a car moving on a straight road with a speed of 100 m/s. The distance at which the car can be stopped is (µk= 0.5)

  1. 100 m
  2. 400 m
  3. 800 m
  4. 1000 m

Answer: 4. 1000 m

Question 14. Starting from rest a body slides down a 45º inclined plane in twice the time it takes to slide down the same distance in the absence of friction. The coefficient of friction between the body and the inclined plane is:

  1. 0.75
  2. 0.33
  3. 0.25
  4. 0.80

Answer: 1. 0.75

Question 15. A wooden block of mass m resting on a rough horizontal table (coefficient of friction = μ) is pulled by a force F as shown in the figure. The acceleration of the block moving horizontally is :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Acceleration Of The Block Moving Horizontally

  1. \(\frac{F \cos \theta}{m}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu F \sin \theta}{M}\)
  3. \(\frac{F}{m}(\cos \theta+\mu \sin \theta)-\mu g\)
  4. None

Answer: 3. \(\frac{F}{m}(\cos \theta+\mu \sin \theta)-\mu g\)

Question 16. A block of mass M = 5 kg is resting on a rough horizontal surface for which the coefficient of friction is 0.2. When a force F = 40 N is applied, the acceleration of the block will be (g = 10 m/s2) :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A Rough Horizontal Surface For Which The Coefficient Of Friction Is The Acceleration Of The Block

  1. 5.73 m/sec2
  2. 8.0 m/sec2
  3. 3.17 m/sec2
  4. 10.0 m/sec2

Answer: 1. 5.73 m/sec2

Question 17. A body is projected up a rough inclined plane from the bottom with some velocity. It travels up the incline and then returns back. If the time of ascent is and time of descent is td, then

  1. ta= td
  2. ta> td
  3. ta< td
  4. Data insufficient

Answer: 3. ta< td

Question 18. The upper half of an inclined plane with inclination φ is perfectly smooth while the lower half is rough. A body starting from rest at the top will again come to rest at the bottom of the coefficient of friction for the lower half is given by

  1. 2 tan φ
  2. tan φ
  3. 2 sin φ
  4. 2 cos φ

Answer: 1. 2 tan φ

Question 19. The frictional force is –

  1. Self-adjustable
  2. Not self-adjustable
  3. scalar quantity
  4. Equal to the limiting force

Answer: 1. Self-adjustable

Question 20. A block is placed on a rough floor and a horizontal force F is applied to it. The force of friction f by the floor on the block is measured for different values of F and a graph is plotted between them-

  1. The graph is a straight line of slope 45°
  2. The graph is a straight line parallel to the F-axis
  3. The graph is a straight line of slope 45° for small F and a straight line parallel to the F-axis for large F.
  4. There is a small kink on the graph
  1. 3, 4
  2. 1, 4
  3. 1, 2
  4. 1, 3

Answer: 1. 3, 4

Question 21. A block A kept on an inclined surface just begins to slide if the inclination is 30°. The block is replaced by another block B and it is found that it just begins to slide if the inclination is 40° –

  1. Mass of A > mass of B
  2. Mass of A < mass of B
  3. Mass of A = mass of B
  4. All three are possible

Answer: 4. All the three are possible

Question 22. It is easier to pull a body than to push, because-

  1. The coefficient of friction is more in pushing than in pulling
  2. The friction force is more in pushing than in pulling
  3. The body does not move forward when pushed.
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. The friction force is more in pushing than that in pulling

Question 23. The coefficient of static friction between two surfaces depends on –

  1. Nature of surfaces
  2. The shape of the surfaces in contact
  3. The area of contact
  4. All of the above

Answer: 1. Nature of surfaces

Question 24. A box is lying on an inclined plane. If the box starts sliding when the angle of inclination is 60°, then the coefficient of static friction of the box and plane is-

  1. 2.732
  2. 1.732
  3. 0.267
  4. 0.176

Answer: 2. 1.732

Question 25. A 20 kg block is initially at rest. A 75 N force is required to set the block in motion. After the motion, a force of 60 N is applied to keep the block moving at a constant speed. The coefficient of static friction is-

  1. 0.6
  2. 0.52
  3. 0.44
  4. 0.35

Answer: 4. 0.35

Question 26. A block of metal is lying on the floor of a bus. The maximum acceleration which can be given to the bus so that the block may remain at rest will be

  1. µg
  2. \(\frac{\mu}{g}\)
  3. µ2g
  4. µg2

Answer: 1. µg

Question 27. A box ‘A’ is lying on the horizontal floor of the compartment of a train running along horizontal rails from left to right. At time ‘t’, it decelerates. Then the reaction R by the floor on the box is given best by :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Horizontal Floor Of The Compartment Of A Train Running Along Horizontal Rails From Left To Right

Answer: 3

Question 28. A block of mass 0.1 kg is held against a wall by applying a horizontal force of 5N on the block. If the coefficient of friction between the block and the wall is 0.5, the magnitude of frictional force acting on the block is (g = 9.8m/s2)

  1. 2.5 N
  2. 0.98 N
  3. 4.9 N
  4. 0.49 N

Answer: 2. 0.98 N

Question 29. A block of mass 2 kg rests on a rough inclined plane making an angle of 300 with the horizontal. The coefficient of static friction between the block and the plane is 0.7. The frictional force on the block is (g = 9.8m/s2) :

  1. 9.8 N
  2. 0.7 × 9.8 N
  3. 9.8 × 7 N
  4. 0.8 × 9.8 N

Answer: 1. 9.8 N

Question 30. A block of mass 5 kg and surface area 2 m2 just begins to slide down on an inclined plane when the angle of inclination is 30º. Keeping the mass the same, the surface area of the block is doubled. The angle at which it starts sliding down is :

  1. 30º
  2. 60º
  3. 15º
  4. None

Answer: 1. 30º

Question 31. A 60 kg body is pushed horizontally with just enough force to start it moving across a floor and the same force continues to act afterwards. The coefficient of static friction and sliding friction are 0.5 and 0.4 respectively. The acceleration of the body is (g = 10m/s2) :

  1. 6 m/s2
  2. 4.9 m/s2
  3. 3.92 m/s2
  4. 1 m/s2

Answer: 4. 1 m/s2

Question 32. The blocks A and B are arranged as shown in the figure. The pulley is frictionless. The mass of A is 10 kg. The coefficient of friction between block A and the horizontal surface is 0.20. The minimum mass of B to start the motion will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Coefficient Of Friction Between Block A And Horizontal Surface

  1. 2 kg
  2. 0.2 kg
  3. 5 kg
  4. 10 kg

Answer: 1. 2 kg

Question 33. In the case of a horse pulling a cart, the force that causes the horse to move forward is the force that :

  1. The horse exerts on the ground
  2. The horse exerts on the cart
  3. The ground exerts on the horse
  4. The cart exerts on the horse

Answer: 3. The ground exerts on the horse

Question 34. A uniform rope of length l lies on a table. If the coefficient of friction is μ then the maximum length I1 of the part of this rope which can overhang from the edge of the table without sliding down is

  1. \(\frac{\ell}{\mu}\)
  2. \(\frac{\ell}{\mu+1}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu \ell}{1+\mu}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu \ell}{1-\mu}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mu \ell}{1+\mu}\)

Question 35. Block A of mass 4 kg and block B of mass 6 kg are resting on a horizontal surface as shown in the figure. There is no friction between the block B and the horizontal surface. The coefficient of friction between the blocks is 0.2. If the value of g = 10 ms-2, the maximum horizontal force F that can be applied on block B without any relative motion between A and B is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Maximum Horizontal Foce F That Can Be Applied On Block B Without Any Relative Motion Between A And B

  1. 20 N
  2. 40 N
  3. 60 N
  4. 100 N

Answer: 1. 20 N

Question 36. Consider the situation. The wall is smooth but the surfaces of A and B in contact are rough. The friction on B due to A in equilibrium-

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Wall Is Smooth But The Surface Of A And B In Contact Are Rough

  1. Is upward
  2. Is downward
  3. Is zero
  4. The system cannot remain in equilibrium

Answer: 4. The system cannot remain in equilibrium

Question 37. Suppose all the surfaces in the previous problem are rough. The direction of friction on B due to A-

  1. Is upward
  2. Is downward
  3. Is zero
  4. Depends on the masses of A and B

Answer: 1. Is upward

Question 38. A body of mass M is kept on a rough horizontal surface (friction coefficient = µ). A person is trying to pull the body by applying a horizontal force but the body is not moving. The force by the surface on A is F where-

  1. F = Mg
  2. F = µMg
  3. \(M g \leq F \leq M g \sqrt{1+\mu^2}\)
  4. \(M g \geq F \geq M g \sqrt{1+\mu^2}\)

Answer: 3. \(M g \leq F \leq M g \sqrt{1+\mu^2}\)

Question 39. In a situation where the contact force by a rough horizontal surface on a body placed on it has constant magnitude if the angle between this force and the vertical is decreased the frictional force between the surface and the body will-

  1. Increase
  2. Decrease
  3. Remain the same
  4. May increase or decrease

Answer: 2. Decrease

Question 40. An inclined plane is inclined at an angle θ with the horizontal. A body of mass m rests on it, if the coefficient of friction is µ, then the minimum force that has to be applied to the inclined plane to make the body just move up the inclined plane is-

  1. mgsinθ
  2. µmgcosθ
  3. µmgcosθ – mgsinθ
  4. µmgcosθ + mgsinθ

Answer: 4. µmgcosθ + mgsinθ

Question 41. A block W is held against a vertical wall by applying a horizontal force F. The minimum value of F needed to hold the block is if μ < 1

  1. Less than W
  2. Equal to W
  3. Greater than W
  4. Data is insufficient

Answer: 3. Greater than W

Question 42. The system shown in the figure is in equilibrium. The maximum value of W, so that the maximum value of static frictional force on 100 kg body is 450 N, will be:-

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Maximum Value Of Static Frictional Force

  1. 100 N
  2. 250 N
  3. 450 N
  4. 1000 N

Answer: 3. 450 N

Question 43. A block of mass 20 kg is kept on a rough incline plane. If the angle of repose is 30°, then what should be the value of Fext so that the block does not move over the inclined plane?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A Block Of Mass 20 kg Is Kept On Rough Incline Plane

  1. 120 N
  2. 200 N
  3. 110 N
  4. Both 1 and 2

Answer: 4. Both 1 and 2

Question 44. What is the maximum value of the force F such that the block shown in the arrangement, does not move :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Maximum Value Of The Force F

  1. 20 N
  2. 10 N
  3. 12 N
  4. 15 N

Answer: 1. 20 N

Question 45. The coefficient of static friction, μs, between block A of mass 2kg and the table as shown in the figure, is 0.2. What would be the maximum mass value of block B so that the two blocks do not move? The string and the pulley are assumed to be smooth and massless : (g = 10 m/s2)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The String And The Pulley Are Assumed To Be Smooth And Massless

  1. 2.0 kg
  2. 4.0 kg
  3. 0.2 kg
  4. 0.4 kg

Answer: 4. 0.4 kg

Question 46. A horizontal force of 10 N is necessary to just hold a block stationary against a wall. The coefficient of friction between the block and the wall is 0.2. The weight of the block is :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Coefficient Of Friction Between The Block And The Wall

  1. 2 kg
  2. 50 N
  3. 100 N
  4. 2 N

Answer: 4. 2 N

Question 47. A block rests on a rough inclined plane making an angle of 30º with the horizontal. The coefficient of static friction between the block and the plane is 0.8. If the frictional force on the block is 10 N, the mass of the block (in kg) is (take g = 10 m/s2) :

  1. 2.0
  2. 4.0
  3. 1.6
  4. 2.5

Answer: 1. 2.0

Question 48. A block of mass 20 kg is acted upon by a force F = 30 N at an angle of 53° with the horizontal in a downward direction as shown. The coefficient of friction between the block and the horizontal surface is 0.2. The friction force acting on the block by the ground is (g = 10 m/s2)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Coefficient Of Friction Between The Block And The Horizontal Surface

  1. 40.0 N
  2. 30.0 N
  3. 18.0 N
  4. 44.8 N

Answer: 3. 18.0 N

Question 49. A block of mass m lying on a rough horizontal plane is acted upon by a horizontal force P and another force Q inclined at an angle θ to the vertical. The block will remain in equilibrium if the coefficient of friction between it and the surface is:-

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A Block Of Mass M Lying On A Rough Horizontal Plane Is Acted Upon By A Horizontal Force

  1. \(\frac{P+Q \sin \theta}{m g+Q \cos \theta}\)
  2. \(\frac{P \cos \theta+Q}{m g-Q \sin \theta}\)
  3. \(\frac{P+Q \cos \theta}{m g+Q \sin \theta}\)
  4. \(\frac{P \sin \theta+Q}{m g-Q \cos \theta}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{P+Q \sin \theta}{m g+Q \cos \theta}\)

Question 50. In the arrangement shown in the figure, a 5 kg block is placed on a rough table (μ =0.4) and a 3kg mass is connected at one end. then the range of mass m, for which the system will remain in equilibrium is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction In The Arrangement The Range Of Mass M For Which The System Will Remain In Equilibrium

  1. 1 kg to 3 kg
  2. 1 kg to 5 kg
  3. Any value greater than 8 kg
  4. 3 kg to 5 kg

Answer: 2. 1 kg to 5 kg

Question 51. Two masses A and B of 10 kg and 5 kg respectively are connected with a string passing over a frictionless pulley fixed at the corner of a table as shown. The coefficient of static friction of A with table is 0.2. The minimum mass of C that may be placed on A to prevent it from moving is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Two Masses A And B Of 10 kg And 5 kg Respectively Are Connected With A String

  1. 15 kg
  2. 10 kg
  3. 5 kg
  4. 12 kg

Answer: 1. 15 kg

Question 52. A block of mass m is at rest relative to the stationary wedge of mass M. The coefficient of friction between block and wedge is µ. The wedge is now pulled horizontally with acceleration ‘a’ as shown in the figure. Then the minimum magnitude of ‘a’ for the friction between block and wedge to be zero is :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A Block Of Mass M Is At Rest Relative To The Stationary Wedge Of Mass M

  1. g tan θ
  2. µ g tan θ
  3. g cot θ
  4. µ g cot θ

Answer: 3. g cot θ

Question 53. A uniform rope of length l lies on a table. If the coefficient of friction is
μ, then the maximum length l1 of the part of this rope which can overhang from the edge of the table without sliding down is

  1. \(\frac{l}{\mu}\)
  2. \(\frac{l}{\mu+l}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu l}{1+\mu}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu l}{\mu-1}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mu l}{1+\mu}\)

Question 54. A heavy uniform chain lies on a horizontal tabletop. If the coefficient of friction between the chain and table surface is 0.25, then the maximum fraction of the length of the chain, that can hang over one edge of the table is

  1. 20%
  2. 25%
  3. 35%
  4. 15%

Answer: 1. 20%

Question 55. A uniform chain of length L changes partly from a table which is kept in equilibrium by friction. The maximum length that can withstand without slipping is l, and then the coefficient of friction between the table and the chain is

  1. \(\frac{l}{L}\)
  2. \(\frac{l}{L+l}\)
  3. \(\frac{l}{L-1}\)
  4. \(\frac{L}{L+l}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{l}{L-1}\)

Question 56. A uniform metal chain is placed on a rough table such that one end of the chain hangs down over the edge of the table. When one-third of its length hangs over the edge, the chain starts sliding. Then, the coefficient of static friction is

  1. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
  3. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 57. A rope lies on a table such that part of it lays over. The rope begins to slide when the length of the hanging part is 25 % of the entire length. The coefficient of friction between the rope and the table is:

  1. 0.33
  2. 0.25
  3. 0.5
  4. 0.2

Answer: 1. 0.33

Question 58. Two blocks A and B placed on a plane surface as shown in the figure. The mass of block A is 100 kg and that of block B is 200 kg. Block A is tied to a stand and block B is pulled by a force F. If the coefficient of friction between the surfaces of A and B is 0.2 and the coefficient of friction between B and the plane is 0.3 then for the motion of B the minimum value of F will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Two Block A And B Placed On A Plane Surface The Motion Of B Tthe Minimum Value Of F

  1. 700 N
  2. 1050 N
  3. 900 N
  4. 1100 N

Answer: 4. 1100N

Question 59. A 40 kg slab rests on a frictionless floor. A 10 kg block rests on top of the slab. The static coefficient of friction between the block and slab is 0.60 while the kinetic coefficient is 0.40. The 10 kg block is acted upon by a horizontal force of 100N. If g = 9.8 m/s2, the resulting acceleration of the slab will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A 40 kg Slab Rests On A Frictionless Floor

  1. 0.98 m/s2
  2. 1.47 m/s2
  3. 1.52 m/s2
  4. 6.1 m/s2

Answer: 1. 0.98 m/s2

Question 60. A body A of mass 1kg rests on a smooth surface. Another body B of mass 0.2 kg is placed over A as shown. The coefficient of static friction between A and B is 0.15. B will bring to slide on A if a pulled with a force greater than-

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A Body A Of Mass 1kg Rests On A Smooth Surface

  1. 1.764 N
  2. 0.1764 N
  3. 0.3 N
  4. It will not slide for any F

Answer: 1. 1.764 N

Question 61. A ramp is constructed with a parabolic shape such that the height y at any point on its surface is given in terms of its horizontal distance x from the bottom of the ramp (x = y = 0) by y =. A small block is to be set on the ramp. The maximum height from the bottom level at which the block can be kept on the ramp without sliding is (Given that μs= 0.5)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A Ramp Is Constructed With A Parabolic Shape

  1. 2.5 m
  2. 5 m
  3. 1.25 m
  4. 2.75 m

Answer: 3. 1.25 m

Question 62. Two blocks A and B of equal masses are sliding down along straight parallel lines on an inclined plane of 45°. Their coefficients of kinetic friction are μA= 0.2 and μB= 0.3 respectively. At t = 0, both the blocks are at rest and block A is \(\sqrt{2}\) 2 meters behind block B. The time and distance from the initial position where the front faces of the blocks come in line on the inclined plane as shown in the figure. (Use g = 10 ms-2.)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction Two Blocks A And B Of Equal Masses Are Sliding Down Along Straight Parallel Lines

  1. \(2 \mathrm{~s}, 8 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~m}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{2} \mathrm{~s}, 7 \mathrm{~m}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{2} \mathrm{~s}, 7 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~m}\)
  4. \(2 \mathrm{~s}, 7 / \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~m}\)

Answer: 1. \(2 \mathrm{~s}, 8 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 63. A block of mass m is on an inclined plane of angle θ. The coefficient of friction between the block and the plane is μ and tanθ > μ. The block is held stationary by applying a force P parallel to the plane. The direction of force pointing up the plane is taken to be positive. As P is varied from P1= mg(sinθ – μcosθ) to P2= mg(sinθ + μcosθ), the frictional force f versus P graph will look like :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Block Is Held Stationary By Applying A Force P Parallel To The Plane

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Block Is Held Stationary By Applying A Force P Parallel To The Plane.

Answer: 1

Question 64. A smooth block is released at rest on a 45º incline and then slides a distance d. The time taken to slide is n times as much to slide on a rough incline than on a smooth incline. The coefficient of friction is-

  1. \(\mu_s=1-\frac{1}{n^2}\)
  2. \(\mu_s=\sqrt{1-\frac{1}{n^2}}\)
  3. \(\mu_k=1-\frac{1}{n^2}\)
  4. \(\mu_k=\sqrt{1-\frac{1}{n^2}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\mu_k=1-\frac{1}{n^2}\)

Question 65. Two blocks m1= 4kg and m2= 2kg, are connected by a weightless rod on a plane having an inclination of 370. The coefficients of dynamic friction of m1 and m2 with the inclined plane are μ = 0.25. Then the common acceleration of the two blocks and the tension in the rod are:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Common Acceleration Of The Two Blocks And The Tension In The Rod

  1. 4 m/s2, T = 0
  2. 2 m/s2, T = 5 N
  3. 10 m/s2,T = 10 N
  4. 15 m/s2, T = 9N

Answer: 1. 4 m/s2, T = 0

Question 66. A force F = t is applied to block A as shown in the figure. The force is applied at t = 0 seconds when the system is at rest and the string is just straight without tension. Which of the following graphs gives the friction force between B and the horizontal surface as a function of time ‘t’?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Friction Force Between B And Horizontal Surface As A Function

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Friction Force Between B And Horizontal Surface As A Function.

Answer: 1

Question 67. If the coefficient of friction between A and B is μ, the maximum horizontal acceleration of the wedge A for which B will remain at rest w.r.t the wedge is :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Maximum Horizontal Acceleration Of The Wedge

  1. μ g
  2. \(g\left(\frac{1+\mu}{1-\mu}\right)\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\mu}\)
  4. \(g\left(\frac{1-\mu}{1+\mu}\right)\)

Answer: 2. \(g\left(\frac{1+\mu}{1-\mu}\right)\)

Question 68. What is the minimum stopping distance for a vehicle of mass m moving with speed v along a level road? If the coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road is μ.

  1. \(\frac{v^2}{2 \mu \mathrm{g}}\)
  2. \(\frac{2 v^2}{\mu \mathrm{g}}\)
  3. \(\frac{v^2}{\mu g}\)
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. \(\frac{v^2}{2 \mu \mathrm{g}}\)

Question 69. A block of mass m1= 1 kg and another mass m2= 2 kg, are placed together (see figure) on an inclined plane with angle of inclination θ. Various values of θ are given in List 1. The coefficient of friction between the block m1 and the plane is always zero. The coefficient of static and dynamic friction between the block m2 and the plane is equal to μ = 0.3. In List 2 expression for the friction on block m2 is given. Match the correct expression of the friction in List II with the angles given in List 1, and choose the correct option. The acceleration due to gravity is denoted by g.

[Useful information : tan(5.5°) ≈ 0.1 ; tan (11.5°) ≈ 0.2 ; tan(16.5º ≈ 0.3)]

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Acceleration Due To Gravity Is Denoted By G

List-1

P. θ = 5°

Q. θ = 10°

R. θ = 15°

S. θ = 20°

List-2

1. m2g sin θ

2. (m1+ m2)g sin θ

3. μm2g cos θ

4. μ(m1+ m2)g cos θ

Code:

  1. P-1, Q-1, R-1,S-3
  2. P-2, Q-2, R-2,S-3
  3. P-2, Q-2, R-2,S-4
  4. P-2, Q-2, R-3,S-3

Answer: 4. P-2, Q-2, R-3,S-3

Question 70. A block of mass m is in contact with cart C as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction A Block Of Mass M Is In Contact With The Cart C

The coefficient of static friction between the block and the cart is μ. The acceleration α of the cart that will prevent the block from falling satisfies

  1. \(\alpha>\frac{m g}{\mu}\)
  2. \(\alpha>\frac{g}{\mu m}\)
  3. \(\alpha \geq \frac{g}{\mu}\)
  4. \(\alpha<\frac{g}{\mu}\)

Answer: 3. \(\alpha \geq \frac{g}{\mu}\)

Question 71. A conveyor belt is moving at a constant speed of 2m/s. A box is gently dropped on it. The coefficient of friction between them is µ= 0.5. The distance that the box will move relative to the belt before coming to rest on it taking g = 10 ms-2, is :

  1. 1.2 m
  2. 0.6 m
  3. Zero
  4. 0.4 m

Answer: 4. 0.4 m

Question 72. A gramophone record is revolving with an angular velocity ω. A coin is placed at a distance r from the centre of the record. The static coefficient of friction is μ. The coin will revolve with the record if

  1. \(\mathrm{r}=\mu \mathrm{g} \omega^2\)
  2. \(r=\frac{\omega^2}{\mu g}\)
  3. \(r \leq \frac{\mu g}{\omega^2}\)
  4. \(r \geq \frac{\mu g}{\omega^2}\)

Answer: 3. \(r \leq \frac{\mu g}{\omega^2}\)

Question 73. A car of mass m is moving on a level circular track of radius R. If μs represents the static friction between the road and tyres of the car, the maximum speed of the car in circular motion is given by :

  1. \(\sqrt{\mu_s m R g}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{R g / \mu_s}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{m R g / \mu_s}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\mu_s R g}\)

Answer: 4. \(\sqrt{\mu_s R g}\)

Question 74. A system consists of three masses m1, m2 and m3 connected by a string passing over a pulley P. The mass m3 hangs freely and m2 and m1 are on a rough horizontal table (the coefficient of friction = μ). The pulley is frictionless and of negligible mass. The downward acceleration of mass m1 is : (Assume m1= m2= m3= m)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Pulley Is Frictionless And Of Negligible Mass

  1. \(\frac{g(1-g \mu)}{9}\)
  2. \(\frac{2 g \mu}{3}\)
  3. \(\frac{g(1-2 \mu)}{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{g(1-2 \mu)}{2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{g(1-2 \mu)}{3}\)

Question 75. A Block A of mass m1 rests on a horizontal table. A light string connected to it passes over a frictionless pulley at the edge of a table and from its other end, another block B of mass m2 is suspended. The coefficient of kinetic friction between the block and the table is μk. When the block A is sliding on the table, the tension in the string is :

  1. \(\frac{g(1-g \mu)}{9}\)
  2. \(\frac{2 g \mu}{3}\)
  3. \(\frac{g(1-2 \mu)}{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{g(1-2 \mu)}{2}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{2 g \mu}{3}\)

Question 76. A plank with a box on it at one end is gradually raised about the other end. As the angle of inclination with the horizontal reaches 30º the box starts to slip and slides 4.0 m down the plank in 4.0s. The coefficients of static and kinetic friction between the box and the plank will be, respectively :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Coefficients Of Static And Kinetic Friction Between The Box And The Plank Will Be Respectively

  1. 0.6 and 0.5
  2. 0.5 and 0.6
  3. 0.4 and 0.3
  4. 0.6 and 0.6

Answer: 1. 0.6 and 0.5

Question 77. Which one of the following statements is incorrect?

  1. Rolling friction is smaller than sliding friction.
  2. The coefficient of sliding friction has dimensions of length.
  3. Frictional force opposes the relative motion.
  4. The limiting value of static friction is directly proportional to normal reaction.

Answer: 2. Coefficient of sliding friction has dimensions of length.

Question 78. The minimum force required to start pushing a body up a rough (frictional coefficient μ) inclined plane is F1 while the minimum force needed to prevent it from sliding down is F2. If the inclined plane makes an F angle θ from the horizontal such that tan θ = 2μ then the ratio \(\frac{F_1}{F_2}\) is :

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. 4

Answer: 3. 3

Question 79. A block of mass m is placed on a surface with a vertical cross-section given by
y =\(\frac{x^3}{6}\). If the coefficient of friction is 0.5, the maximum height above the ground at which the block can be placed without slipping is:

  1. \(\frac{1}{6} m\)
  2. \(\frac{2}{3} m\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{3} m\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{2} m\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{1}{6} m\)

Question 80. Given in the figure are two blocks A and B of weight 20 N and 100 N, respectively. These are being pressed against a wall by a force F as shown. If the coefficient of friction between the blocks is 0.1 and between block B and the wall is 0.15, the frictional force applied by the wall on block B is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction If The Coefficient Of Friction Between The Blocks

  1. 100N
  2. 80N
  3. 120N
  4. 150N

Answer: 3. 120N

Question 81. Two masses m1 = 5kg and m2 = 10kg connected by an inextensible string over a frictionless pulley are moving as shown in the figure. The coefficient of friction of the horizontal surface is 0.15. The minimum weight m that should be put on top of m2 to stop the motion is :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Coefficient Of Friction Of Horizontal Surface

  1. 43.3 kg
  2. 10.3 kg
  3. 18.3 kg
  4. 27.3 kg

Answer: 4. 27.3 kg

Question 82. A block of mass 10 kg is kept on a rough inclined plane as shown in the figure. A force of 3N is applied to the block. The coefficient of static friction between the plane and the block is 0.6. What should be the minimum value of force P, such that the block does not move downward (take g = 10 m/s2)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Coefficient Of Static Friction Between The Plane And The Block

  1. 32 N
  2. 23 N
  3. 25 N
  4. 18 N

Answer: 1. 32 N

Question 83. A block kept on a rough inclined plane, as shown in the figure, remains at rest upto a maximum force of 2N down the inclined plane. The maximum external force up the inclined plane that does not move the block is 10 N. The coefficient of static friction between the block and the plane is : (Take g = 10 m/s2)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 6 Friction The Coefficient Of Static Friction Between The Block And The Plane

  1. \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
  3. \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Notes

Fluid Mechanics Definition Of Fluid

The term fluid refers to a substance that can flow and does not have a shape of its own. For example liquids and gases.

Fluid includes properties → (1) Density (2) Viscosity (3) Bulk modulus of elasticity (4) pressure (5) specific gravity

Pressure In A Fluid

The pressure p is defined as the magnitude of the normal force acting on a unit surface area.

P = \(\frac{\Delta F}{\Delta A}\)

ΔF = normal force on a surface area ΔA.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Pressure In A Fluid

The pressure is a scalar quantity. This is because hydrostatic pressure is transmitted equally in all directions when force is applied, which shows that a definite direction is not associated with pressure.

Thrust. The total force exerted by a liquid on any surface in contact with it is called the thrust of the liquid.

Note:
The normal force exerted by liquid at rest on a given surface in contact with it is called the thrust of liquid on that surface.

The normal force (or thrust) exerted by liquid at rest per unit area of the surface in contact with it, is called pressure of liquid or hydrostatic pressure.

If F is the normal force acting on a surface of area A in contact with liquid, then the pressure exerted by the liquid on this surface is P = F/A

  1. Units : N / m2 or Pascal (S.I) and Dyne/cm2(C.G.S)
  2. Dimension : (P) = \(\frac{[\mathrm{F}]}{[\mathrm{A}]}=\frac{\left[\mathrm{MLT}^{-2}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{L}^2\right]}=\left[\mathrm{ML}^{-1} \mathrm{~T}^{-2}\right]\)
  3. At a point pressure acts in all directions and a definite direction is not associated with it. So pressure is a tensor quantity.
  4. Atmospheric pressure: The gaseous envelope surrounding the earth is called the earth’s atmosphere and the pressure exerted by the atmosphere is called atmospheric pressure its value on the surface of the earth at sea level is nearly 1.013 × 105 N/m2 or Pascal in S.I. Other practical units of pressure are atmosphere, bar and torr (mm of Hg) 1 atm = 1.01 × 105 Pa = 1.01 bar = 760 torr.
    1. The atmospheric pressure is maximum at the surface of the earth and goes on decreasing as we move up into the earth’s
  5. If P0 is the atmospheric pressure then for a point at depth h below the surface of a liquid of density ρ. hydrostatic pressure P is given by P = P0+ hρg.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Atmospheric Pressure Then For A Point At Depth H

6. Hydrostatic pressure depends on the depth of the point below the surface (h). nature of liquid (ρ) and acceleration due to gravity (g) while it is independent of the amount of liquid, the shape of the container, or the cross-sectional area considered.

  • So if a given liquid is filled in vessels of different shapes to the same height, the pressure at the base in each vessel will be the same, though the volume or weight of the liquid in different vessels will be different.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Hydrostatic Pressure Depends On The Depth Of The Point

7. In a liquid at the same level, the pressure will be the same at all points, if not, due to the pressure difference the liquid cannot be at rest. This is why the height of the liquid is the same in vessels of different shapes containing different amounts of the same liquid at rest when they are in communication with each other.

Gauge pressure: The pressure difference between hydrostatic pressure P and atmospheric pressure P0 is called gauge pressure.

P – P0= hρg

Consequences Of Pressure

Railway tracks are laid on large-sized wooden or iron sleepers. This is because the weight (force) of the train is spread over a large area of the sleeper.

  1. This reduces the pressure acting on the ground and hence prevents the yielding of ground under the weight of the train.
  2. A sharp knife is more effective in cutting objects than a blunt knife. The pressure exerted = Force/area. The sharp knife transmits force over a small area as compared to the blunt knife. Hence the pressure exerted in the case of a sharp knife is more than in the case of a blunt knife.
  3. A camel walks easily on sand but a man cannot in spite of the fact that a camel is much heavier than a man.

This is because the area of camel’s feet is large as compared to man’s feet. So the pressure exerted by the camel on the sand is very small as compared to the pressure exerted by man. Due to large pressure, sand under the feet of man yields, and hence he cannot walk easily on sand.

Variation Of Pressure With Height

Assumptions:

  1. Unaccelerated liquid
  2. Uniform density of liquid
  3. Uniform gravity

The weight of the small element dh is balanced by the excess pressure. It means

⇒ \(\frac{d p}{d h}=\rho g\)

⇒ \(\int_{P_a}^P d p=\rho g \int_0^h d h\)

⇒ P = Pa + ρgh

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Weight Of The Small Element dh Is Balanced By The Excess Pressure

Pascal’S Law

if the pressure in a liquid is changed at a particular, point the change is transmitted to the entire liquid without being diminished in magnitude. In the above case if Pa is increased by some amount then P must increase to maintain the difference (P – Pa) = hρg. This is Pascal’s Law which states that Hydraulic lift is a common application of Pascal’s Law.

1. Hydraulic press.

⇒ \(p=\frac{f}{a}=\frac{W}{A} \text { or } f=\frac{W}{A} \times a\)

as A >> a then f<<W…

This can be used to lift a heavy load placed on the platform of a larger piston or to press the things placed between the piston and the heavy platform. The work done by applied force is equal to the change in the potential energy of the weight in a hydraulic press.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Hydraulic Press

Density: In a fluid, at a point, density ρ is defined as :

⇒ \(\rho=\lim _{\Delta V \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta m}{\Delta V}=\frac{d m}{d V}\)

  1. In the case of a homogenous isotropic substance, it has no directional properties, so is a scalar.
  2. It has dimensions (ML–and S.I. unit kg/m3 while C.G.S. unit g/cc with 1g /cc = 103 kg/m3
  3. The density of a substance means the ratio of the mass of a substance to the means the ratio of mass of a body to the volume of the body. So for a solid body. Density of body = Density of substance While for a hollow body, the density of the body is lesser than that of substance [As Vbody > Vsub.]
  4. When immiscible liquids of different densities are poured into a container, the liquid of the highest density will be at the bottom while that of the lowest density at the top, and interfaces will be plane.
  5. Sometimes instead of density, we use the term relative density or specific gravity which is defined as:

⇒ \(\mathrm{RD}=\frac{\text { Density of body }}{\text { Density of water }}\)

6. If m1 mass of liquid of density ρ1 and m2 mass of density ρ2 are mixed. then as
m = m1+ m2 and V = (m1/ ρ+ (m2/ ρ2)

[As V = m/ρ]

7. If  V1 volume of liquid of density ρ1 and V2 volume of liquid of density ρ2are mixed, then as m = ρ1V1+ ρ2V2 and V = V1+ V2[As ρ = m/V]

If V1= V2= V ρ11 + ρ2)/2 = Arithmetic Mean

Question 1. A body of one kg is placed on two objects of negligible mass. Calculate pressure due to force on its bottom.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Body Of One kg Placed On Two Object Of Negligible Mass

Answer:

⇒ \(P=\frac{F}{A}=\frac{m g}{A}\)

⇒ \(P_1=\frac{1 \times 10 \mathrm{~N}}{10 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}^2}=10^4 \mathrm{~N} / \mathrm{m}^2\)

⇒ \(P_2=\frac{1 \times 10 \mathrm{~N}}{2 \times 10^{-4}}=5 \times 10^4\left(=5 p_1\right)\)

Question 2. For a hydraulic system, A car of mass 2000 kg standing on the platform of Area 10m2 while the area other side platform 10 cm2 finds the mass required to balance the car
Answer:

According to the Pascal’s Law

P1 = P2 \(\frac{m_{\text {car }} g}{A_{\text {car }}}=\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\mathrm{A}}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{m}=\left(\frac{\mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{A}_{\text {car }}}\right) \times \mathrm{m}_{\text {car }}=\frac{10 \mathrm{~cm}^2}{10 \mathrm{~m}^2} \times 2000 \mathrm{~kg}\)

= 0.2 kg

= 200 gm

Question 3. If two liquids of the same masses but densities of P1 and P2 respectively are mixed, then the density of the mixture is given by

  1. \(\rho=\frac{\rho_1+\rho_2}{2}\)
  2. \(\rho=\frac{\rho_1+\rho_2}{2 \rho_1 \rho_2}\)
  3. \(\rho=\frac{2 \rho_1 \rho_2}{\rho_1+\rho_2}\)
  4. \(\rho=\frac{\rho_1 \rho_2}{\rho_1+\rho_2}\)

Answer:

ρ = \(\frac{\text { Total mass }}{\text { Totalvolume }}\)

⇒ \(\frac{2 m}{V_1+V_2}=\frac{2 m}{m\left(\frac{1}{\rho_1+\rho_2}\right)}\)

∴ \(\rho=\frac{2 \rho_1 \rho_2}{\rho_1+\rho_2}\)

Question 4. If two liquids of the same masses but different densities ρ1 and ρ2 are mixed, then the density of the mixture is given by

  1. \(\rho=\frac{\rho_1+\rho_2}{2}\)
  2. \(\rho=\frac{\rho_1+\rho_2}{2 \rho_1 \rho_2}\)
  3. \(\rho=\frac{2 \rho_1 \rho_2}{\rho_1+\rho_2}\)
  4. \(\rho=\frac{\rho_1 \rho_2}{\rho_1+\rho_2}\)

Answer:

ρ = \(\frac{\text { Total mass }}{\text { Total volume }}\)

⇒ \(\frac{m_1+m_2}{2 V} \frac{V\left(\rho_1+\rho_2\right)}{2 V}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\rho_1+\rho_2}{2}\)

Question 5. If pressure at the half depth of a lake is equal to 2/3 of pressure at the bottom of the lake, then the depth of the lake [ρwater = 103 kg m-3, P1= 105 N/m2]

  1. 10 m
  2. 20 m
  3. 60 m
  4. 30 m

Answer: Pressure at the bottom of the lake = P0+hpg

Pressure at half the depth of a lake = \(P_0+h \rho g\)

According to given condition \(P_0+\frac{1}{2} h \rho g=\frac{2}{3}\left(P_0+h \rho g\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{3} P_0=\frac{1}{6} h \rho g\)

⇒ \(h=\frac{2 P_o}{\rho g}=\frac{2 \times 10^5}{10^3 \times 10}=20 \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 6. A uniform tapering vessel is filled with a liquid of uniform density 900 kg/m3. The force that acts on the base of the vessel due to the liquid is (g = 10 ms-2)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Uniformly Tapering Vessel Is Filled With A Liquid Of Uniform Density

  1. 3.6 N
  2. 7.2 N
  3. 9.0 N
  4. 14.4 N

Answer: Force acting on the base

F = P × A = hdgA = 0.4 × 900 × 10 × 2 × 10-3 = 7.2N

Question 7. The area of the cross-section of the two arms of a hydraulic press is 1 cm2 and 10 cm2 respectively (figure). A force of 5 N is applied to the water in the thinner arm. What force should be applied to the water in the thicker arms so that the water may remain in equilibrium?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Water In The Thicker Arms So That The Water May Remain In Equilibrium

Answer:

In equilibrium, the pressures at the two surfaces should be equal as they lie in the same horizontal level. If the atmospheric pressure is P and a force F is applied to maintain the equilibrium, the pressures are

⇒ \(P_0+\frac{5 \mathrm{~N}}{1 \mathrm{~cm}^2}\) and \([P_0+\frac{F}{10 \mathrm{~cm}^2}\) respectively. This gives F = 50 N.

Hydraulic Brake: Hydraulic brake system is used in automobiles to retard the motion.

Hydrostatic Paradox

Pressure is directly proportional to depth and by applying Pascal’s law it can be seen that pressure is independent of the size and shape of the containing vessel. (In all three cases the heights are the same).

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Hydrostatic Paradox

PA= PB= PC

Atmospheric Pressure

Atmospheric Pressure Definition: The atmospheric pressure at any point is numerically equal to the weight of a column of air of a unit cross-sectional area extending from that point to the top of the atmosphere.

At 0ºC, the density of mercury = 13.595 g cm-3, and at sea level, g = 980.66 cm s-2

Now P = hρg.

Atmospheric pressure = 76 × 13.595 × 980.66 dyne cm-2 = 1.013 × 10-5 N-m2(pa)

Height of Atmosphere

The standard atmospheric pressure is 1.013 × 105 Pa (N m-2). If the atmosphere of the earth has a uniform density ρ = 1.30 kg m-3, then the height h of the air column which exerts the standard atmospheric pressure is given by

⇒ hρg = 1.013 × 105

h = \(\frac{1.013 \times 10^5}{\rho g}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1.013 \times 10^5}{1.13 \times 9.8}\mathrm{~m}\)

m = 7.95 × 103 m ~ 8 km. 1.13 9.8

In fact, the density of air is not constant but decreases with height. The density becomes half at about 6 km high,\(\frac{1}{4}\)th at about 12 km, and so on.

Therefore, we can not draw a clear-cut line above which there is no atmosphere. Anyhow the atmosphere extends upto 1200 km. This limit is considered for all practical purposes.

Measurement Of Atmospheric Pressure

1. Mercury Barometer.

To measure the atmospheric pressure experimentally, Torricelli invented a mercury barometer in 1643.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Mercury Barometer

pa= hρg

The pressure exerted by a mercury column of 1mm

high is called 1 Torr.

1 Torr = 1 mm of mercury column

2. Open tube Manometer

An open-tube manometer is used to measure the pressure gauge. When equilibrium is reached, the pressure at the bottom of a left limb is equal to the pressure at the bottom of the right limb.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Open Tube Manometer

i.e. p + y1 ρg = pa+ y2 ρg

p – pa= ρg (y2– y1)= ρgy

p – pa= ρg (y2– y1)= ρgy

p = absolute pressure, p – pa= gauge pressure.

Thus, knowing y and ρ (density of liquid), we can measure the gauge pressure.

Question 1. A barometer tube reads 76 cm of mercury. If the tube is gradually inclined at an angle of 60° vertically, keeping the open end immersed in the mercury reservoir, the length of the mercury column will be

  1. 152 cm
  2. 76 cm
  3. 38 cm
  4. \(38 \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Answer: cos 60º = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\ell}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Barometer Tube Reads 76 cm Of Mercury The Length Of The Mercury Column

⇒ \(\ell=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\cos 60^{\circ}}=\frac{76}{1 / 2}\)

∴ l = 152 cm

Question 2. When a large bubble rises from the bottom of a lake to the surface. Its radius doubles. If atmospheric pressure is equal to that of a column of water height H, then the depth of the lake is

  1. H
  2. 2H
  3. 7H
  4. 8H

Answer:

P1V1= P2V2

⇒ \(\left(P_{\circ}+h \rho g\right) \times \frac{4}{3} \pi r^2=P_0 \times \frac{4}{3} \pi(2 r)^3\)

Question 3. A beaker containing liquid is kept inside a big closed jar If the air inside the jar is continuously pumped out, the pressure in the liquid near the bottom of the liquid will

  1. Increase
  2. Decreases
  3. Remain constant
  4. First decrease and then increase

Answer: Total pressure at (near) bottom of the liquid

P = P0+ hρg

As air is continuously pumped out from the jar (container), P0 decreases and hence P decreases.

Question 4. Write the pressure inside the tube

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Write The Pressure Inside The Tube

Answer:

⇒ \(P_A=P_0+\rho g \frac{8}{100}=P_B\)…(i)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Write The Pressure Inside The Tube.

⇒ \(P_{\text {tube }}=P_B-\rho g \frac{6}{100}\)…

(1) and (2)

⇒ \(P_{\text {tube }}=\left(P_0+\rho g \frac{8}{100}\right)-\rho g \frac{6}{100}\)

⇒ \(P_{\text {tube }}=\left(P_0+\frac{\rho g}{50}\right)\)

⇒ \(P_0+\frac{\rho g}{50}=P\)

Question 5. Find the pressure inside the tube

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Pressure Inside The Tube

Answer:

⇒ \(P_A=\left(P_0+\rho g h\right)+3 \rho g(2 h)=P_B\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Pressure Inside The Tube.

⇒ \(P_{\text {tube }}=P_B-8 \rho g\left(\frac{2 h}{3}-\frac{h}{4}\right)\)

⇒ \(P_0+\rho g h+6 \rho g h-8 \rho g\left(\frac{5}{12} h\right)\)

⇒ \(P_0+\rho g h+6 \rho g h-\frac{10}{3} \rho g h\)

⇒ \(P_0+\frac{(21-10) g g h}{3}=P_0+\frac{11}{3} \rho g h\)

⇒ \(P_0+\frac{11}{3} \rho g h\)

Question 6. The manometer shown below is used to measure the difference in water level between the two tanks. Calculate this difference for the conditions indicated.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Manometer

Answer:

pa+ h1ρg – 40ρ1g + 40ρg = pa+ h2ρg

h2ρg – h1ρg = 40 ρg – 40 ρ1g

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Manometer.

as ρ1= 0.9ρ

(h2– h1)ρg = 40ρg – 36ρg

h2– h1= 4 cm

3. Water Barometer.

Let us suppose water is used in the barometer instead of mercury.

hρg = 1.013 × 105 or h = \(\mathrm{h}=\frac{1.013 \times 10^5}{\rho \mathrm{g}}\)

The height of the water column in the tube will be 10.3 m. Such a long tube cannot be managed easily, thus, a water barometer is not feasible.

Question 7. In a given U-tube (open at one end) find out the relation between p and pa. Given d2= 2 × 13.6 gm/cm3 d1= 13.6 gm/cm3

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics In A U Tube Relation Between P And Pa

Answer: Pressure in a liquid at the same level is the same i.e. at A – A–, pa+d2yg+xd1g = p

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics In A U Tube Pressure In A Liquid At Same Llevel

In C.G.S.

pa+ 13.6 × 2 × 25 × g + 13.6 × 26 × g = p

pa+ 13.6 × g [50 + 26] = p

2pa= p   [pa= 13.6 × g × 76]

Question 8. The truck starts from rest with an acceleration of 2.5 ms-2 then the angle (acute) between the vertical and surface at the liquid, In equilibrium (assume that liquid is at with respect to the truck)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Truck Start From Rest With Acceleration

  1. sinθ = \(\frac{4}{\sqrt{17}}\)
  2. cosθ = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{17}}\)
  3. tanθ = 4
  4. None of these

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Angle Acute Between Vertical And Surface At The Liquid

Answer :

Consider a particle on the liquid surface

mg cos θ = ma cos θ

gcosθ = a sinθ

tanθ = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{a}}\)

tanθ = \(\frac{10}{2.5}\) = 4

ABC

Question 9. In the previous question pressure at points A, B, and C

  1. PA = PB = PC
  2. PA > PB > PC
  3. PA < PB < PC
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. PA > PB > PC

Question 10. In the previous question, three different points, above the points A, B, and C of an accelerated liquid surface in equilibrium called A’ B’, C’ then the pressure at the points A’ B’ and C’

  1. PA‘ = PB‘ = PC
  2. PA‘ > PB‘ > PC
  3. PA‘ < PB‘ < PC
  4. Po = atmosphere pressure

Answer: 2. PA‘ > PB‘ > PC

Question 11. Highest pressure at the point inside the liquid :

  1. A
  2. C
  3. Pressure at A, B, and C are equal, and the highest
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. A

Question 12. The slope of the line on which pressure is the same considers the direction of acceleration of the truck as the X-axis

  1. –4
  2. –0.25
  3. –2.5
  4. \(-\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: 4. \(-\frac{1}{4}\)

Archimedes’ Principle

According to this principle, when a body is immersed wholly or partially in a fluid, it loses its weight which is equal to the weight of the fluid displaced by the body.

Up thrust = buoyancy = Vρlg

V = volume submerged

ρl= density of liquid.

Relation between the density of solid and liquid

weight of the floating solid = weight of the liquid displaced

V1ρ1g = V2ρ2 g

⇒ \(\frac{\rho_1}{\rho_2}=\frac{V_2}{V_1}\)

or \(\frac{\text { Density of solid }}{\text { Density of liquid }}=\frac{\text { Volume of the immersed portion of the solid }}{\text { Total Volume of the solid }}\)

This relationship is valid in accelerating fluid also. Thus, the forces acting on the body are :

  1. Its weight is Mg which acts downward and
  2. Net upward thrust on the body or the buoyant force (mg)

Hence the apparent weight of the body = Mg – mg = weight of the body – weight of the displaced liquid. Or Actual Weight of body – Apparent weight of body = weight of the liquid displaced.

  • The point through which the upward thrust or the buoyant force acts when the body is immersed in the liquid is called its center of buoyancy. This will coincide with the center of gravity if the solid body is homogeneous.
  • On the other hand, if the body is not homogeneous, then the center of gravity may not lie on the line of the upward thrust and hence there may be a torque that causes rotation in the body.
  • If the center of gravity of the body and the center of buoyancy lie on the same straight line, the body is in equilibrium.
  • If the center of gravity of the body does not coincide with the center of buoyancy (i.e., the line of upthrust), then torque acts on the body. This torque causes the rotational motion of the body.

Floatation

1. Translatory equilibrium: When a body of density p and volume V is immersed in a liquid of density σ, the forces acting on the body are

Weight of body W = mg = Vρg, acting vertically downwards through the center of gravity of the body. Upthrust force = Vσg acting vertically upwards through the center of gravity of the displaced liquid i.e., the center of buoyancy.

If the density is greater than that of liquid p>σ

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics If Density Of Body Is Greater Than That Of Liquid

Weight will be more than upthrust so the body will sink

If density is equal to that of liquid p>σ

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics If Density Of Body Is Equal To That Of Liquid

Weight will be equal to upthrust so the body will float fully submerged in neutral equilibrium with its top surface just at the top of a liquid

If the density of the body is lesser than that of liquid p>σ

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics If Density Of Body Is Lesser Than That Of Liquid

Weight will be less than upthrust so the body will, move upwards and in equilibrium will float and be partially immersed in the liquid such that,

W = Vin σg

⇒ Vρg = Vin σg

Vρ = Vin σ

Where Vin is the volume of a body in the liquid

  1. A body will float in liquid only and only if ρ ≤ σ
  2. In the case of floating the weight of the body = upthrust
  3. So WApp = Actual weight – upthrust = 0
  4. In the case of floating Vρg = Vinσg

So the equilibrium of floating bodies is unaffected by variations in g though both thrust and weight depend on g.

Rotatory Equilibrium: When a floating body is slightly tied from the equilibrium position, the center of buoyancy B shifts. The vertical line passing through the new center of buoyancy B’ and the initial vertical line meet at a point M called meta-center.

If the meta-center M is above the center of gravity the couple due to forces at G (weight of body W) and at B’ (upthrust) tends to bring the body back body the meta the center must always be higher than the center of gravity of the body.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Rotatory Equilibrium

  • However, if the meta-center goes CG, the couple due to forces at G and B’ tends to topple the floating body.
  • That is why a wooden log cannot be made to float vertically in water or a boat is likely to capsize if the sitting passengers stand on it. In these situations, CG becomes higher than MG and so the body will topple if slightly tilted.

Question 1. A concrete sphere of radius R has a cavity of radius r which is packed with sawdust. The specific gravities of concrete and sawdust are respectively 2.4 and 0.3 for this sphere to float with its entire volume submerged under water. A ratio of the mass of concrete to the mass of sawdust will be

  1. 8
  2. 4
  3. 3
  4. Zero

Answer: Let specific gravities of concrete and sawdust be ρ1 and ρ2 respectively.

According to the principle of floatation weight of the whole sphere = upthrust on the sphere

⇒ \(\frac{4}{5} \pi\left(R^3-r^3\right) \rho_1 g+\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3 \rho_2 g=\frac{4}{3} \pi R^3 \times 1 \times g\)

⇒ \(R^3 \rho_1-r^3 \rho_1+r^3 \rho_2=R^3\)

⇒ \(R^3\left(\rho_1-1\right)=r^3\left(\rho_1-\rho_2\right)=\frac{R^3}{r^3}=\frac{\rho_1-\rho_2}{\rho_1-1}\)

⇒ \(\frac{R^3-r^3}{r^3}=\frac{\rho_1-\rho_2-\rho_1+1}{\rho_1-1}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\left(R^3-r^3\right) \rho_1}{r^3 \rho_2}=\left(\frac{1-\rho_2}{\rho_1-1}\right) \frac{\rho_1}{\rho_2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\text { Mass of concrete }}{\text { Mass of saw dust }}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{1-0.3}{2.4-1}\right) \times \frac{2.4}{0.3}=4\)

Question 2. A metallic block of density 5 gm cm-3 and having dimensions 5 cm × 5 cm × 5cm is weighed in water. Its apparent weight will be

  1. 5 × 5× 5 × 5 gf
  2. 4 × 4 × 4 × 4 gf
  3. 5 × 4× 4 × 4 gf
  4. 4 × 5× 5 × 5 gf

Answer: Apparent weight

= V (ρ – σ) g = 1 × b × h × (5 –1) × g

= 5 × 5 × 5 × 4 × g

Dyne = 4 × 5 × 5 × 5 gf

Question 3. A cubical block is floating in a liquid with half of its volume immersed in the liquid. When the whole system accelerates upwards with an acceleration of g/3, the fraction of volume immersed in the liquid will be

  1. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{3}{8}\)
  3. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: Fraction of volume immersed in the liquid \(V_{\text {in }}=\left(\frac{\rho}{\sigma}\right) V\)

i.e. it depends upon the densities of the block and liquid. So there will be no change in it if the system moves upward or downward with constant velocity or some acceleration.

Question 4. A silver ingot weighing 2.1 kg is held by a string so as to be completely immersed in a liquid of relative density 0.8. The relative density of silver is 10.5. The tension in the string in kg-wt is

  1. 1.6
  2. 1.94
  3. 3.1
  4. 5.25

Answer: T = Apparent weight = V(ρ – σ) g = \(\frac{M}{\rho}(\rho-\sigma) g\)

T = \(M\left(1-\frac{\sigma}{\rho}\right) g=2.1\left(1-\frac{0.8}{10.5}\right) g=1.94 \mathrm{gN}\)

T = 1.94 Kg-wt

Question 5. A sample of metal weighs 210 gm in air, 180 gm in water and 120 gm in liquid. The density (RD) of

  1. Metal is 3
  2. Metal is 7
  3. Liquid is 3
  4. Liquid is \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer: Density of metal = ρ. Density of liquid = σ

If V is the volume of the sample then according to the problem

210 = Vρg ……(1)

180 = V (ρ – 1)g ……(2)

120 = V (ρ – σ)g ……(3)

By solving (1),(2) and (3) we get ρ = 7 and σ = 3.

Question 6. A cubical block of wood of edge 3 cm floats in water. The lower surface of the cube just touches the free end of a vertical spring fixed at the bottom of the pot. Find the maximum weight that can be put on the block without wetting it. The density of wood = 800 kg/m3 and the spring constant of the spring = 50 N/m. Take g = 10 m/s2.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Cubical Block Of Wood Of Edge 3 cm Floats In Water

Answer:

The specific gravity of the block = 0.8. Hence the height inside water = 3 cm × 0.8 = 2.4 cm. The height outside after = 3 cm – 2.4 = 0.6 cm. Suppose the maximum weight that can be put without wetting it is W. The block in this case is completely immersed in the water. The volume of the displaced water

= volume of the block = 27 × 10-6 m3.

Hence, the force of buoyancy

= (27 × 10-6 m3)× 1(1000 kg/m3)× (10 m/s2)= 0.27 N.

The spring is compressed by 0.6 cm and hence the upward force exerted by the spring = 50 N/m × 0.6 cm = 0.3 N.

The force of buoyancy and the spring force taken together balance the weight of the block plus the weight W put on the block. The weight of the block is

W′ = (27 × 10-6 m) × (800 kg/m× (10 m/s= 0.22 N.

Thus, W = 0.27 N + 0.3 N – 0.22 N

= 0.35 N.

Pressure In Case Of Accelerating Fluid

Liquid Placed In Elevator:

When the elevator accelerates upward with acceleration a0 then the pressure in the fluid, at depth ‘h’ may be given by,

p = hρ [g + a0]

and force of buoyancy, B = m (g + a0)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Liquid Placed In Elevator

The free surface of a liquid in horizontal acceleration :

tan θ = \(\frac{a_0}{\mathrm{~g}}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Free Surface Of Liquid In Horizontal Acceleration

p1– p2= lρ a0 where p1 and p2 are pressures at point 1 and 2. Then h1– h

= \(\frac{\ell \mathrm{a}_0}{\mathrm{~g}}\)

Question 1. An open rectangular tank 1.5 m wide 2m deep and 2m long is half filled with water. It is accelerated horizontally at 3.27 m/sec2 in the direction of its length. Determine the depth of water at each end of the tank. [g = 9.81 m/sec2]

Answer: tan θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{a}}{\mathrm{g}}=\frac{1}{3}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics An Open Rectangular Tank It Is Accelerated Horizontally In The Direction Of Its Length

Depth at the corner ‘A’

= 1 – 1.5 tanθ

= 0.5 m

Depth at corner ‘B’

= 1 + 1.5 tan θ = 1.5 m

The free surface of a liquid in the case of a rotating cylinder.

h = \(\frac{v^2}{2 g}=\frac{\omega^2 r^2}{2 g}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Free Surface Of Liquid In Case Of Rotating Cylinder

Streamline Flow

The path taken by a particle in flowing fluid is called its line of flow. In the case of steady flow, all the particles passing through a given point follow the same path and hence we have a unique line of flow passing through a given point which is also called streamline.

Characteristics Of Streamline

1. A tangent at any point on the streamline gives the direction of the velocity of the fluid particle at that point.

2. Two streamlines never intersect each other.

  1. Laminar Flow: If the liquid flows over a horizontal surface in the form of layers of different velocities, then the flow of liquid is called Laminar flow. The particles of one layer do not go to another layer. In general, Laminar flow is a streamlined flow.
  2. Turbulent Flow: The flow of fluid in which the velocity of all particles crossing a given point is not the same and the motion of the fluid becomes disorderly or irregular is called turbulent flow.

Reynold’S Number

According to Reynold, the critical velocity (vc) of a liquid flowing through a long narrow tube is

  1. Directly proportional to the coefficient of viscosity (η) of the liquid.
  2. Inversely proportional to the density ρ of the liquid and
  3. Inversely proportional to the diameter (D) of the tube.

That is \(v_c \propto \frac{\eta}{\rho D} \quad \text { or } \quad v_c=\frac{R \eta}{\rho D} \quad \text { or }=\frac{v_c \rho D}{\eta}\) ……………(1)

where R is the Reynold number.

If R < 2000, the flow of liquid is streamlined or laminar. If R > 3000, the flow is turbulent. If R lies between 2000 and 3000, the flow is unstable and may change from streamlined flow to turbulent flow.

Equation Of Continuity

The equation of continuity expresses the law of conservation of mass in fluid dynamics.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Equation Of Continuity Expresses The Law Of Conservation Of Mass In Fluid Dynamics

a1v1 = a2v2

In general av = constant. This is called an equation of continuity and states that as the area of the cross-section of the tube of flow becomes larger, the liquid’s (fluid) speed becomes smaller and vice-versa.

Illustrations –

  1. The velocity of the liquid is greater in the narrow tube as compared to the velocity of the liquid in a broader tube.
  2. Deep waters run slowly can be explained by the equation of continuity i.e., av = constant. Where water is deep the area of cross-section increases hence velocity decreases.

Energy Of A Liquid

A liquid can possess three types of energies :

Kinetic Energy: The energy possessed by a liquid due to its motion is called kinetic energy. The kinetic energy of a liquid of mass m moving with speed v is \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\)

∴ K.E. per unit mass = \(\frac{\frac{1}{2} m v^2}{m}=\frac{1}{2} v^2\)

Potential Energy: The potential energy of a liquid of mass m at a height h is m g h.

∴ P.E. per unit mass = \(\frac{\mathrm{mgh}}{\mathrm{m}}=\mathrm{gh}\)

Pressure Energy: The energy possessed by a liquid by virtue of its pressure is called pressure energy. Consider a vessel fitted with a piston at one side (figure).

  • Let this vessel is filled with a liquid. Let ‘A’ be the area of the cross-section of the piston and P be the pressure experienced by the liquid. The force acting on the piston = PA
  • If dx is the distance moved by the piston, then work done by the force = PA dx = PdV where dV = Adx, the volume of the liquid swept.

This work is equal to the pressure energy of the liquid.

∴ Pressure energy of liquid in volume dV = PdV.

The mass of the liquid having volume dV = ρdV,

ρ is the density of the liquid.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Pressure Energy

∴ Pressure energy per unit mass of the liquid = \(\frac{P d V}{\rho d V}=\frac{P}{\rho}\)

Bernoulli’s Theorem

It states that the sum of pressure energy, kinetic energy, and potential energy per unit mass or per unit volume or per unit weight is always constant for an ideal (i.e. incompressible and non-viscous) fluid having stream-line flow.

i.e. \(\frac{P}{\rho}+\frac{1}{2} v^2+g h\)= constant.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Bernoullis Theorem

Question 1. An incompressible liquid flows through a horizontal tube as shown in the following fig. Then the velocity υ of the fluid is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics An Incompressible Liquid Flows Through A Horizontal Tube Velocity V

  1. v = 2v1 + v2
  2. v = v1+ v2
  3. \(v=\frac{v_1 v_2}{v_1+v_2}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{v}=\sqrt{\mathrm{v}_1^2+\mathrm{v}_2^2}\)

Answer: 1. v = 2v1+ v2

m = m1+ m2

ρV = ρV1+ ρV2

ρAv = ρ2Av1+ ρAv2

v = 2v1+ v2

Question 2. Water enters through end A with speed υ1 and leaves through end B with speed υ2 of a cylindrical tube AB. The tube is always completely filled with water. In case I it is horizontal and in case II it is vertical with end A upwards and in case III it is vertical with end B upwards. We have υ1= υ2

  1. Case 1
  2. Case 2
  3. Case 3
  4. Each case

Answer: This happens in accordance with an equation of continuity and this equation was derived on the principle of conservation of mass and it is true in every case, either tube remains horizontal or vertical.

Question 3. Water flows in a horizontal tube as shown in the figure. The pressure of water changes by 600 N/m2 between A and B where the areas of cross-section are 30cm2 and 15cm2 respectively. Find the rate of flow of water through the tube.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Water Flows In A Horizontal Tube

Answer:

Let the velocity at A = vA and that at B = vB.

By the equation of continuity, \(\frac{v_B}{v_A}=\frac{30 \mathrm{~cm}^2}{15 \mathrm{~cm}^2}=2\)

By Bernoulli’s equation,

⇒ \(P_A+\frac{1}{2} \rho v_A^2=P_B+\frac{1}{2} \rho v_B^2\)

or \(P_A-P_B=\frac{1}{2} \rho\left(2 v_A\right)^2-\frac{1}{2} \rho v_A^2=\frac{3}{2} \rho v_A^2\)

or \(600 \frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{m}^2}=\frac{3}{2}\left(1000 \frac{\mathrm{kg}}{\mathrm{m}^3}\right) \mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{A}}^2\)

or \(v_{\mathrm{A}}=\sqrt{0.4 \mathrm{~m}^2 / \mathrm{s}^2}\)

=0.63 m/s

The rate of flow = (30 cm2)(0.63 m/s) = 1800 cm3/s.

Application Of Bernoulli’s Theorem

  1. Bunsen burner
  2. Lift of an airfoil.
  3. Spinning of a ball (Magnus effect)
  4. The sprayer.
  5. A ping-pong ball in an air jet
  6. Torricelli’s theorem (speed of efflux)

At point A, P1= P, v1= 0 and h1= h

At point B, P2= P, v2= v (speed of efflux) and h = 0

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Bunsen Burner

Using Bernoulli’s theorem \(\frac{P_1}{\rho}+g h_1+\frac{1}{2} v_1^2=\frac{P_2}{\rho}+g h_2=\frac{1}{2} v_2^2\)

we have \(\frac{P}{\rho}+g h+0=\frac{P}{\rho}+0+\frac{1}{2} v^2\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} v^2=g h \text { or } v=\sqrt{2 g h}\)

Venturi meter: 

It is a gauge put on a flow pipe to measure the flow speed of a liquid. Let the liquid of density ρ be flowing through a pipe of area of cross-section A1.

Let A2 be the area of the cross section at the throat and a manometer is attached as shown in the figure. Let v1 and P1 be the velocity of the flow and pressure at point A, and v2 and P2 be the corresponding quantities at point B.

Using Bernoulli’s Theorem:

⇒ \(\frac{P_1}{\rho}+g h_1+\frac{1}{2} v_1^2=\frac{P_2}{\rho}+g h_2+\frac{1}{2} v_2^2\), we get

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Venturimeter

⇒ \(\frac{P_1}{\rho}+g h+\frac{1}{2} v_1^2=\frac{P_2}{\rho}+g h+\frac{1}{2} v_2^2\) (Since h1=h2=h)

or \(\left(P_1-P_2\right)=\frac{1}{2} \rho\left(v_2^2-v_1^2\right)\) ….

According to the continuity equation, A1v1= A2v2

or \(v_2=\left(\frac{A_1}{A_2}\right) v_1\)

Substituting the value of v2 in the equation we have

\(\left(P_1-P_2\right)=\frac{1}{2} \rho\left[\left(\frac{A_1}{A_2}\right)^2 v_1^2-v_1^2\right] \frac{1}{2} \rho v_1{ }^2\left[\left(\frac{A_1}{A_2}\right)^2-1\right]\)

Since A1> A2, therefore, P1> P2

or \(v_1^2=\frac{2\left(P_1-P_2\right)}{\rho\left[\left(\frac{A_1}{A_2}\right)^2-1\right]}\)

⇒ \(\frac{2 A_2^2\left(P_1-P_2\right)}{\rho\left(A_1^2-A_2^2\right)}\)

where (P1– P2)= ρmgh and h is the difference in heights of the liquid levels in the two tubes.

⇒ \(v_1=\sqrt{\frac{2 \rho_{\mathrm{m}} g h}{\rho\left[\left(\frac{A_1}{A_2}\right)^2-1\right]}}\)

The flow rate (R) i.e., the volume of the liquid flowing per second is given by R = v1A1.

During A wind storm: The velocity of air just above the roof is large so according to Bernoulli’s theorem, the pressure just above the roof is less than the pressure below the roof. Due to this pressure difference an upward force acts on the roof which is blown off without damaging other parts of the house.

When a fast-moving train crosses a person standing near a railway track, the person has a tendency to fall towards the train.

This is because a fast-moving train produces a large velocity in the air between a person and the train and hence pressure decreases according to Bernoulli’s theorem. Thus the excess pressure on the other side pushes the person towards the train.

Question 1. Water flows through a horizontal tube of variable cross-section (figure). The area of a cross-section at A and B are 4 mm2 and 2 mm2 respectively. If 1 cc of water enters per second through A, find

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Water Flows Through A Horizontal Tube Of Variable Cross Section

  1. The speed of the water at A,
  2. The speed of the water at B and
  3. The pressure difference PA– PB.

Answer: A1v1= A2v2

⇒ \(\rho_1+\frac{1}{2} \rho v_1^2+0\)

⇒ \(r_2+\frac{1}{2} \rho v_2^2+\rho g h\)

  1. 25 cm/s,
  2. 50 cm/s
  3. 94 N/m2

Question 2. The velocity of the liquid coming out of a small hole of a large vessel containing two different liquids of densities 2ρ and ρ as shown in the figure is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Velocity Of The Liquid Coming Out Of A Small Hole Of A Large Vessel

  1. \(\sqrt{6 g h}\)
  2. \(2 \sqrt{g h}\)
  3. \(2 \sqrt{2 \mathrm{gh}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{g h}\)

Answer: Pressure at : P1= Patm + ρ g (2h)

Applying Bernoulli’s theory between points and

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Velocity Of The Liquid Coming Out Of A Small Hole Of A Large Vessel.

⇒ \(\left[P_{a t m}+2 \rho g h\right]+\rho g(2 h)+\frac{1}{2}(2 \rho)(0)^2\)

⇒ \(P_{\mathrm{atm}}+(2 \rho) g(0)+\frac{1}{2}(2 \rho) v^2\)

⇒ \(v=2 \sqrt{g h}\)

Question 3. A horizontal pipeline carries water in a streamlined flow. At a point along the pipe where the cross-sectional area is 10 cm², the water velocity is 1 ms-1 and the pressure is 2000 Pa. The pressure of water at another point where the cross-sectional area is 5 cm² will be:

[Density of water = 103 kg. m-3 ]

Answer:

From continuity equation

A1v1= A2v2

∴ \(v_2=\left(\frac{A_1}{A_2}\right) v_1=\left(\frac{10}{5}\right)(1)=2 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)

Applying Bernoulli’s theorem at 1 and 2

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Horizontal Pipe Line Carries Water In A Streamline Flow

⇒ \(P_2+\frac{1}{2} \rho v_2{ }^2=P_1+\frac{1}{2} \rho v_1{ }^2\)

⇒ \(P_2=P_1+\frac{1}{2} \rho\left(v_1^2-v_2^2\right)\)

⇒ \(\left(2000+\frac{1}{2} \times 10^3(1-4)\right)\)

500 Pa

Question 4. Equal volumes of two immiscible liquids of densities ρ and 2ρ are filled in a vessel as shown in the figure. Two small holes are punched at depths h/2 and 3h/2 from the surface of a lighter liquid. If v1 and v2 are the velocities of efflux at these two holes, then v1/v2 is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Equal Volumes Of Two Immiscible Liquids Of Densities The Velocities Of Efflux At These Two Holes V1 And V2

  1. \(\frac{1}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)
  2. 0.5
  3. 0.25
  4. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Answer: for hole (1)

⇒ \(P_0+\rho \frac{V_1^2}{2}=P_0+\rho g \frac{h}{2}\)

⇒ \(V_1=\sqrt{g h}\)

for hole (2)

⇒ \(P_0+\rho \frac{V_2^2}{2}\)

⇒ \(P_0+\rho g h+2 \rho h\left(\frac{h}{2}\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{\rho V_2^2}{2}=2 \rho g h\)

⇒ \(V_2=2 \sqrt{g h}\)

⇒ \(\frac{V_1}{V_2}=\frac{1}{2}\)

= 0.5

 

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Multiple Choice Questions And Answers

Fluid Mechanics Multiple Choice Questions And Answers

Question 1. The height of a mercury barometer is 75 cm at sea level and 50 cm at the top of a hill. The ratio of the density of mercury to that of air is 104. The height of the hill is

  1. 250 m
  2. 2.5 km
  3. 1.25 km
  4. 750 m

Answer: 2. 2.5 km

Question 2. If pressure at half the depth of a lake is equal to 2/3 of pressure at the bottom of the lake then what is the depth of the lake

  1. 10m
  2. 20m
  3. 60m
  4. 30m

Answer: 2. 20m

Question 3. A uniform tapering vessel is filled with a liquid of density 900 kg/m3. The force that acts on the base of the vessel due to the liquid is (g = 10 ms-2 )

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Uniformly Tapering Vessel Is Filled With A Liquid

  1. 3.6 N
  2. 7.2 N
  3. 9.0 N
  4. 14.4 N

Answer: 2. 7.2 N

Question 4. The pressure at the bottom of a tank containing a liquid does not depend on

  1. Acceleration due to gravity
  2. Height of the liquid column
  3. Area of the bottom surface
  4. Nature of the liquid

Answer: 3. Area of the bottom surface

Question 5. When a large bubble rises from the bottom of a lake to the surface. Its radius doubles. If atmospheric pressure is equal to that of a column of water height H, then the depth of the lake is

  1. H
  2. 2H
  3. 7H
  4. 8H

Answer: 3. 7H

Question 6. The volume of an air bubble becomes three times as it rises from the bottom of a lake to its surface. Assuming atmospheric pressure to be 75 cm of Hg and the density of water to be 1/10 of the density of mercury, the depth of the lake is

  1. 5m
  2. 10m
  3. 15m
  4. 20m

Answer: 3. 15m

Question 7. The value of g at a place decreases by 2%.The barometric height of mercury

  1. Increases by 2%
  2. Decreases by 2%
  3. Remains unchanged
  4. Sometimes increases and sometimes decreases

Answer: 1. Increases by 2%

Question 8. A barometer kept in a stationary elevator reads 76 cm. If the elevator starts accelerating the reading will be

  1. Zero
  2. Equal to 76 cm
  3. More than 76 cm
  4. Less than 76 cm

Answer: 4. Less than 76 cm

Question 9. A beaker containing a liquid is kept inside a big closed jar. If the air inside the jar is continuously pumped out, the pressure in the liquid near the bottom of the liquid will

  1. Increases
  2. Decreases
  3. Remain constant
  4. First decrease and then increase

Answer: 2. Decreases

Question 10. A vertical U-tube of the uniform inner cross-section contains mercury on both sides of its arms. A glycerin (density =1.3g/cm3)column of length 10cm is introduced into one of its arms. Oil of density 0.8 gm/cm3 is poured into the other arm until the upper surfaces of the oil and glycerin are at the same horizontal level. Find the length of the oil column, Density of mercury = 13.6 g/cm3

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A vertical U Tube Of Uniform Inner Cross Section Contains Mercury In Both Sides Of Its Arms

  1. 10.4cm
  2. 8.2 cm
  3. 7.2cm
  4. 9.6cm

Answer: 4. 9.6cm

Question 11. From the adjacent figure, the correct observation is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Pressure On The Bottom Of Tank Is Greater Than And Is Similar Than At At The Bottam

  1. The pressure on the bottom of the tank is greater than at the bottom of (2).
  2. The pressure on the bottom of the tank is smaller than at the bottom of
  3. The pressure depends on the shape of the container
  4. The pressure on the bottom of and is the same

Answer: 4. The pressure on the bottom of and is the same

Question 12. Air is blown through a hole in a closed pipe containing liquid. Then the pressure will

  1. Increase on sides
  2. Increase downwards
  3. Increase in all direction
  4. Never increases

Answer: 4. Never increases

Question 13. The radius of an air bubble at the bottom of the lake is r and it becomes 2r when the air bubbles rise to the top surface of the lake. If P cm water is the atmospheric pressure, then the depth of the lake is

  1. 2p
  2. 8p
  3. 4p
  4. 7p

Answer: 4. 7p

Question 14. A closed rectangular tank is completely filled with water and is accelerated horizontally with an acceleration towards the right. Pressure is

  1. Maximum at, and
  2. Minimum at

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Closed Rectangular Tank Is Completely Filled With Water

  1. (1)B (2)D
  2. (1)C (2)D
  3. (1)B (2)C
  4. (1)B (2)A

Answer: 1. (1)B (2)D

Question 15. A given-shaped glass tube having a uniform cross-section is filled with water and is mounted on a rotatable shaft as shown in the figure. If the tube is rotated with a constant angular velocity ω then

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Glass Tube Having Uniform Cross Section And The Tube Is Rotated With A Constant Angular Velocity

  1. Water levels in both sections A and B go up
  2. The water level in Section A goes up and that in B comes down
  3. The water level in Section A comes down and in B it goes up
  4. Water levels remain the same in both sections

Answer: 1. Water levels in both sections A and B go up

Question 16. A siphon in use is demonstrated in the following figure. The density of the liquid flowing in the siphon is 1.5 gm/cc. The pressure difference between the points P and S will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Siphon In Use Is Demonstrated

  1. 105 N/m
  2. 2 × 105 N/m
  3. Zero
  4. Infinity

Answer: 3. Zero

Question 17. Figure here shows the vertical cross-section of a vessel filled with a liquid of density ρ. The normal thrust per unit area on the walls of the vessel at point. P, as shown, will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Vertical Cross Section Of A Vessel Filled With A Liquid Of Density

  1. h ρ g
  2. H ρ g
  3. (H – h) ρ g
  4. (H – h) ρ g cosθ

Answer: 3. (H – h) ρ g

Question 18. A tank with a length of 10 m, breadth of 8m, and depth of 6m is filled with water to the top. If g = 10 m s-2 and the density of water is 1000 kg m-3, then the thrust on the bottom is

  1. 6 × 1000 × 10 × 80 N
  2. 3 × 1000 × 10 × 48 N
  3. 3 × 1000 × 10 × 60 N
  4. 3 × 1000 × 10 × 80 N

Answer: 1. 6 × 1000 × 10 × 80 N

Question 19. In a hydraulic lift, used at a service station the radius of the large and small piston are in the ratio of 20:1. What weight placed on the small piston will be sufficient to lift a car of mass 1500 kg?

  1. 3.75 kg
  2. 37.5 kg
  3. 7.5 kg
  4. 75 kg.

Answer: 1. 3.75 kg

Question 20. Two vessels A and B of different shapes have the same base area and are filled with water up to the same height h (see figure). The force exerted by water on the base is FA for vessel A and FB for vessel B. The respective weights of the water-filled vessels are WA and WB. Then

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Two Vessels A And B Of Different Shapes Have The Same Base Area And Are Filled With Water

  1. FA> FB ; WA> WB
  2. FA= FB ; WA> WB
  3. FA= FB ; WA< WB
  4. FA> FB ; WA= WB

Answer: 2. FA= FB ; WA> WB

Question 21. A hydrogen balloon released on the moon would:

  1. Climb up with an acceleration of 9.8 m/s2
  2. Climb up with an acceleration of 9.8 × 6 m/s2
  3. Neither climb nor fall
  4. Fall with an acceleration of 9.8/6 m/s2

Answer: 4. Fall with an acceleration of 9.8/6 m/s2

Question 22. Reason for weightlessness in satellite :

  1. Zero gravity
  2. Centre of gravity
  3. Zero reaction force on a plane of the satellite
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. Zero reaction force on a plane of the satellite

Question 22. A hemispherical bowl just floats without sinking in a liquid of density 1.2 × 103 kg/m3. If the outer diameter and the density of the bowl are 1 m and 2 × 104 kgm3 respectively, then the inner diameter of the bowl will be

  1. 0.94 m
  2. 0.97 m
  3. 0.98 m
  4. 0.99 m

Answer: 3. 0.98 m

Question 23. In making an alloy, a substance of specific gravity s1 and mass m1 is mixed with another substance of specific gravity s2 and mass m2; then the specific gravity of the alloy is

  1. \(\left(\frac{m_1+m_2}{s_1+s_2}\right)\)
  2. \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{s}_1 \mathrm{~s}_2}{\mathrm{~m}_1+\mathrm{m}_2}\right)\)
  3. \(\frac{m_1+m_2}{\left(\frac{m_1}{s_1}+\frac{m_2}{s_2}\right)}\)
  4. \(\frac{\left(\frac{m_1}{s_1}+\frac{m_2}{s_2}\right)}{m_1+m_2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{m_1+m_2}{\left(\frac{m_1}{s_1}+\frac{m_2}{s_2}\right)}\)

Question 24. Two solids A and B float in water. It is observed that A floats with half its volume immersed and B floats with 2/3 of its volume immersed. Compare the densities of A and B

  1. 4 :3
  2. 2 :3
  3. 3:4
  4. 1 :3

Answer: 4. 1 :3

Question 25. A body is just floating on the surface of a liquid. The density of the body is the same as that of the liquid. The body is slightly pushed down. What will happen to the body?

  1. It will slowly come back to its earlier position position
  2. It will remain submerged, where it is left
  3. It will sink
  4. It will come out violently

Answer: 2. It will remain submerged, where it is left

Question 26. A rectangular block is 5 cm × 5 cm × 10 cm in size. The block is floating in water with a 5 cm side vertical. If it floats with a 10 cm side vertical, what change will occur in the level of water?

  1. No change
  2. It will rise
  3. It will fall
  4. It may rise or fall depending on the density of a block

Answer: 1. No change

Question 27. A boat carrying steel balls is floating on the surface of water in a tank. If the balls are thrown into the tank one by one how will it affect the level of water

  1. It will remain unchanged
  2. It will rise
  3. It will fall
  4. First, it will first rise and then fall

Answer: 3. It will fall

Question 28. Two pieces of metal when immersed in a liquid have equal upthrust on them; then

  1. Both pieces must have equal weights
  2. Both pieces must have equal densities
  3. Both pieces must have equal volumes
  4. Both are floating to the same depth

Answer: 3. Both pieces must have equal volumes

Question 29. A wooden cylinder floats vertically in water with half of its length immersed. The density of wood is

  1. Equal to that of water
  2. Half the density of water
  3. Double the density of water
  4. The question is incomplete

Answer: 2. Half the density of water

Question 30. An ice block contains a glass ball when the ice melts within the water, the level of water

  1. Rises
  2. Falls
  3. Unchanged
  4. First rises and then falls

Answer: 2. Falls

Question 31. The construction of submarines is based on

  1. Archimedes’ principle
  2. Bernoulli’s theorem
  3. Pascal’s law
  4. Newton’s laws

Answer: 1. Archimedes’ principle

Question 32. A concrete sphere of radius R has a cavity of radius r which is packed with sawdust. The specific gravities of concrete and sawdust are respectively 2.4 and 0.3 for this sphere to float with its entire volume submerged under water. The ratio of the mass of concrete to the mass of sawdust will be

  1. 8
  2. 4
  3. 3
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. 4

Question 33. A cubical block is floating in a liquid with half of its volume immersed in the liquid. When the whole system accelerates upwards with an acceleration of g/3, the fraction of volume immersed in the liquid will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Cubical Block Is Floating In A Liquid With Half Of Its Volume Immersed In The Liquid

  1. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{3}{8}\)
  3. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 34. A silver ingot weighing 2.1 kg is held by a string so as to be completely immersed in a liquid of relative density 0.8. The relative density of silver is 10.5. The tension in the string in kg-wt is

  1. 1.6
  2. 1.94
  3. 3.1
  4. 5.25

Answer: 2. 1.94

Question 35. A solid sphere of density η ( > times lighter than water is suspended in a water tank by a string. If the mass of the sphere is m then the tension in the string is given by

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Mass Of The Sphere Is M Then The Tension In The String

  1. \(\left(\frac{\eta-1}{\eta}\right) \mathrm{mg}\)
  2. ηmg
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\eta-1}\)
  4. (η−1)mg

Answer: 4. (η−1)mg

Question 36. A hollow sphere of volume V is floating on a water surface with half immersed in it. What should be the minimum volume of water poured inside the sphere so that the sphere now sinks into the water?

  1. V/2
  2. V/3
  3. V/4
  4. V

Answer: 1. V/2

Question 37. Two solids A and B float in water. It is observed that A floats with half its volume immersed and B floats with 2/3 of its volume immersed. Compare the densities of A and B

  1. 4 : 3
  2. 2 : 3
  3. 3: 4
  4. 1 : 3

Answer: 3. 3: 4

Question 38. The fraction of a floating object of volume V0 and density d0 above the surface of a liquid of density d will be

  1. \(\frac{d_0}{d}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{dd}_0}{\mathrm{~d}+\mathrm{d}_0}\)
  3. \(\frac{d-d_0}{d}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{dd}_0}{\mathrm{~d}-\mathrm{d}_0}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{d-d_0}{d}\)

Question 39. The density of the ice is ρ and that of water is σ. What will be the decrease in volume when a mass M of ice melts?

  1. \(\frac{M}{\sigma-\rho}\)
  2. \(\frac{\sigma-\rho}{M}\)
  3. \(M\left[\frac{1}{\rho}-\frac{1}{\sigma}\right]\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{M}}\left[\frac{1}{\rho}-\frac{1}{\sigma}\right]\)

Answer: 3. \(M\left[\frac{1}{\rho}-\frac{1}{\sigma}\right]\)

Question 40. The reading of a spring balance when a block is suspended from it in the air is 60 newton. This reading is changed to 40 newtons when the block is submerged in water. The specific gravity of the block must be therefore :

  1. 3
  2. 2
  3. 6
  4. 3/2

Answer: 1. 3

Question 41. A block of steel of size 5 cm × 5 cm × 5 cm is weighed in water. If the relative density of steel is 7. Its apparent weight is :

  1. 6 × 5 × 5 × 5 gf
  2. 4 × 4 × 4 × 7 gf
  3. 5 × 5 × 5 × 7 gf
  4. 4 × 4 × 4 × 6 gf

Answer: 1. 6 × 5 × 5 × 5 gf

Question 42. Two bodies are in equilibrium when suspended in water from the arms of a balance. The mass of one body is 36 g and its density is 9 g/cc. If the mass of the other is 48 g, its density in g/cc is :

  1. 4/3
  2. 3/2
  3. 3
  4. 5

Answer: 3. 3

Question 43. In order for a floating object to be in a stable rotation at equilibrium, its center of buoyancy should be

  1. Vertically above its center of gravity
  2. Vertically below its center of gravity
  3. Horizontally in line with its center of gravity
  4. May be anywhere

Answer: 1. Vertically above its center of gravity

Question 44. A cork is submerged in water by a spring attached to the bottom of a bowl. When the bowl is kept in an elevator moving with acceleration downwards, the length of the spring

  1. Increases
  2. Decreases
  3. Remains unchanged
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. Decreases

Question 45. A hollow sphere of volume V is floating on a water surface with half immersed in it. What should be the minimum volume of water poured inside the sphere so that the sphere now sinks into the water?

  1. V/2
  2. V/3
  3. V/4
  4. V

Answer: 1. V / 2

Question 46. An ice block contains a glass ball when the ice melts within the water-containing vessel, the level of water

  1. Rises
  2. Falls
  3. Unchanged
  4. First rises and then falls

Answer: 2. Falls

Question 47. A large ship can float but a steel needle sinks because of

  1. Viscosity
  2. Surface tension
  3. Density
  4. None of these

Answer: 4. None of these

Question 48. An iceberg of density 900 kg/m3 is floating in water of density 1000 Kg/m3. The percentage of the volume of ice-cube outside the water is

  1. 20%
  2. 35%
  3. 10%
  4. 25%

Answer: 3. 10%

Question 49. A hemispherical portion of radius R is removed from the bottom of a cylinder of radius R. The volume of the remaining cylinder is V and its mass M. It is suspended by a string in a liquid of density ρ where it stays vertical. The upper surface of the cylinder is at a depth h below the liquid surface. The force on the bottom of the cylinder by the liquid is:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Hemispherical Portion Of Radius R Is Removed From The Bottom Of A Cylinder Of Radius R

  1. Mg
  2. Mg – Vρg
  3. Mg + πR2hρg
  4. ρg(V + πR2h)

Answer: 4. ρg(V + πR2h)

Question 50. A wooden block with a coin placed on its top floats in water as shown in the figure. The distance and h are shown here. After some time the coin falls into the water. Then

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Wooden Block With A CoinPlaced On Its Top Floats In Water

  1. l decreases and h increase
  2. l increases and h decreases
  3. Both l and h increases
  4. Both l and h decrease

Answer: 4. Both l and h decrease

Question 51. If a sphere is inserted in water, then it flows with \(\frac{1}{3}\) rd of it outside the water, When it is inserted in an unknown liquid then it flows with \(\frac{3}{4}\) th of it outside, then the density of the unknown liquid is:

  1. 4.9 gm/c.c
  2. \(\frac{9}{4}\) gm/c.c
  3. \(\frac{8}{3}\) gm/c.c
  4. \(\frac{3}{8}\) gm/c.c

Answer: 3. \(\frac{8}{3}\) gm/c.c

Question 52. A body of uniform cross-sectional area floats in a liquid of density thrice its value. The fraction of exposed height will be:

  1. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
  2. \(\frac{5}{6}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{6}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 53. A raft of wood of mass 120 kg floats in water. The weight that can be put on the raft to make it just sing, should be : (draft = 600 kg/m3)

  1. 80 kg
  2. 50 kg
  3. 60 kg
  4. 30 kg

Answer: 1. 80 kg

Question 54. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross-section A floats in a liquid of density ρ. If it is given a small vertical displacement from equilibrium it undergoes oscillation with a time period T. Them :

  1. \(\mathrm{T} \propto \sqrt{\rho}\)
  2. \(\mathrm{T} \propto \frac{1}{\sqrt{\mathrm{A}}}\)
  3. \(T \propto \frac{1}{\rho}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{T} \propto \frac{1}{\sqrt{\mathrm{m}}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\mathrm{T} \propto \frac{1}{\sqrt{\mathrm{A}}}\)

Question 55. The bob of a simple pendulum executes simple harmonic motion in water with a period t, while the period of oscillation of the bob is t0 in air. Neglecting the frictional force of water and given that the density of the bob is (4/3)× 1000 kg/m3. What relationship between t and t0 is true?

  1. t = t0
  2. t = t0/2
  3. t = 2t0
  4. t = 4t0

Answer: 3. t = 2t0

Question 56. A jar is filled with two non-mixing liquids 1 and 2 having densities ρ1 and ρ2, respectively. A solid ball, made of a material of density ρ3, is dropped in the jar. It comes to equilibrium in the position shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Jar Is Filled With Two Non Mixing Liquids 1 And 2 Having Densities Respectively

Which of the following is true for ρ1, ρ2 and ρ3?

  1. ρ1> ρ3> ρ2
  2. ρ1< ρ2< ρ3
  3. ρ1< ρ3< ρ2
  4. ρ3< ρ1< ρ2

Answer: 3. ρ1< ρ3< ρ2

Question 57. A ball is made of a material of density ρ where ρoil < ρ < ρwater with ρoil and ρwater representing the densities of oil and water, respectively. The oil and water are immiscible. If the above ball is in equilibrium in a mixture of this oil and water, which of the following pictures represents its equilibrium position?

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Oil And Water Are Immiscible

Answer: 2

Question 58. A block of volume V and of density σb is placed in a liquid of density σll > σb), then the block is moved upward upto a height h and it is still in the liquid. The increase in gravitational potential energy of the system is :

  1. σb Vgh
  2. b + σl)Vgh
  3. b – σl)Vgh
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. (σb – σl)Vgh

Question 59. A metallic sphere floats (just sink) in an immiscible mixture of water (ρw = 103 kg/mand a liquid (ρL= 13.5 × 10 with (1/5)th portion by volume in the liquid. The density of the metal is :

  1. 4.5 × 103 kg/m3
  2. 4.0 × 103 kg/m3
  3. 3.5 × 103 kg/m3
  4. 1.9 × 103 kg/m3

Answer: 3. 3.5 × 103 kg/m3

Question 60. Three liquids of densities d, 2d, and 3d are mixed in equal volumes. Then the density of the mixture is

  1. d
  2. 2d
  3. 3d
  4. 5d

Answer: 2. 2d

Question 61. Three liquids of densities d, 2d, and 3d are mixed in equal proportions of weights. The relative density of the mixture is

  1. \(\frac{11 d}{7}\)
  2. \(\frac{18 d}{11}\)
  3. \(\frac{13 d}{9}\)
  4. \(\frac{23 d}{18}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{18 d}{11}\)

Question 62. Figure shows a weigh-bridge, with a beaker P with water on one pan and a balancing weight R on the other. A solid ball Q is hanging with a thread outside the water. It has a volume of 40 cm3 and weighs 80 g. If this solid is lowered to sink fully in water, but not touching the beaker anywhere, the balancing weight R’ will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Weigh Bridge

  1. Same as R
  2. 40 g less than R
  3. 40 g more than R
  4. 80 g more than R

Answer: 3. 40 g more than R

Question 63. In which one of the following cases will the liquid flow in a pipe be most streamlined

  1. Liquid of high viscosity and high density flowing through a pipe of small radius
  2. Liquid of high viscosity and low density flowing through a pipe of small radius
  3. Liquid of low viscosity and low density flowing through a pipe of large radius
  4. Liquid of low viscosity and high density flowing through a pipe of large radius

Answer: 2. Liquid of high viscosity and low density flowing through a pipe of small radius

Question 64. Two water pipes of diameters 2 cm and 4 cm are connected with the main supply line. The velocity of the flow of water in the pipe of 2 cm diameter is

  1. 4 times that in the other pipe
  2. 14 times than in the other pipe
  3. 2 times that in the other pipe
  4. 12 times than in the other pipe

Answer: 1. 4 times that in the other pipe

Question 65. Water enters through end A with speed υ1 and leaves through end B with speed υ2 of a cylindrical tube AB. The tube is always completely filled with water. In case I tube is horizontal in case II it is vertical with end A upwards and in case III it is vertical with end B upwards. We have υ1 = υ2 for

  1. Case 1
  2. Case 2
  3. Case 3
  4. Each case

Answer: 4. Each case

Question 66. Water is moving with a speed of 5.18 ms-1 through a pipe with a cross-sectional area of 4.20 cm2. The water gradually descends 9.66 m as the pipe increases in area to 7.60 cm2. The speed of flow at the lower level is

  1. 3.0 ms-1
  2. 5.7 ms-1
  3. 3.82 ms-1
  4. 2.86 ms-1

Answer: 4. 2.86 ms-1

Question 67. In the following flag. Is shown the flow of liquid through a horizontal pipe. Three tubes A, B, and C are connected to the pipe. The radii of tubes A, B, and c at the junction are respectively 2 cm, 1 cm, and 2cm. It can be said that the

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Flow Of Liquid Through A Horizontal Pipe

  1. The height of the liquid in tube A is the maximum
  2. Height of the liquid in the tubes A and B is the same
  3. The height of the liquid in all three tubes is the same
  4. Height of the liquid in the tubes A and C is the same

Answer: 4. Height of the liquid in the tubes A and C is the same

Question 68. Air is steaming past a horizontal airplane wing such that its speed is 120 m/s over the upper surface and 90 m/s at the lower surface. If the density of air is 1.3 kg per metre3 and the wing is 10 m long and has an average width of 2 m, then the difference of the pressure on the two sides of the wing of

  1. 4095.0 Pascal
  2. 409.50 Pascal
  3. 40.950 Pascal
  4. 4.0950 Pascal

Answer: 1. 4095.0 Pascal

Question 69. A cylinder of height 20 m is filled with water. The velocity of efflux of water (in m/s) through a small hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom is

  1. 10
  2. 20
  3. 25.5
  4. 5

Answer: 2. 20

Question 70. There is a hole in the bottom of the tank having water. If the total pressure at the bottom is 3 atm (1 atm = 105 N/mthen the velocity of water flowing from the hole is

  1. \(\sqrt{400} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{600} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{60} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{400} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)

Question 71. In a turbulent flow, the velocity of the liquid molecules in contact with the walls of the tube is

  1. Zero
  2. Maximum
  3. Equal to critical velocity
  4. May have any value

Answer: 4. May have any value

Question 72. Water is flowing through a tube of non-uniform cross-section ratio of the radius at the entry and exit end of the pipe is 3: 2. Then the ratio of velocities at the entry and exit of liquid is

  1. 4: 9
  2. 9: 4
  3. 8: 27
  4. 1: 1

Answer: 1. 4: 9

Question 73. Water is flowing through a horizontal pipe of non-uniform cross-section. At the extremely narrow portion of the pipe, the water will have

  1. Maximum speed and least pressure
  2. Maximum pressure and least speed
  3. Both pressure and speed maximum
  4. Both pressure and speed least

Answer: 1. Maximum speed and least pressure

Question 74. A liquid flows in a tube from left to right as shown in the figure. A1 and A2 are the cross-sections of the portions of the tube as shown. Then the ratio of speeds ν1/ ν2 will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Liquid Flows In A Tube From Left To Right The Cross Section Of The Portions Of The Tube

  1. A1/ A2
  2. A2/ A1
  3. \(\sqrt{A_2} / \sqrt{A_1}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{A_1} / \sqrt{A_2}\)

Answer: 2. A2/ A1

Question 75. A large tank filled with water to a height of ‘h’ is to be emptied through a small hole at the bottom. The ratio of time taken for the level of water to fall from h to \(\frac{h}{2}\) and from \(\frac{h}{2}\) to zero is

  1. \(\sqrt{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{2}-1\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}-1}\)

Answer: 3. \(\sqrt{2}-1\)

Question 76. There is a hole in area A at the bottom of the cylindrical vessel. Water is filled up to a height of h and water flows out in t second. If water is filled to a height of 4h, it will flow out in time equal to

  1. t
  2. 4t
  3. 2 t
  4. t/4

Answer: 3. 2 t

Question 77. In this figure, an ideal liquid flows through the tube, which is of uniform cross-section. The liquid has velocities vA and vB, and pressure PA and PB at points A and B respectively

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics An Ideal Liquid Flows Through The Tube Which Is Of Uniform Cross Section

  1. vA = vB
  2. vB > vA
  3. PA = PB
  4. PB > PA

Answer: (1,4)

Question 78. A liquid flows through a horizontal tube. The velocities of the liquid in the two sections, which have areas of cross-section A1 and A2, are v1 and v2 respectively. The difference in the levels of the liquid in the two vertical tubes is h

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Liquid Flows Through A Horizontal Tube

  1. The volume of the liquid flowing through the tube in unit time is A1v1
  2. \(v_2-v_1=\sqrt{2 g h}\)
  3. \(v_2^2-v_1^2=2 g h\)
  4. The energy per unit mass of the liquid is the same in both sections of the tube

Answer: (1,3,4)

Question 79. An L-shaped glass tube is just immersed in flowing water such that its opening is pointing against flowing water. If the speed of the water current is v, then

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics An L Shaped Glass Tube Is Just Immersed In Flowing Water

  1. The water in the tube rises to height \(\frac{v^2}{2 \mathrm{~g}}\)
  2. The water in the tube rises to height \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2 \mathrm{v}^2}\)
  3. The water in the tube does not rise at all
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. The water in the tube rises to height \(\frac{v^2}{2 \mathrm{~g}}\)

Question 80. A streamlined body falls through the air from a height of h on the surface of a liquid. If d and D(D > d) represent the densities of the material of the body and liquid respectively, then the time after which the body will be instantaneously at rest is

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g} \cdot \frac{D}{d}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g} \cdot \frac{d}{D}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g}}\left(\frac{d}{D-d}\right)\)

Answer: 4. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g}}\left(\frac{d}{D-d}\right)\)

Question 81. A large tank is filled with water to a height of H. A small hole is made at the base of the tank. It takes T1 time to decrease the height of water to \(\frac{H}{\eta}(\eta>1)\), and it takes T2 time to take out the rest of the water. T1 = T2 then the value of η is

  1. 2
  2. 3
  3. 4
  4. \(2 \sqrt{2}\)

Answer: 3. 4

Question 82. Bernoulli’s principle is based on the law of conservation:

  1. Mass
  2. Momentum
  3. Energy
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. Energy

Question 83. The action of the paint gun is based on:

  1. Bernoulli’s principle
  2. Boyle’s law
  3. Faraday’s law
  4. Archimedes principle

Answer: 1. Bernoulli’s principle

Question 84. Bernoulli’s equation is applicable to points:

  1. In a steadily flowing liquid
  2. In a streamlined
  3. In a straight line perpendicular to a streamline
  4. For ideal liquid streamline flow on a streamline

Answer: 4. For ideal liquid streamline flow on a streamline

Question 85. Bernoulli’s equation is based upon:

  1. Isochoric process
  2. Isobaric process
  3. Isothermal process
  4. Adiabatic process

Answer: 3. Isothermal process

Question 86. The horizontal flow of fluid depends upon

  1. Pressure difference
  2. Amount of fluid
  3. Density of fluid
  4. All the above

Answer: 1. Pressure difference

Question 87. In steady horizontal flow:

  1. The pressure is greatest where the speed is least
  2. The pressure is independent of speed
  3. The pressure is the least where the speed is the least
  4. (1) and (3) are correct

Answer: 1. The pressure is greatest where the speed is least

Question 88. In a laminar flow, the velocity of the liquid in contact with the walls of the tube is

  1. Zero
  2. Maximum
  3. In between zero and maximum
  4. Equal to critical velocity

Answer: 1. Zero

Question 89. In a turbulent flow, the velocity of the liquid molecules in contact with the walls of the tube is –

  1. Zero
  2. Maximum
  3. Equal to critical velocity
  4. May have any value

Answer: 4. May have any value

Question 90. The Reynolds number of a flow is the ratio of

  1. Gravity to viscous force
  2. Gravity force to pressure force
  3. Inertia forces to viscous force
  4. Viscous forces to pressure forces

Answer: 3. Inertia forces to viscous force

Question 91. A tank is filled with water up to height H. Water is allowed to come out of a hole P in one of the walls at a depth D below the surface of the water. Express the horizontal distance x in terms of H and D :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Tank Is Filled With Water Up To Height H The Horizontal Distance X In Terms Of H And D

  1. \(x=\sqrt{D(H-D)}\)
  2. \(x=\sqrt{\frac{D(H-D)}{2}}\)
  3. \(x=2 \sqrt{D(H-D)}\)
  4. \(x=4 \sqrt{D(H-D)}\)

Answer: 3. \(x=2 \sqrt{D(H-D)}\)

Question 92. A fixed cylindrical vessel is filled with water up to height H. A hole is bored in the wall at a depth of h from the free surface of the water. For maximum horizontal range, h is equal to :

  1. H
  2. 3H/4
  3. H/2
  4. H/4

Answer: 3. H/2

Question 93. An incompressible liquid flows through a horizontal tube as shown in the figure. Then the velocity ‘ v ‘ of the fluid is :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics An Incompressible Liquid Flows Through A Horizontal Tube

  1. 3.0 m/s
  2. 1.5 m/s
  3. 1.0 m/s
  4. 2.25 m/s

Answer: 3. 1.0 m/s

Question 94. For a fluid that is flowing steadily, the level in the vertical tubes is best represented by

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Fluid Which Is Flowing Steadily The Level In The Vertical Tubes

Answer: 1

Question 95. Water flows through a frictionless duct with a cross-section varying as shown in the figure. Pressure p at points along the axis is represented by

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Water Flows Through A Frictionless Duct With A Cross Section

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Water Flows Through A Frictionless Duct With A Cross Section.

Answer: 1

Question 96. Air is blown through a hole in a closed pipe containing liquid. Then the pressure will :

  1. Increase on sides
  2. Increase downwards
  3. Increase in all directions
  4. Never increases

Answer: 3. Increase in all directions

Question 97. The Working of an atomizer depends upon

  1. Bernoulli’s theorem
  2. Boyle’s law
  3. Archimedes principle
  4. Newton’s law of motion

Answer: 1. Bernoulli’s theorem

Question 98. A cylinder of height 20m is completely filled with water. The velocity of efflux of water (in ms–through a small hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom, is :

  1. 10
  2. 20
  3. 25.5
  4. 5

Answer: 2. 20

Question 99. An application of Bernoulli’s equation for fluid flow is found in

  1. Dynamic lift of an aeroplane
  2. Viscosity meter
  3. Capillary rise
  4. Hydraulic press

Answer: 1. Dynamic lift of an aeroplane

Question 100. A large open tank has two holes in the wall. One is a square hole of side L at a depth y from the top and the other is a circular hole of radius R at a depth 4y from the top. When the tank is completely filled with water, the quantities of water flowing out per second from both holes are the same. Then radius R, is equal to :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Large Open Tank Has Two Holes In The Wall

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\sqrt{2 \pi}}\)
  2. 2 π L
  3. L
  4. \(\frac{L}{2 \pi}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\sqrt{2 \pi}}\)

Question 101. Water is filled in a container upto height 3m. A small hole of area ‘a’ is punched in the wall of the container at a height of 52.5 cm from the bottom. The cross-sectional area of the container is A. If a/A = 0.1 then v2 is : (where v is the velocity of water coming out of the hole) (g = 10 m/s2)

  1. 50
  2. 51
  3. 48
  4. 51.5

Answer: 1. 50

Question 102. Statement -1 

The stream of water flowing at high speed from a garden hose pipe tends to spread like a fountain when held vertically up but tends to narrow down when held vertically down.

Statement -2

In any steady flow of an incompressible fluid, the volume flow rate of the fluid remains constant.

  1. Statement -1 is True, Statement -2 is True; Statement -2 is a correct explanation for Statement -1
  2. Statement -1 is True, Statement -2 is True; Statement -2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement -1
  3. Statement -1 is True, Statement -2 is False
  4. Statement -1 is False, Statement -2 is True.

Answer: 1. Statement -1 is True, Statement -2 is True; Statement -2 is a correct explanation for Statement -1

Question 103. Water is flowing inside a tube of a uniform radius ratio of the radius of entry and exit terminals of the tube is 3: 2. Then the ratio of velocities at entry and exit terminals will be :

  1. 4: 9
  2. 9: 4
  3. 8: 27
  4. 1: 1

Answer: 1. 4: 9

Question 104. At what speed, the velocity head of water is equal to the pressure head of 40 cm of hg?

  1. 10.3 m/s
  2. 2.8 m/s
  3. 5.6 m/s
  4. 8.4 m/s

Answer: 1. 10.3 m/s

Question 105. A hole in the bottom of the tank has water. If the total pressure at the bottom is 3 atm (1 atm = 105 Nm-2), then the velocity of water flowing from the hole is :

  1. \(\sqrt{400} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{600} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{60} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}\)
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{400} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}\)

Question 106. The velocity of water flowing in a non-uniform tube is 20 cm/s at a point where the tube radius is 0.2 cm. The velocity at another point, where the radius is 0.1 cm is:

  1. 80 cm/s
  2. 40 cm/s
  3. 20 cm/s
  4. 5 cm/s

Answer: 1. 80 cm/s

Question 107. Water is poured into a vessel at a constant rate β m3/s. There is a small hole of area α at the bottom of the vessel. The maximum level of water in the vessel is proportional to

  1. β/α
  2. β2
  3. β2/ α2
  4. α2/ β2

Answer: 3. β2/ α2

Question 108. A manometer connected to a closed tap reads 3.5 × 105 N/m2, When the value is opened, the reading of the manometer falls to 3.0 × 105 N/m2, then the velocity of the flow of water is

  1. 100 m/s
  2. 10 m/s
  3. 1 m/s
  4. 1010m/s

Answer: 2. 10 m/s

Question 109. According to Bernoulli’s equation \(\frac{P}{p g}+h \frac{1}{2} \frac{v}{g}\)= Constant

The terms A, B, and C are generally called respectively :

  1. Gravitational head, pressure head, and velocity head
  2. Gravity, gravitational head, and velocity head
  3. Pressure head, gravitational head, and velocity head
  4. Gravity, Pressure, and velocity head

Answer: 3. Pressure head, gravitational head, and velocity head

Question 110. The weight of the sphere in the air is 50g. Its weight is 40 g in a liquid, at a temperature of 20°C. When the temperature increases to 70°C, it weight becomes 45 g. Find

1. The ratio of densities of liquid at given two temperatures,

Answer: \(\frac{\rho_1}{\rho_2}=\frac{2}{1}\) the ratio of densities of liquid at given two temperatures,

2. The coefficient of cubical expansion of liquid assumes that there is no expansion of the volume of a sphere.

Answer: \(\frac{1}{(70-20)}=0.02 /{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\)

Question 111. The cubical container ABCDEFGH which is completely filled with an ideal (nonviscous and incompressible) fluid, moves in a gravity-free space with an acceleration of a = \(a_0(\hat{i}-\hat{j}+\hat{k})\) where a0 is a positive constant. Then the only point in the container where pressure is maximum is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Gravity Free Space With A Acceleration

  1. B
  2. C
  3. E
  4. F

Answer: 1. B

Question 112. In the previous question pressure will be minimal at point –

  1. A
  2. B
  3. H
  4. F

Answer: 4. F

Question 113. A cylindrical tank of height 0.4 m is open at the top and has a diameter of 0.16 m. Water is filled in it up to a height of 0.16 m. how long it will take to empty the tank through a hole of radius 5×10-3 m in its bottom?

  1. 46.26 sec.
  2. 4.6 sec.
  3. 462.6 sec.
  4. 4.46 sec.

Answer: 1. 46.26 sec.

Question 114. A narrow tube completely filled with a liquid is lying on a series of cylinders as shown in the figure. Assuming no sliding between any surfaces, the value of the acceleration of the cylinders for which liquid will not come out of the tube from anywhere is given by opening to the atmosphere

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Narrow Tube Completely Filled With A Liquid Is Lying On A Series Of Cylinders

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{gH}}{2 \mathrm{~L}}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{gH}}{\mathrm{L}}\)
  3. \(\frac{2 \mathrm{gH}}{\mathrm{L}}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{gH}}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{~L}}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mathrm{gH}}{2 \mathrm{~L}}\)

Question 115. A liquid is kept in a cylindrical vessel that is rotated along its axis. The liquid rises at the sides. If the radius of the vessel is 0.05 m and the speed of rotation is 2 rev/s, The difference in the height of the liquid at the center of the vessel and its sides will be (π2 = 10) :

  1. 3 cm
  2. 2 cm
  3. 3/2 cm
  4. 2/3 cm

Answer: 2. 2 cm

Question 116. A container of liquid is released from the rest, on a smooth inclined plane as shown in the figure. The length of the inclined plane is sufficient, and assume liquid is finally in equilibrium. Finally liquid surface makes an angle horizontal.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Liquid Surface Makes An Angle With Horizontal

  1. 60º
  2. 45º
  3. 30º
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. 30º

Question 117. A U-tube of base length “l” filled with the same volume of two liquids of densities ρ and 2ρ is moving with an acceleration “a” on the horizontal plane. If the height difference between the two surfaces (open to atmosphere) becomes zero, then the height h is given by:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A U Tube Of Base Length L Filled With Same Volume Of Two Liquids Of Densities On The Horizontal Plane

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{a}}{2 \mathrm{~g}} \ell\)
  2. \(\frac{3 \mathrm{a}}{2 \mathrm{~g}} \ell\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{a}}{\mathrm{g}} \ell\)
  4. \(\frac{2 \mathrm{a}}{3 \mathrm{~g}} \ell\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{3 \mathrm{a}}{2 \mathrm{~g}} \ell\)

Question 118. A given-shaped glass tube having a uniform cross-section is filled with water and is mounted on a rotatable shaft as shown in the figure. If the tube is rotated with a constant angular velocity ω then:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Given Shaped Glass Tube Having Uniform Cross Section Is Filled With Water

  1. Water levels in both sections A and B go up
  2. The water level in Section A goes up and that in B comes down
  3. The water level in Section A comes down and in B it goes up
  4. Water levels remain the same in both sections

Answer: 1. Water levels in both sections A and B go up

Question 119. A candle of diameter d is floating on a liquid in a cylindrical container of diameter D (D > > d) as shown in the figure. If it is burning at the rate of 2cm/hour then the top of the candle will

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Candle Of Diameter D Is Floating On A Liquid In A Cylindrical Container Of Diameter

  1. Remain at the same height
  2. Fall at the rate of 1 cm/hour
  3. Fall at the rate of 2 cm/hour
  4. Go up the rate of 1 cm/hour

Answer: 2. Fall at the rate of 1 cm/hour

Question 120. There are two identical small holes on the opposite sides of a tank containing a liquid. The tank is open at the top. The difference in height between the two holes is h. As the liquid comes out of the two holes, the tank will experience a net horizontal force proportional to:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics Two Identical Small Holes On The Opposite Sides Of A Tank Containing A Liquid

  1. h1/2
  2. h
  3. h3/2
  4. h2

Answer: 2. h

Question 121. The diagram shows a cup of tea seen from above. The tea has been stirred and is now rotating without turbulence. A graph showing the speed υ with which the liquid is crossing points at a distance X from O along a radius XO would look like

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Diagram Shows A Cup Of Tea

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics The Tea Has Been Stirred And Is Now Rotating Without Turbulence

Answer: 4

Question 122. A wind with a speed of 40 m/s blows parallel to the roof of a house. The area of the roof is 250 m2. Assuming that the pressure inside the house is atmospheric pressure, the force exerted by the wind on the roof and the direction of the direction of the force will be : (Pair = 1.2 kg / m3)

  1. 4.8 x 105 N, upwards
  2. 2.4 x 105 N, upwards
  3. 2.4 x 105 N, downwards
  4. 4.8 x 105 N, downwards

Answer: 2. 2.4 x 105 N, upwards

Question 123. The heart of a man pumps 5 liters of through the arteries per minute at a pressure of 150 mm of mercury. If the density of mercury be 13.6 ×103 kg/m3 and g = 10m/s2 then the power of heart in watt is:

  1. 2.35
  2. 3.0
  3. 1.50
  4. 1.70

Answer: 4. 1.70

Question 124. The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has radius, R, one end of which has n fine holes, each of radius r. If the speed of the liquid in the tube is V, the speed of the ejection of the liquid through the holes is:

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{VR}^2}{\mathrm{nr}^2}\)
  2. \(\frac{V R^2}{n^3 r^2}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{V}^2 \mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{nr}}\)
  4. \(\frac{V R^2}{n^2 r^2}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mathrm{VR}^2}{\mathrm{nr}^2}\)

Question 125. Two non-mixing liquids of densities ρ and nρ (n > are put in a container. The height of each liquid is h. A solid cylinder of length L and density d is put in this container. The cylinder floats with its axis vertical and length pL (p < in the denser liquid. The density d is equal to

  1. {1 + (n – 1)p}ρ
  2. {1 + (n + 1)p}ρ
  3. {2+(n + 1)p}ρ
  4. {2 + (n – 1)p}ρ

Answer: 1. {1 + (n – 1)p}ρ

Question 126. A U tube with both ends open to the atmosphere is partially filled with water. Oil, which is immiscible with water, is poured into one side until it stands at a distance of 10 mm above the water level on the other side. Meanwhile, the water rises by 65 mm from its original level (see diagram). The density of the oil is :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A U Tube With Both Ends Open To The Atmosphere Is Partially Filled With Water

  1. 650 kg m-3
  2. 425 kg m-3
  3. 800 kg m-3
  4. 928 kg m-3

Answer: 4. 928 kg m-3

Question 127. A small hole of area of cross-section 2 mm2 is present near the bottom of a fully filled open tank of height 2 m. Taking g = 10 m/s2, the rate of flow of water through the open hole would be nearly

  1. 6.4 × 10-6 m3/s
  2. 12.6 × 10-6 m3/s
  3. 8.9 × 10-6 m3/s
  4. 2.23 × 10-6 m3/s

Answer: 2. 12.6 × 10-6 m3/s

Question 128. In a U-tube, as shown in the figure water and oil are on the left side and right side of the tube respectively. The heights from the bottom for water and oil columns are 15 cm and 20 cm respectively. The density of the oil is: [take ρwater = 1000 kg/m3]

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A U Tube Water And Oil Are In The Left Side And Right Side Of The Tube Respectively

  1. 1200 kg/m3
  2. 750 kg/m3
  3. 1000 kg/m3
  4. 1333 kg/m3

Answer: 2. 750 kg/m3

Question 129. A liquid does not wet the solid surface if the angle of contact is:

  1. Equal to 45°
  2. Equal to 60°
  3. Greater than 90°
  4. Zero

Answer: 3. Greater than 90°

Question 130. A barometer is constructed using a liquid (density = 760 kg/m3). What would be the height of the liquid column, when a mercury barometer reads 76 cm? (Density of mercury = 13600 kg/m

  1. 1.36 m
  2. 13.6 m
  3. 136 m
  4. 0.76 m

Answer: 2. 13.6 m

Question 131. A capillary tube of radius r is immersed in water and water rises in it to a height h. The mass of the water in the capillary is 5g. Another capillary tube of radius 2r is immersed in water. The mass of water that will rise in this tube is

  1. 20.0 g
  2. 2.5 g
  3. 5.0 g
  4. 10.0g

Answer: 4. 10.0g

Question 132. The velocity of a small ball of mass M and density, when dropped in a container filled with glycerine becomes constant after some time. If the density of glycerine is d/2, then the viscous force acting on the ball will be

  1. Mg
  2. \(\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{Mg}\)
  3. 2Mg
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{Mg}}{2}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{\mathrm{Mg}}{2}\)

Question 133. Water is flowing continuously from a tap having an internal diameter 8 × 10-3 m. The water velocity as it leaves the tap is 0.4 ms-1. The diameter of the water stream at a distance 2 × 10-1 m below the tap is close to :

  1. 5.0 × 10-3 m
  2. 7.5 × 10-3 m
  3. 9.6 × 10-3 m
  4. 3.6 × 10-3 m

Answer: 4. 3.6 × 10-3 m

Question 134. A wooden cube (density of wood ‘d’) of side ‘l’ floats in a liquid of density ‘p’ with its upper and lower surfaces horizontal. If the cube is pushed slightly down and released, it performs a simple harmonic motion of period ‘T’. Then, ‘T’ is equal to :

  1. \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\ell \mathrm{d}}{\rho \mathrm{g}}}\)
  2. \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\ell \rho}{d g}}\)
  3. \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\ell d}{(\rho-d) g}}\)
  4. \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\ell \rho}{(\rho-d) g}}\)

Answer: 1. \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\ell \mathrm{d}}{\rho \mathrm{g}}}\)

Question 135. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having cross-sectional area A is suspended, with its length vertical, from a fixed point by a massless spring such that it is half submerged in a liquid of density σ at the equilibrium position. The extension x0 of the spring when it is in equilibrium is : (Here k is spring constant)

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{Mg}}{\mathrm{k}}\)
  2. \(\frac{M g}{k}\left(1-\frac{L A \sigma}{M}\right)\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{Mg}}{\mathrm{k}}\left(1-\frac{\mathrm{LA} \sigma}{2 \mathrm{M}}\right)\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{Mg}}{\mathrm{k}}\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{LA} \sigma}{\mathrm{M}}\right)\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mathrm{Mg}}{\mathrm{k}}\left(1-\frac{\mathrm{LA} \sigma}{2 \mathrm{M}}\right)\)

Question 136. There is a circular tube in a vertical plane. Two liquids that do not mix and of densities d1 and d2 are filled in the tube. Each liquid subtends a 90° angle at the center. The radius joining their interface makes an angle α with vertical. Ratio \(\frac{d_1}{d_2}\) is :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 5 Fluid Mechanics A Circular Tube In A Vertical Plane

  1. \(\frac{1+\sin \alpha}{1-\sin \alpha}\)
  2. \(\frac{1+\cos \alpha}{1-\cos \alpha}\)
  3. \(\frac{1+\tan \alpha}{1-\tan \alpha}\)
  4. \(\frac{1+\sin \alpha}{1-\cos \alpha}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{1+\tan \alpha}{1-\tan \alpha}\)

Question 137. The top of a water tank is open to air and its water level is maintained. It is giving out 0.74 m3/ min. water per minute through a circular opening of a 2 cm radius in its wall. The depth of the center of the opening from the level of water in the tank is close to :

  1. 2.9 m
  2. 9.6 m
  3. 4.8 m
  4. 6.0 m

Answer: 3. 4.8 m

Question 138. A cylindrical plastic bottle of negligible mass is filled with 310 ml of water and left floating in a pond with still water. If pressed downward slightly and released, it starts performing simple harmonic motion at angular frequency ω. If the radius of the bottle is 2.5 cm then ω is close to : (density of water = 103 kg/m3)

  1. 5.00 rad s-1
  2. 3.70 rad s-1
  3. 2.50 rad s-1
  4. 1.25 rad s-1

Answer: 4. 1.25 rad s-1

Question 139. A liquid of density is coming out of a hose pipe of radius a with horizontal speed and hits a mesh. 50% of the liquid passes through the mesh unaffected. 25% loses all of its momentum and 25% comes back with the same speed. The resultant pressure on the mesh will be :

  1. \(\frac{1}{2} \rho v^2\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{4} \rho v^2\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{4} \rho v^2\)
  4. \(\rho v^2\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{3}{4} \rho v^2\)

Question 140. A load of mass M kg is suspended from a steel wire of length 2 m and radius 1.0 mm in Searle’s apparatus experiment. The increase in length produced in the wire is 4.0 mm. Now the load is fully immersed in a liquid of relative density 2. The relative density of the material of load is 8. The new value of the increase in length of the steel wire is :

  1. 3.0 mm
  2. Zero
  3. 5.0 mm
  4. 4.0

Answer: 1. 3.0 mm

NEET Physics Class 11 Chapter 3 Centre Of Mass Notes

Centre Of Mass

Every physical system has associated with it a certain point whose motion characterizes the motion of the whole system.

  • When the system moves under some external forces, then this point moves as if the entire mass of the system is concentrated at this point and also the external force is applied at this point for translational motion.
  • This point is called the center of mass of the system.

Centre Of Mass Of A System Of ‘N’ Discrete Particles

Consider a system of N point masses m1, m2, m3, ……………. mn whose position vectors from origin O are given by \(\vec{r}_1, \vec{r}_2, \vec{r}_3, \ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots. \vec{r}_n\) respectively. Then the position vector of the center of mass C of the system is given by.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Discrete Particles

⇒ \(\vec{r}_{c m}=\frac{m_1 \vec{r}_1+m_2 \vec{r}_2+\ldots \ldots . .+m_n \vec{r}_n}{m_1+m_2+\ldots \ldots . .+m_n}\)

⇒ \(\vec{r}_{c m}=\frac{\sum_{i=1}^n m_i \vec{r}_i}{\sum_{i=1}^n m_i}\)

⇒ \(\vec{r}_{\mathrm{cm}}=\frac{1}{M} \sum_{\mathrm{i}=1}^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{i}} \vec{r}_{\mathrm{i}}\)

where, \(\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{i}} \vec{r}_{\mathrm{i}}\) iis called the moment of mass of the particle w.r.t O.

⇒ \(M=\left(\sum_{i=1}^n m_i\right)\) is the total mass of the system.

Note: If the origin is taken at the center of mass then \(\sum_{i=1}^n m_i \vec{r}_i=0\). Hence, the COM is the point about which the sum of the “mass moments” of the system is zero.

Position Of Com Of Two Particles

The Centre of mass of two particles of masses m1 and m2 separated by a distance r lies in between the two particles. The distance of the center of mass from any of the particles (r) is inversely proportional to the mass of the particle (m)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Centre Of Mass Of Two Particles Of Masses

i.e. \(r \propto 1 / m\)

⇒ \(\frac{r_1}{r_2}=\frac{m_2}{m_1}\)

⇒ \(m_1 r_1=m_2 r_2\)

⇒ \(r_1=\left(\frac{m_2}{m_2+m_1}\right) r \text { and } r_2=\left(\frac{m_1}{m_1+m_2}\right) r\)

Here, r1= distance of COM from m1

and r2= distance of COM from m2

From the above discussion, we see that

r1= r2= 1/2 if m1= m2, i.e., COM lies midway between the two particles of equal masses.

Similarly, r1> r2 if  m1< m2 and r1< r2if m2<1m1, i.e., COM is nearer to the particle having a larger mass.

Question 1. Two particles of mass 1 kg and 2 kg are located at x = 0 and x = 3 m. Find the position of their center of mass.
Answer:

Since both the particles lie on the x-axis, the COM will also lie on the x-axis. Let the COM be located at x = x, then

r1= distance of COM from the particle of mass 1 kg = x

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Two Particles Of Mass 1 kg And 2 kg Are Located

and r2 = distance of COM from the particle of mass 2 kg = (3 – x)

Using \(\frac{r_1}{r_2}=\frac{m_2}{m_1}\)

or \(\frac{x}{3-x}=\frac{2}{1} \text { or } x=2 m\)

Thus, the COM of the two particles is located at x = 2 m.

Question 2. The position vector of three particles of masses m1= 1 kg, m2= 2 kg and m3= 3 kg are

⇒ \(\vec{r}_1=(\hat{i}+4 \hat{j}+\hat{k}) m, \vec{r}_2=(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k}) m\) and \(\vec{r}_3=(2 \hat{i}-\hat{j}-2 \hat{k}) m\) respectively.

Find the position vector of their center of mass.

Answer:

The position vector of COM of the three particles will be given by \(\vec{r}_{\text {COM }}=\frac{m_1 \vec{r}_1+m_2 \vec{r}_2+m_3 \vec{r}_3}{m_1+m_2+m_3}\)

Substituting the values, we get

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{\text {COM }}=\frac{(1)(\hat{i}+4 \hat{j}+\hat{k})+(2)(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k})+(3)(2 \hat{i}-\hat{j}-2 \hat{k})}{1+2+3}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2}(3 \hat{i}+\hat{j}-\hat{k}) m\)

Question 3. Four particles of mass 1 kg, 2 kg, 3 kg, and 4 kg are placed at the four vertices A, B, C, and D of a square of side 1 m. Find the position of the center of mass of the particles.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Position Of Centre Of Mass Of The Particles

Answer:

Assuming D as the origin, DC as the x-axis, and DA as the y-axis, we have

m1= 1 kg, (x1, y1) = (0, 1m)

m2= 2 kg, (x2, y2) = (1m, 1m)

m3= 3 kg, (x3, y3) = (1m, 0)

and m4= 4 kg, (x4, y4) = (0, 0)

Co-ordinates of their COM are

⇒ \(x_{\text {com }}=\frac{m_1 x_1+m_2 x_2+m_3 m_3+m_4 x_4}{m_1+m_2+m_3+m_4}\)

⇒ \(\frac{(1)(0)+2(1)+3(1)+4(0)}{1+2+3+4}\)

⇒ \(\frac{5}{10}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2}\)

= 0.5m

Similarly, \(\mathrm{y}_{\text {com }}=\frac{\mathrm{m}_1 \mathrm{y}_1+\mathrm{m}_2 \mathrm{y}_2+\mathrm{m}_3 \mathrm{y}_3+\mathrm{m}_4 \mathrm{y}_4}{\mathrm{~m}_1+\mathrm{m}_2+\mathrm{m}_3+\mathrm{m}_4}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Position Of Centre Of Mass Of The Particles.

⇒ \(\frac{(1)(1)+2(1)+3(0)+4(0)}{1+2+3+4}\)

⇒ \(\frac{3}{10}\)

0.3

∴ (xCOM, yCOM) = (0.5 m, 0.3 m)

Thus, the position of COM of the four particles is as shown in the figure.

Question 4. Consider a two-particle system with the particles having masses m1 and m1. If the first particle is pushed towards the center of mass through a distance d, by what distance should the second particle be moved to keep the center of mass at the same position?
Answer:

Consider figure. Suppose the distance of m1 from the center of mass C is x1 and that of m2 from C is x2. Suppose the mass m2 is moved through a distance d′ towards C to keep the center of mass at C.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Consider A Two Particle System With The Particles Having Masses M 1 And M 2

Then, m1x1= m2x2………(1)

and m1(x1– d) = m2(x2– d′). ……… (2)

Subtracting from

m1d = m2d′

or, d′ = \(\frac{m_1}{m_2} d\)

Centre Of Mass Of A Continuous Mass Distribution

For continuous mass distribution, the center of mass can be located by replacing the summation sign with an integral sign. Proper limits for the integral are chosen according to the situation

⇒ \(x_{c m}=\frac{\int x d m}{\int d m}, y_{c m}=\frac{\int y d m}{\int d m}, z_{c m}=\frac{\int z d m}{\int d m}\)

∫dm= M (mass of the body)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{\mathrm{cm}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{M}} \int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}} \mathrm{dm}\)

Note: If an object has symmetric mass distribution about the axis then the y coordinate of COM is zero and vice versa

Centre Of Mass Of A Uniform Rod

Suppose a rod of mass M and length L is lying along the x-axis with its one end at x = 0 and the other at x = L. Mass per unit length of the rod = \(\frac{M}{L}\)

Hence, dm, (the mass of the element dx situated at x = x is) = \(\frac{M}{L}\) dx

The coordinates of the element dx are (x, 0, 0). Therefore, the x-coordinate of COM of the rod will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Center Of Mass Of A Uniform Rod

⇒ \(x_{\text {com }}=\frac{\int_0^L x d m}{\int d m}=\frac{\int_0^L(x)\left(\frac{M}{L} d x\right)}{M}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{L} \int_0^L x d x=\frac{L}{2}\)

The y-coordinate of COM is

⇒ \(y_{\text {com }}=\frac{\int y d m}{\int d m}=0\)

Similarly, ZCOM = 0

i.e., the coordinates of COM of the rod are \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{2}, 0,0\right)\) i.e. it lies at the center of the rod.

Question 1. A rod of length L is placed along the x-axis between x = 0 and x = L. The linear density (mass/length) λ of the rod varies with the distance x from the origin as λ = Rx. Here, R is a positive constant. Find the position of the center of mass of this rod.
Answer:

The mass of element dx situated at x = x is

dm = λ dx = Rx dx

The COM of the element has coordinates (x, 0, 0).

Therefore, the x-coordinate of COM of the rod will be

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Rod Of Length L Is Placed Along The X Axis The Position Of Center Of Mass Of This Rod

⇒ \(x_{\text {com }}=\frac{\int_0^L x d m}{\int d m}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\int_0^L(x)(R x) d x}{\int_0^L(R x) d x}\)

⇒ \(\frac{R \int_0^L x^2 d x}{R \int_0^L x d x}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\left[\frac{x^3}{3}\right]_0^L}{\left[\frac{x^2}{2}\right]_0^L}\)

⇒ \(\frac{2 L}{3}\)

The y-coordinate of COM of the rod is \(\mathrm{y}_{\mathrm{com}}=\frac{\int \mathrm{ydm}}{\int \mathrm{dm}}\) = 0 (as y = 0)

Similarly, ZCOM = 0

Hence, the center of mass of the rod lies at \(\left[\frac{2 L}{3}, 0,0\right]\)

1. The center of mass of a uniform rectangular, square, or circular plate lies at its center. Axis of symmetry plane of symmetry.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Centre Of Mass Of A Uniform Axis Of Symmetry Plane Of Symmetry

2. For a laminar type (2-dimensional) body with uniform negligible thickness the formulae for finding the position of the center of mass are as follows:

⇒ \(\vec{r}_{\text {COM }}=\frac{m_1 \vec{r}_1+m_2 \vec{r}_2+\ldots}{m_1+m_2+\ldots}=\frac{\rho A_1 t \vec{r}_1+\rho A_2 t_r+\ldots}{\rho A_1 t+\rho A_2 t+\ldots}\)

( m = ρAt)

⇒ \(\vec{r}_{\text {COM }}=\frac{A_1 \vec{r}_1+A_2 \vec{r}_2+\ldots}{A_1+A_2+\ldots}\)

Here, A stands for the area,

3. If some mass of area is removed from a rigid body, then the position of the center of mass of the remaining portion is obtained from the following formulae:

⇒ \(\vec{r}_{\text {COM }}=\frac{m_1 \vec{r}_1-m_2 \vec{r}_2}{m_1-m_2}\)

or \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{\text {COM }}=\frac{\mathrm{A}_1 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_1-\mathrm{A}_2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_2}{\mathrm{~A}_1-\mathrm{A}_2}\)

⇒ \(x_{\text {COM }}=\frac{m_1 x_1-m_2 x_2}{m_1-m_2}\)

or \(\mathrm{x}_{\text {COM }}=\frac{\mathrm{A}_1 \mathrm{x}_1-\mathrm{A}_2 \mathrm{x}_2}{\mathrm{~A}_1-\mathrm{A}_2}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{y}_{\text {COM }}=\frac{\mathrm{m}_1 \mathrm{y}_1-\mathrm{m}_2 \mathrm{y}_2}{\mathrm{~m}_1-\mathrm{m}_2}\)

or \(\mathrm{y}_{\text {COM }}=\frac{\mathrm{A}_1 \mathrm{y}_1-\mathrm{A}_2 \mathrm{y}_2}{\mathrm{~A}_1-\mathrm{A}_2}\)

and \(z_{\text {COM }}=\frac{m_1 z_1-m_2 z_2}{m_1-m_2}\)

or \(z_{\text {COM }}=\frac{A_1 z_1-A_2 z_2}{A_1-A_2}\)

Here, m1, A1, x1, y1 and z1 are the values for the whole mass while m2, A2, \(\vec{r}_2, \vec{x}_2\) y2 and z2are the values for the mass which has been removed. Let us see two Questions in support of the above theory.

Question 2. Find the position of the center of mass of the uniform lamina shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Position Of Centre Of Mass Of The Uniform Lamina

Answer:

Here,

A1 = area of complete circle = πa2

A2= area of small circle = \(\pi\left(\frac{a}{2}\right)^2=\frac{\pi a^2}{4}\)

(x1, y1) = coordinates of centre of mass of large circle = (0, 0)

and (x2, y2) = coordinates of centre of mass of small circle = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{a}}{2}, 0\right)\)

Using \(x_{\text {COM }}=\frac{\mathrm{A}_1 \mathrm{x}_1-\mathrm{A}_2 \mathrm{x}_2}{\mathrm{~A}_1-\mathrm{A}_2}\)

we get \(\mathrm{x}_{\text {com }}=\frac{-\frac{\pi \mathrm{a}^2}{4}\left(\frac{\mathrm{a}}{2}\right)}{\pi \mathrm{a}^2-\frac{\pi \mathrm{a}^2}{4}}=\frac{-\left(\frac{1}{8}\right)}{\left(\frac{3}{4}\right)} \mathrm{a}=-\frac{\mathrm{a}}{6}\)

and yCOM = 0 as y1 and y2 both are zero.

Therefore, the coordinates of COM of the lamina shown in the figure are \(\left(-\frac{a}{6}, 0\right)\)

Centre Of Mass Of Some Common Systems

A system of two point masses m1 r1= m2 r2 The center of mass lies closer to the heavier mass.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Centre Of Mass Lies Closer To The Heavier Mass

Rectangular plate (By symmetry)

⇒ \(\mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{c}}=\frac{\mathrm{b}}{2}\)

⇒ \(y_c=\frac{L}{2}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Rectangular Plate

A triangular plate (By qualitative argument)

at the centroid : \(y_c=\frac{h}{3}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Triangular Plate

A semi-circular ring \(y_c=\frac{2 R}{\pi}\)

xc = 0

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Semi Circular Ring

A semi-circular disc

⇒ \(y_c=\frac{4 R}{3 \pi}\)

xc = 0

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Semi Circular Disc

A hemispherical shell

⇒ \(y_c=\frac{R}{2}\)

xc = 0

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Hemispherical Shell

A solid hemisphere

⇒ \(y_c=\frac{3 R}{8}\)

xc= 0

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Solid Hemisphere

A circular cone (solid)

⇒ \(y_c=\frac{h}{4}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Circular Cone

A circular cone (hollow)

⇒ \(y_c=\frac{h}{3}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Circular Cone Hollow

Question 1. A uniform thin rod is bent in the form of closed loop ABCDEFA as shown in the figure. The y-coordinate of the center of mass of the system is

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Uniform Thin Rod Is Bent In The Y Coordinate Of The Centre Of Mass Of The System

  1. \(\frac{2 r}{\pi}\)
  2. \(-\frac{6 r}{3 \pi+2}\)
  3. \(-\frac{2 r}{\pi}\)
  4. Zero

Answer:

The center of mass of a semicircular ring is at a distance from its center.

(Let λ = mass/length)

∴ \(Y_{c m}=\frac{\lambda \pi r \times \frac{2 r}{\pi}-\lambda \times 2 \pi r \times \frac{4 r}{\pi}}{\lambda \pi r+\lambda r+\lambda r+\lambda \times 2 \pi r}=-\frac{6 r}{3 \pi+2}\)

Motion Of Centre Of Mass And Conservation Of Momentum:

Velocity Of Centre Of Mass Of System

⇒ \(\vec{v}_{c m}=\frac{m_1 \frac{d \vec{r}_1}{d t}+m_2 \frac{d\vec{r}_2}{d t}+m_3 \frac{d \vec{r}_3}{d t} \ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots . .+m_n \frac{d \vec{r}_n}{d t}}{M}\)

⇒ \(\frac{m_1 \vec{v}_1+m_2 \vec{v}_2+m_3 \vec{v}_3 \ldots \ldots \ldots .+m_n \vec{v}_n}{M}\)

Here, the numerator of the right-hand side term is the total momentum of the system i.e., the summation of momentum of the individual component (particle) of the system

Hence, the velocity of the center of mass of the system is the ratio of the momentum of the system to the mass of the system.

∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}_{\text {System }}=\mathrm{M} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{cm}}\)

Acceleration Of Centre Of Mass Of System

⇒ \(\vec{a}_{c m}=\frac{m_1 \frac{d \overrightarrow{v_1}}{d t}+m_2 \frac{d \overrightarrow{v_2}}{d t}+m_3 \frac{d \overrightarrow{v_3}}{d t} \ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots . .+m_n \frac{d \overrightarrow{v_n}}{d t}}{M}\)

⇒ \(\frac{m_1 \vec{a}_1+m_2 \vec{a}_2+m_3 \vec{a}_3 \ldots \ldots \ldots . .+m_n \vec{a}_n}{M}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\text { Net forceonsystem }}{\mathrm{M}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\text { Net External Force }+ \text { Net internal Force }}{\mathrm{M}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\text { Net External Force }}{\mathrm{M}}\)

( action and reaction both of an internal force must be within the system. Vector summation will cancel all internal forces and hence net internal force on the system is zero)

∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{ext}}=\mathrm{M} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}_{\mathrm{cm}}\)

Where \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\text {ext }}\) is the sum of the ‘external’ forces acting on the system. The internal forces which the

particles exert on one another play absolutely no role in the motion of the center of mass.

If no external force is acting on a system of particles, the acceleration of center of mass of the system will be zero. If ac= 0, it implies that vc must be a constant and if vcm is a constant, it implies that the total momentum of the system must remain constant. It leads to the principle of conservation of momentum in the absence of external forces.

If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\text {ext }}\) = 0 ext = then \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{cm}}\) = constant

“If a resultant external force is zero on the system, then the net momentum of the system must remain constant”.

Motion Of COM In A Moving System Of Particles:

COM at rest :

If Fext = 0 and Vcm= 0, then COM remains at rest. Individual components of the system may move and have non-zero momentum due to mutual forces (internal), but the net momentum of the system remains zero.

All the particles of the system are at rest.

Particles are moving such that their net momentum is zero.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Motion Of COM In A Moving System Of Particles

A bomb at rest suddenly explodes into various smaller fragments, all moving in different directions then, since the explosive forces are internal and there is no external force on the system for explosion therefore, the COM of the bomb will remain at the original position and the fragment fly such that their net momentum remains zero.

  • Two men standing on a frictionless platform, push each other, then also their net momentum remains zero because the push forces are internal for the two-men system.
  • A boat floating in a lake also has a net momentum of zero if the people on it change their position, because the friction force required to move the people is internal to the boat system.
  • Objects initially at rest, if moving under mutual forces (electrostatic or gravitation)also have net momentum zero.
  • A light spring of spring constant k is kept compressed between two blocks of masses m1 and m2 on a smooth horizontal surface. When released, the blocks acquire velocities in opposite directions, such that the net momentum is zero.

(In a fan, all particles are moving but COM is at rest

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass In A Fan All Particles Are Moving But COM Is At Rest

COM Moving With Uniform Velocity:

If Fext = 0, then Vcm remains constant therefore, the net momentum of the system also remains conserved. Individual components of the system may have variable velocity and momentum due to mutual forces (internal), but the net momentum of the system remains constant and COM continues to move with the initial velocity.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass COM Moving With Uniform Velocity

  1. All the particles of the system are moving with the same velocity.
  2. For example: A car moving with uniform speed on a straight road, has its COM moving with a constant velocity.
  3. Internal explosions/breaking does not change the motion of COM and net momentum remains conserved.
  4. A bomb moving in a straight line suddenly explodes into various smaller fragments, all moving in different directions then, since the explosive forces are internal and there is no external force on the system for explosion therefore, the COM of the bomb will continue the original motion and the fragment fly such that their net momentum remains conserved.
  5. Man jumping from a cart or buggy also exerts internal forces therefore net momentum of the system and hence, the Motion of COM remains conserved.
  6. Two moving blocks connected by a light spring on a smooth horizontal surface. If the acting forces are only due to spring then COM will remain in its motion and momentum will remain conserved.
  7. Particles colliding in the absence of external impulsive forces also have their momentum conserved.

COM Moving With Acceleration:

If an external force is present then COM continues its original motion as if the external force is acting on it, irrespective of internal forces.

COM Moving With Acceleration Example:

Projectile motion: An axe thrown in the air at an angle θ with the horizontal will perform a complicated motion of rotation as well as a parabolic motion under the effect of gravitation

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass COM Moving With Acceleration

⇒ \(\mathrm{H}_{\mathrm{com}}=\frac{\mathrm{u}^2 \sin ^2 \theta}{2 \mathrm{~g}}\)

⇒ \(R_{c o m}=\frac{u^2 \sin 2 \theta}{g}\)

⇒ \(T=\frac{2 u \sin \theta}{g}\)

Circular Motion: A rod hinged at an end, rotates, then its COM performs circular motion. The centripetal force (Fc) required in the circular motion is assumed to be acting on the COM.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Circular Motion

Fc = ω2RCOM

Question 1. A projectile is fired at a speed of 100 m/s at an angle of 37º above the horizontal. At the highest point, the projectile breaks into two parts of mass ratio 1 : 3, the lighter piece coming to rest. Find the distance from the launching point to the point where the heavier piece lands.
Answer:

Internal force does not affect the motion of the center of mass, the center of mass hits the ground at the position where the original projectile would have landed. The range of the original projectile is,

⇒ \(\mathrm{x}_{\text {com }}=\frac{2 \mathrm{u}^2 \sin \theta \cos \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{2 \times 10^4 \times \frac{3}{5} \times \frac{4}{5}}{10} \mathrm{~m}\)

= 960 m

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Centre Of Mass Will Hit The Ground At This Position

The center of mass will hit the ground at this position. As the smaller block comes to rest after breaking, it falls down vertically and hits the ground at half of the range, i.e., at x = 480 m. If the heavier block hits the ground at x2, then

⇒ \(x_{\text {COM }}=\frac{m_1 x_1+m_2 x_2}{m_1+m_2}\)

960 = \(\frac{(m)(480)+(3 m)\left(x_2\right)}{(m+3 m)}\)

x2= 1120

Momentum Conservation:

The total linear momentum of a system of particles is equal to the product of the total mass of the system and the velocity of its center of mass.

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}=\mathrm{M} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{cm}}\)

⇒ \(\vec{F}_{\text {ext }}=\frac{\overrightarrow{d P}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

If \(\vec{F}_{\text {ext }}=0 \frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dt}} \Rightarrow=0\)

⇒ \(\vec{p}\) = constant

When the vector sum of the external forces acting on a system is zero, the total linear momentum of the system remains constant.

⇒ \(\vec{P}_1+\vec{P}_2+\vec{P}_3+\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots+=\vec{P}_n\) constant

Question 2. A shell is fired from a cannon with a speed of 100 m/s at an angle 60º with the horizontal (positive x-direction). At the highest point of its trajectory, the shell explodes into two equal fragments. One of the fragments moves along the negative x-direction with a speed of 50 m/s. What is the speed of the other fragment at the time of the explosion?
Answer:

As we know in the absence of external force the motion of the center of mass of a body remains unaffected. Thus, here the center of mass of the two fragments will continue to follow the original projectile path. The velocity of the shell at the highest point of trajectory is

vM= ucosθ = 100 ×cos60º = 50 m/s.

Let v1 be the speed of the fragment that moves along the negative x-direction and the other fragment has speed v2, which must be along the positive x-direction. Now from momentum conservation, we have

⇒ \(m v=\frac{-m}{2} v_1+\frac{m}{2} v_2\)

or 2v = v2-v1

or v2 = 2v+v1

= (2×50) + 50 = 150m/s

Question 3. A man of mass m is standing on a platform of mass M kept on smooth ice. If the man starts moving on the platform with a speed v relative to the platform, with what velocity relative to the ice does the platform recoil?
Answer:

Consider the situation shown in the figure. Suppose the man moves at a speed w towards the right and the platform recoils at a speed of V towards the left, both relative to the ice. Hence, the speed of the man relative to the platform is V + w. By the question,

V + w = v, or w = v – V ………….(1)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Man Of Mass M Is Standing On A Platform Of Mass M Kept On Smooth Ice

Taking the platform and the man to be the system, there is no external horizontal force on the system. The linear momentum of the system remains constant. Initially, both the man and the platform were at rest. Thus,

0 = MV – mw or, MV = m (v – V) [Using (1)]

or, V = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}}{\mathrm{M}+\mathrm{m}}\)

Question 4. In a free space, a rifle of mass M shoots a bullet of mass m at a stationary block of mass M distance D away from it. When the bullet has moved through a distance d towards the block the center of mass of the bullet-block system is at a distance of :

  1. \(\frac{(D-d) m}{M+m}\) from the block
  2. \(\frac{m d+M D}{M+m}\) from the rifle
  3. \(\frac{2 \mathrm{dm}+\mathrm{DM}}{\mathrm{M}+\mathrm{m}}\) from the rifle
  4. \((D-d) \frac{M}{M+m}\) from the bullet

Answer: (1,2,4)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Centre Of Mass Of The Bullet Block System

As; Mx = m(D – d – x) x = \(\frac{m(D-d)}{M+m}\) from the block

and x’ = D – d – x = \(\frac{(D-d) M}{M+m}\) from the bullet.

Question 5. The center of mass of two masses m & m′ moves by distance \(\frac{x}{5}\) when mass m is moved by distance x and m′ is kept fixed. The ratio \(\frac{m’}{m}\) is

  1. 2
  2. 4
  3. 1/4
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. 4

(m + m′)\(\frac{x}{5}\) = mx + m′O

∴ m + m′ = 5 m ; m’ = 4m

⇒ \(\frac{m’}{m}\) = 4

Question 6. A person P of mass 50 kg stands in the middle of a boat of mass 100 kg moving at a constant velocity of 10 m/s with no friction between water and boat and also the engine of the boat is shut off. With what velocity (relative to the boat’s surface) should the person move so that the boat comes to rest? Neglect friction between water and boat.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Neglect Friction Between Water And Boat

  1. 30 m/s towards right
  2. 20 m/s towards right
  3. 30 m/s towards left
  4. 20 m/s towards left

Answer: 1. 30 m/s towards right

The momentum of the system remains conserved as no external force is acting on the system in a horizontal direction.

∴ (50 + 100) 10 = 50 × V + 100 × 0 ⇒ V = 30 m/s towards right, as boat is at rest.

V = 30 m/s Pboat

Question 7. Two men of masses 80 kg and 60 kg are standing on a wood plank of mass 100 kg, that has been placed over a smooth surface. If both the men start moving toward each other with speeds 1 m/s and 2 m/s respectively then find the velocity of the plank by which it starts moving.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass If Both The Men Start Moving Toward Each Other With Speed The Velocity Of The Plank By Which It Starts Moving

Answer:

Applying momentum conservation ;

(80) 1 + 60 (– 2) = (80 + 60 + 100) v

v = \(\frac{-40}{240}\)

⇒ \(-\frac{1}{6}\) m/sec.

Question 8. Each of the blocks shown in the figure has a mass of 1 kg. The rear block moves with a speed of 2 m/s towards the front block kept at rest. The spring attached to the front block is light and has a spring constant of 50 N/m. Find the maximum compression of the spring. Assume, on a frictionless surface

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Maximum Compression Of The Spring Assume On A Friction Less Surface

Answer:

Maximum compression will take place when the blocks move with equal velocity. As no net external horizontal force acts on the system of the two blocks, the total linear momentum will remain constant. If V is the common speed at maximum compression, we have,

(1 kg) (2 m/s) = (1 kg)V + (1 kg)V or, V = 1 m/s.

Initial kinetic energy = \(\frac{1}{2}\)(1 kg) (2 m/s)2 = 2 J.

Final kinetic energy = \(\frac{1}{2}\)(1 kg) (1m/s)2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) (1 kg) (1 m/s)2 = 1 J

The kinetic energy lost is stored as the elastic energy in the spring.

Hence, \(\frac{1}{2}\)(50 N/m) x2 = 2J – 1J = 1 J

or x = 0.2 m.

Question 9. The figure shows two blocks of masses 5 kg and 2 kg placed on a frictionless surface and connected with a spring. An external kick gives a velocity of 14 m/s to the heavier block towards the lighter one. Find the velocity gained by the center of mass

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Velocity Of Centre Of Mass

Answer:

The velocity of the center of mass is

⇒ \(v_{c m}=\frac{5 \times 14+2 \times 0}{5+2}\)

= 10m/s

Question 10. The two blocks A and B of the same mass are connected to a spring and placed on a smooth surface. They are given velocities (as shown in the figure) when the spring is at its natural length:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass When The Spring Is In Its Natural Length

  1. The maximum velocity of B will be 10 m/s
  2. The maximum velocity of B will be greater than 10 m/s
  3. The spring will have maximum extension when A and B both stop
  4. The spring will have maximum extension when both move toward the left.

Answer:

  • Suppose B moves with a velocity more than 10 m/s a should move at a velocity greater than 5 m/s and increase the overall energy which is not possible since there is no external force acting on the system.
  • Hence B should move with a maximum velocity of 10 m/s. Also, both A and B can never stop so as to keep the momentum constant.
  • Also, both A and B can never move towards the left simultaneously for momentum to remain conserved. Hence only (A) is correct.

Impulse

Impulse of a force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) acting on a body for the time interval t = t1 to t = t2 is defined as :- dv

⇒ \(\vec{I}=\int_{t_1}^{t_2} \vec{F} d t\)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}}=\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \mathrm{dt}=\int \mathrm{m} \frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{dt}} \mathrm{dt}=\int \mathrm{md} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}}=\mathrm{m}\left(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_2-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_1\right)\)

ΔP= change in momentum due to force F

Also, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}}_{\text {Res }}=\int_{\mathrm{t}_1}^{\mathrm{t}_2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\text {Res }} d t=\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)

(impulse-momentum theorem)

Note: Impulse applied to an object in a given time interval can also be calculated from the area under force time (F-t) graph in the same time interval.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Impulse

Instantaneous Impulse:

There are many cases when a force acts for such a short time that the effect is instantaneous, for example., a bat striking a ball.

In such cases, although the magnitude of the force and the time for which it acts may each be unknown the value of their product (i.e., impulse) can be known by measuring the initial and final moment. Thus, we can write.

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}}=\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \mathrm{dt}=\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}_{\mathrm{f}}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}_{\mathrm{i}}\)

Important Points:

  1. It is a vector quantity.
  2. Dimensions = [MLT-1]
  3. SΙ unit = kg m/s
  4. Direction is along a change in momentum.
  5. Magnitude is equal to the area under the F-t. graph.
  6. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}}=\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{dt}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{av}} \int \mathrm{dt}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{av}} \Delta \mathrm{t}\)
  7. It is not a property of a particle, but it is a measure of the degree to which an external force changes the momentum of the particle.

Question 1. The hero of a stunt film fires 50 g bullets from a machine gun, each at a speed of 1.0 km/s. If he fires 20 bullets in 4 seconds, what average force does he exert against the machine gun during this period?
Answer:

The momentum of each bullet

= (0.050 kg) (1000 m/s) = 50 kg-m/s.

The gun has imparted this much amount of momentum with each bullet fired. Thus, the rate of change of momentum of the gun

⇒ \(\frac{(50 \mathrm{~kg}-\mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}) \times 20}{4 \mathrm{~s}}\)

= 250 N

In order to hold the gun, the hero must exert a force of 250 N against the gun.

Collision Or Impact

A collision is an event in which an impulsive force acts between two or more bodies for a short time, which results in a change in their velocities.

Note:

  1. In a collision, particles may or may not come in physical contact.
  2. The duration of collision, Δt is negligible as compared to the usual time intervals of observation of motion.

The collision is in fact a redistribution of the total momentum of the particles. Thus, the law of conservation of linear momentum is indispensable in dealing with the phenomenon of collision between particles.

Line Of Impact

The line passing through the common normal to the surfaces in contact during impact is called a line of impact. The force during collision acts along this line on both bodies.

The direction of the Line of impact can be determined by:

  1. The geometry of colliding objects like spheres, discs, wedges,s, etc.
  2. Direction of change of momentum.

If one particle is stationary before the collision then the line of impact will be along its motion after collision.

Classification Of Collisions:

On The Basis Of The Line Of Impact

  1. Head-on collision: If the velocities of the colliding particles are along the same line before and after the collision.
  2. Oblique collision: If the velocities of the colliding particles are along different lines before and after the collision.

On The Basis Of Energy:

  1. Elastic collision: In an elastic collision, the colliding particles regain their shape and size completely after the collision. i.e., no fraction of mechanical energy remains stored as deformation potential energy in the bodies. Thus, the kinetic energy of the system after collision is equal to the kinetic energy of the system before collision. Thus in addition to the linear momentum, kinetic energy also remains conserved before and after collision.
  2. Inelastic collision: In an inelastic collision, the colliding particles do not regain their shape and size completely after collision. Some fraction of mechanical energy is retained by the colliding particles in the form of deformation potential energy. Thus, the kinetic energy of the particles after collision is not equal to that of before collision. However, in the absence of external forces, law of conservation of linear momentum still holds good.
  3. Perfectly inelastic: If the velocity of separation along the line of impact just after collision becomes zero then the collision is perfectly inelastic. Collision is said to be perfectly inelastic if both the particles stick together after collision and move with the same velocity,

Note: Actually collisions between all real objects are neither perfectly elastic nor perfectly inelastic, it’s inelastic in nature.

Examples Of Line Of Impact And Collisions Based On Line Of Impact

Two balls A and B are approaching each other such that their centres are moving along line CD.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Two Balls A And B Are Approaching Each Other Such That Their Centres Are Moving Along Line CD

Head on Collision

Two balls A and B are approaching each other such that their center is moving along dotted lines as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Two Balls A And B Are Approaching Each Other Such That Their Centre Are Moving Along Dotted Lines

Oblique Collision

Ball is falling on a stationary wedge.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Ball Is Falling On A Stationary Wedge

Oblique Collision

Coefficient Of Restitution (e)

e = \(\frac{\text { Velocity of separation along line of impact }}{\text { Velocity of approach along line of impact }}\)

The most general expression for the coefficient of restitution is

e = \(\frac{\text { velocity of separation of points of contact along line of impact }}{\text { velocity of approach of point of contact along line of impact }}\)

Example For Calculation Of e:

Two smooth balls A and B approach each other such that their centers are moving along line CD in the absence of external impulsive force. The velocities of A and B just before collision are u1 and u2 respectively. The velocities of A and B just after collision are v1 and v2 respectively.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Example For Calculation Of E

Fext = 0 momentum is conserved for the system.

⇒ m1u1+ m2u2= (m1+ m2)v = m1v1+ m2v2

⇒ v = \(\frac{m_1 u_1+m_2 u_2}{m_1+m_2}=\frac{m_1 v_1+m_2 v_2}{m_1+m_2}\)…..(1)

Impulse of Deformation:

JD = change in momentum of any one body during deformation.

= m2(v – u2) for m2

= m1(–v + u1) for m1

Impulse Of Reformation:

JR = change in momentum of any one body during Reformation.

= m2(v2– v) for m2

= m1(v – v1) for m1

e = \(=\frac{\text { Impulse of Reformation }\left(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{J}}_{\mathrm{R}}\right)}{\text { Impulse of Deformation }\left(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{J}}_{\mathrm{D}}\right)}\)

⇒ \(\frac{v_2-v_1}{u_1-u_2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\text { Velocity of separation along line of impact }}{\text { Velocity of approach along line of impact }}\)

Note: e is independent of the shape and mass of the object but depends on the material. The coefficient of restitution is constant for a pair of materials.

  1. e = 1 Velocity of separation along the LOI = Velocity of approach along the LOI Kinetic energy of particles after collision may be equal to that of before collision. Collision is elastic.
  2. e = 0 Velocity of separation along the LOI = 0 Kinetic energy of particles after collision is not equal to that of before collision. Collision Is Perfectly Inelastic.
  3. 0 < e < 1 Velocity of separation along the LOI < Velocity of approach along the LOI Kinetic energy of particles after collision is not equal to that of before collision. Collision is Inelastic.

Note: In case of contact collisions e is always less than unity.

∴ 0 ≤ e ≤ 1

Collision In One Dimension (Head on)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Collision In One Dimension

⇒ \(u_1>u_2\)

⇒ \(v_2>v_1\)

⇒ \(e=\frac{v_2-v_1}{u_1-u_2}\)

⇒ \(\left(u_1-u_2\right) e=\left(v_2-v_1\right)\)

By momentum conservation,

m1u1+ m2u2= m1v1+ m2v2

v2= v1+ e(u1– u2)

and \(v_1=\frac{m_1 u_1+m_2 u_2-m_2 e\left(u_1-u_2\right)}{m_1+m_2}\)

⇒ \(v_2=\frac{m_1 u_1+m_2 u_2+m_1 e\left(u_1-u_2\right)}{m_1+m_2}\)

Special Case:

e = 0

v1= v2

For perfectly inelastic collision, both the bodies, move with the same vel. after collision.

e = 1

and m1= m2= m,

we get v1= u2 and v2= u1

i.e., when two particles of equal mass collide elastically and the collision is head-on, they exchange their velocities., for example.,

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Two Particles Of Equal Mass Collide Elastically And The Collision

m1>> m2

⇒ \(\mathrm{m}_1+\mathrm{m}_2 \approx \mathrm{m}_1 \text { and } \frac{\mathrm{m}_2}{\mathrm{~m}_1} \approx 0\)

v1 = u1 No change

and v2= u1+ e(u1– u2)

Now If e = 1

v2= 2u1– u2

Question 1. Two identical balls are approaching each other on a straight line with velocities of 2 m/s and 4 m/s respectively. Find the final velocities, after elastic collision between them.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Two Identical Balls Are Aapproaching Towards Each Other On A Straight Line

Answer:

The two velocities will be exchanged and the final motion is the reverse of the initial motion for both.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Two Velocities Will Be Exchanged And The Final Motion Is Reverse Of Initial Motion For Both

Question 2. Three balls A, B, and C of the same mass ‘m’ are placed on a frictionless horizontal plane in a straight line as shown. Ball A is moved with velocity u towards the middle ball B. If all the collisions are elastic then, find the final velocities of all the balls.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Frictionless Horizontal Plane

Answer:

A collides elastically with B and comes to rest but B starts moving with velocity u

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Collides Elastically With B And Comes To Rest But B Starts Moving With Velocity U

After a while B collides elastically with C and comes to rest but C starts moving with velocity u

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass After A While B Collides Elastically With C And Comes To Rest But C Starts

∴ Final velocities VA = 0; VB= 0 and VC= u

Question 3. Four identical balls A, B, C, and D are placed in a line on a frictionless horizontal surface. A and D are moved with the same speed ‘u’ towards the middle as shown. Assuming elastic collisions, find the final velocities.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Line On A Frictionless Horizontal Surface

Answer:

A and D collide elastically with B and C respectively and come to rest but B and C start moving with velocity u towards each other as shown

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A And D Collides Elastically With B And C Respectively

B and C collide elastically and exchange their velocities to move in opposite directions

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass B And C Collides Elastically And Exchange Their Velocities To Move In Opposite Directions

Now, B and C collide elastically with A and D respectively and come to rest but A and D start moving with velocity u away from each other as shown

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Now B And C Collides Elastically With A And D Respectively

∴ Final velocities VA = u (←); V2= 0; VC= 0 and VD = u (→)

Question 4. Two particles of mass m and 2m moving in opposite directions on a frictionless surface collide elastically with velocity v and 2v respectively. Find their velocities after a collision, also find the fraction of kinetic energy lost by the colliding particles.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Fraction Of Kinetic Energy Lost By The Colliding Particles

Answer:

Let the final velocities of m and 2m be v1 and v2 respectively as shown in the figure:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Final Velocities Of M And 2m Be V1 And V 2 Respectively

By conservation of momentum:

m(2v) + 2m(–v) = m(v1) + 2m (v2)

or 0 = mv1+ 2mv2 or v1+ 2v2= 0 ………(1)

and since the collision is elastic:

v2 – v1 = 2v –(–v) or v2 – v1 = 3v ………(2)

Solving the above two equations, we get,

v2= v and v1= –2v

i.e., the mass 2m returns with velocity v while the mass m returns with velocity 2v in the direction shown in figure:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Mass 2m Returns With Velocity V While The Mass M Returns With Velocity 2v In The Direction

The collision was elastic therefore, no kinetic energy is lost, KE loss = KEi– KEf

or \(\left(\frac{1}{2} m(2 v)^2+\frac{1}{2}(2 m)(-v)^2\right)-\left(\frac{1}{2} m(-2 v)^2+\frac{1}{2}(2 m) v^2\right)\) = 0

Question 5. On a frictionless surface, a ball of mass m moving at a speed v makes a head-on collision with an identical ball at rest. The kinetic energy of the balls after the collision is 3/4th of the original. Find the coefficient of restitution.
Answer:

As we have seen in the above discussion, that under the given conditions :

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Ball Of Mass M Moving At A Speed V Makes A Head On Collision With An Identical Ball At Rest

By using conservation of linear momentum and equation of e, we get,

⇒ \(v_1^{\prime}=\left(\frac{1+e}{2}\right) v\)

and \(v_2^{\prime}=\left(\frac{1-e}{2}\right) v\)

Given that \(\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{3}{4} \mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{i}}\)

or \(\frac{1}{2} m v_1^{\prime 2}+\frac{1}{2} m v_2^{\prime 2}=\frac{3}{4}\left(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\right)\)

Substituting the value, we get

⇒ \(\left(\frac{1+e}{2}\right)^2+\left(\frac{1-e}{2}\right)^2\)

⇒ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

or \(e=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Question 6. A block of mass 2 kg is pushed toward a very heavy object moving with 2 m/s closer to the block (as shown). Assuming elastic collision and frictionless surfaces, find the final velocities of the blocks.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Assuming Elastic Collision And Frictionless Surfaces

Answer:

Let v1 and v2 be the final velocities of the 2kg block and heavy object respectively then,

v1= u1+ 1 (u1– u2) = 2u1– u2 = –14 m/s

v2= –2m/s

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Final Velocities Of 2kg Block And Heavy Object Respectively

Question 7. A ball is moving with velocity of 2 m/s towards a heavy wall moving towards the ball with a speed 1m/s as shown in fig. Assuming collision to be elastic, find the velocity of the ball immediately after the collision.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Assuming Collision To Be Elastic Find The Velocity Of The Ball Immediately After The Collision

Answer:

The speed of wall will not change after the collision. So, let v be the velocity of the ball after collision in the direction shown in figure. Since collision is elastic (e = 1),

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Speed Of Wall Will Not Change After The Collision

separation speed = approach speed

or v – 1 = 2 + 1 or v = 4 m/s

Collision In Two Dimensions (oblique)

Question 8. A ball of mass m hits a floor with a speed v0 making an angle of incidence a with the normal. The coefficient of restitution is e. Find the speed of the reflected ball and the angle of reflection of the ball.
Answer:

The component of velocity v0 along common tangential direction v0 sin α will remain unchanged. Let v be the component along a common normal direction after collision. Applying, Relative speed of separation = e (Relative speed of approach) along a common normal direction, we get v = ev0cos α

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Let V Be The Component Along Common Normal Direction After Collision

Thus, after collision components of velocity v’ are v0 sin α and ev0 cos α

⇒ \(v^{\prime}=\sqrt{\left(v_0 \sin \alpha\right)^2+\left(e v_0 \cos \alpha\right)^2}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass After Collision Components Of Velocity V

and tan β = \(\frac{v_0 \sin \alpha}{e v_0 \cos \alpha}\)

α or tan β = \(\frac{\tan \alpha}{e}\)

Note: For elastic collision, e = 1

∴ v’ = v0 and β = α

Question 9. A ball of mass m makes an elastic collision with another identical ball at rest. Show that if the collision is oblique, the bodies go at right angles to each other after a collision.
Answer:

In a head-on elastic collision between two particles, they exchange their velocities. In this case, the component of ball 1 along the common normal direction, v cos θ becomes zero after a collision, while that of 2 becomes v cos θ.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass In Head On Elastic Collision Between Two Particles They Exchange Their Velocities

While the components along the common tangent direction of both the particles remain unchanged. Thus, the components along the common tangent and common normal direction of both the balls in tabular form are given below.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Components Along Common Tangent And Common Normal Direction Of Both The Balls In Tabular Form

From the above table and figure, we see that both the balls move at the right angle after collision with velocities v sin θ and v cos θ.

Note: When two identical bodies have an oblique elastic collision, with one body at rest before the collision, then the two bodies will go in ⊥different directions.

Variable Mass System

If a mass is added or ejected from a system, at rate μ kg/s and relative velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{rel}}\)(w.r.t. the system), then the force exerted by this mass on the system has magnitude \(\)

Thrust Force \(\left(\vec{F}_t\right)\)

⇒\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{t}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{rel}}\left(\frac{\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)\)

Suppose at some moment t = t mass of a body is m and its velocity is \(\vec{v}_r\). After some time at t = t + dt its mass becomes (m – dm) and velocity becomes.

The mass dm is ejected with relative velocity \(\mu\left|\vec{v}_{\text {rel }}\right|\)

Absolute velocity of mass ‘dm’ is therefore \(\left(\vec{v}+\vec{v}_r\right)\). If no external forces are acting on the system, the r linear momentum of the system will remain conserved, or

⇒ \(\vec{P}_{\mathrm{i}}=\vec{P}_{\mathrm{f}}\)

or \(m \vec{v}=(m-d m)(\vec{v}+d \vec{v})+d m\left(\vec{v}+\vec{v}_r\right)\)

or \(m \vec{v}=m \vec{v}+m d \vec{v}-(d m) \vec{v}-(d m)(d \vec{v})+(d m) \vec{v}+\vec{v} d m\)

The term (dm)\((\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \text { ) }\) is too small and can be neglected.

∴ \(\mathrm{m}\left(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{r}}\left(-\frac{\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)\)

Here, \(\mathrm{m}\left(-\frac{\mathrm{d} \vec{v}}{d \mathrm{dt}}\right)=\text { thrust force }\left(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{t}}\right)\)

and \(-\frac{\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = rate at which mass is ejecting or \(\vec{F}_t=\vec{v}_r\left(\frac{d m}{d t}\right)\)

Rocket Propulsion:

Let m0 be the mass of the rocket at time t = 0. m its mass at any time t and v its velocity at that moment. Initially, let us suppose that the velocity of the rocket is u.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Rocket Propulsion

Further, let \(\left(\frac{-\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)\) be the mass of the gas ejected per unit time and vrthe exhaust velocity of the gases with respect to rocket.

Usually \(\left(\frac{-\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)\) and vr are kept constant throughout the journey of the dt rocket. Now, let us write few equations which can be used in the problems of rocket propulsion. At time t = t,

1. Thrust force on the rocket Ft= vrdm \(F_t=v_r\left(\frac{-d m}{d t}\right)\)(upwards)

2. Weight of the rocket W = mg (downwards)

3. Net force on the rocket Fnet = Ft– W (upwards)

or \(F_{\text {net }}=v_r\left(\frac{-d m}{d t}\right)-m g\)

4. Net acceleration of the rocket a = \(\frac{F}{m}\)

⇒ \(\frac{d v}{d t}=\frac{v_r}{m}\left(\frac{-d m}{d t}\right)-g\)

or \(\mathrm{dv}=\frac{v_r}{m}(-d m)-g d t\)

or \(\int_u^v d v=v_r \int_{m_0}^m \frac{-d m}{m}-g \int_0^t d t\)

Thus, v = u – gt + vr ln \(\left(\frac{m_0}{m}\right)\)…(i) m

Note:

  1. Ft= vr \(\left(-\frac{\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)\) is upwards, as vr is downwards and \(\frac{\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) is negative.
  2. If gravity is ignored and initial velocity of the rocket u = 0, Eq. (1) reduces to v = vr ln \(\left(\frac{m_0}{m}\right)\)

Question 1. A rocket, with an initial mass of 1000 kg, is launched vertically upwards from rest under gravity. The rocket burns fuel at the rate of 10 kg per second. The burnt matter is ejected vertically downwards with a speed of 2000 ms-2 relative to the rocket. If the burning stops after one minute. Find the maximum velocity of the rocket. (Take g as at 10 ms-2)
Answer:

Using the velocity equation

v = u – gt + vr ln\(\left(\frac{m_0}{m}\right)\)

Here u = 0, t = 60s, g = 10 m/s2, vr= 2000 m/s, m0= 1000 kg

and m = 1000 – 10 × 60 = 400 kg

We get v = 0 – 600 + 2000 ln \(\left(\frac{1000}{400}\right)\)

or v = 2000 ln 2.5 – 600

The maximum velocity of the rocket is 200(10 ln 2.5 – 3) = 1232.6 ms-1

Linear Momentum Conservation In The Presence Of External Force.

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{ext}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

⇒ \(\vec{F}_{\text {ext }} d t=d \vec{P}\)

⇒ \(\left.\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\text {ext }}\right)_{\text {mpulsive }} \mathrm{dt}\)

∴ If \(\left.\vec{F}_{\text {ext }}\right)_{\text {mpuulise }}=0\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}=0\)

or \(\vec{P}\) is constant 94

Note: Momentum is conserved if the external force present is non-impulsive. eg. gravitation or spring force

Question 1. Two balls are moving toward each other on a vertical line that collides with each other as shown. Find their velocities just after the collision.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Two Balls Are Moving Towards Each Other On A Vertical Line Collides With Each Other

Answer:

Let the final velocity of 4 kg ball just after collision be v. Since, an external force is gravitational which is non – impulsive, hence, linear momentum will be conserved.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Linear Momentum Conservation

Applying linear momentum conservation:

2(–3) + 4= 2+ 4(v) or v = \(\frac {1}{2}\)m/s

Question 2. Three particles of masses 0.5 kg, 1.0 kg, and 1.5 kg are placed at the three corners of a right-angled triangle of sides 3.0 cm, 4.0 cm, and 5.0 cm as shown in the figure. Locate the center of mass of the system.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Three Particles Of Masses At The Three Corners Of A Right Angled Triangle

Answer:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Three Particles Of Masses At The Three Corners Of A Right Angled Triangle.

taking the x and y axes as shown.

Coordinates of body A = (0,0)

Coordinates of body B = (4,0)

Coordinates of body C = (0,3)

x – coordinate of c.m. = \(\frac{m_A x_A+m_B x_B+M_C r_C}{m_A+m_B+m_C}\)

⇒ \(\frac{0.5 \times 0+1.0 \times 4+1.5 \times 0}{0.5+1.0+1.5}\)

⇒ \(\frac{4}{3} \frac{\mathrm{cm}}{\mathrm{kg}}\)

= 1.33cm

similarly y – coordinates of c.m. = \(\frac{0.5 \times 0+1.0 \times 0+1.5 \times 3}{0.5+1.0+1.5}\)

⇒ \(\frac{4.5}{3}\)

= 1.5 cm

So, a center of mass is 1.33 cm right and 1.5 cm above particle A.

Question 3. A block A (mass = 4M) is placed on the top of a wedge B of base length l (mass = 20 M) as shown in the figure. When the system is released from rest. Find the distance moved by wedge B till block A reaches the lowest end of the wedge. Assume all surfaces are frictionless.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass The Distance Moved By The Wedge B Till The Block A Reaches At Lowest End Of Wedge

Answer:

The initial position of the center of mass

⇒ \(\frac{X_B M_B+X_A M_A}{M_B+M_B}\)

⇒ \(\frac{X_B \cdot 20 M+\ell .4 M}{24 M}\)

⇒ \(\frac{5 \mathrm{X}_{\mathrm{B}}+\ell}{6}\)

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Initial And Finial Position Of Centre Of Mass

The final position of the center of mass

⇒ \(\frac{\left(X_B+x\right) 20 M+4 M x}{24 M}\)

⇒ \(\frac{5\left(X_B+x\right)+x}{6}\)

since there is no horizontal force on the system center of mass initially = center of mass finally.

5XB+ l = 5XB+ 5x + x

l = 6x

⇒ \(\frac{\ell}{6}\)

Question 4. An isolated particle of mass m is moving in a horizontal xy plane, along the x-axis. At a certain height above ground, it suddenly explodes into two fragments of masses m/4 and 3m/4. An instant later, the smaller fragment is at y = + 15 cm. Find the position of the heavier fragment at this instant.
Answer:

As the particle is moving along the x-axis, so, the y-coordinate of COM is zero.

⇒ \(Y_M M=Y_{\frac{M}{4}}\left(\frac{M}{4}\right)+Y_{\frac{M M}{4}}\left(\frac{3 M}{4}\right)\)

⇒ \(0 \times M=15\left(\frac{M}{4}\right)+Y_{\frac{3 M}{4}}\left(\frac{3 M}{4}\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{Y_{3 M}}{4}=-5 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Question 5. A shell at rest at origin explodes into three fragments of masses 1 kg, 2 kg, and m kg. The fragments of masses 1 kg and 2 kg fly off with speeds of 12 m/s along the x-axis and 8 m/s along the axis respectively. If m kg flies off with speed 40 m/s then find the total mass of the shell.
Answer:

As initial velocity = 0, Initial momentum = (1 + 2 + m) × 0 = 0

Finally, let velocity of M = \(\vec{v}\)

We know \(|\vec{V}|\) = 40 m/s.

Initial momentum = final momentum

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Shell At Rest At Origin Explodes Into Three Fragments Of Masses

0 = \(1 \times 12 \hat{i}+2 \times 8 \hat{j}+m \vec{V}\)

⇒ \(\vec{V}=\frac{(12 \hat{i}+16 \hat{j})}{m}\)

⇒ \(|\vec{V}|=\sqrt{\frac{(12)^2+(16)^2}{m^2}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{m} \sqrt{(12)^2+(16)^2}\) = 40 {given}

⇒ \(m=\sqrt{\frac{(12)^2+(16)^2}{40}}\)

= 0.5 kg Total mass = 1 + 2 + 0.5 = 3.5 kg

Question 6. A block moving horizontally on a smooth surface with a speed of 20 m/s bursts into two equal parts continuing in the same direction. If one of the parts moves at 30 m/s, with what speed does the second part move and what is the fractional change in the kinetic energy of the system?
Answer:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Block Moving Horizontally On A Smooth Surface

Applying momentum conservation:

⇒ \(m \times 20=\frac{m}{2} V+\frac{m}{2} \times 30\)

⇒ \(20=\frac{V}{2}+15\)

So, V = 10 m/s

initial kinetic energy = \(\frac{1}{2}\)m × (20)2 = 200 m

final kinetic energy = \(\frac{1}{2} \cdot \frac{m}{2} \cdot(10)^2+\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{m}{2}(30)^2\)

= 25 m + 225 m = 250 m

fractional change in kinetic energy = \(\frac{(\text { final K. E) }- \text { (initial K. E) }}{\text { initial K.E }}\)

⇒ \(\frac{250 m-200 m}{200 m}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 7. A block at rest explodes into three equal parts. Two parts start moving along the X and Y axes respectively with equal speeds of 10 m/s. Find the initial velocity of the third part.
Answer:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Block At Rest Explodes Into Three Equal Parts

Let total mass = 3 m,

initial linear momentum = 3m × 0

Let velocity of third part = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\)

Using conservation of linear momentum:

⇒ \(m \times 10 \hat{i}+m \times 10 \hat{j}+m \vec{V}=0\)

So, \(\vec{V}=(-10 \hat{i}-10 \hat{j}) \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{sec} .\)

⇒ \(|\vec{V}|=\sqrt{(10)^2+(10)^2}=10 \sqrt{2}\) making angle 135o below x-axis

Question 8. Blocks A and B have masses of 40 kg and 60 kg respectively. They are placed on a smooth surface and the spring connected between them is stretched by 1.5m. If they are released from rest, determine the speeds of both blocks at the instant the spring becomes unstretched.

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Blocks A And B Have Masses 40 kg And 60 kg Respectively

Answer:

Let, both blocks start moving with velocity V1 and V2 as shown in Figure

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass Let Both Block Start Moving With Velocity

Since no horizontal force on the system so, applying momentum

conservation

0 = 40 V1– 60 V2

2V1 = 3V2 =……..(1)

Now applying energy conservation, Loss in potential energy = gain in kinetic energy

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} k x^2=\frac{1}{2} m_1 V_1^2+\frac{1}{2} m_2 V_2^2\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} \times 600 \times(1.5)^2=\frac{1}{2} \times 40 \times V_1{ }^2+\frac{1}{2} \times 60 \times V_2{ }^2\) …….

Solving the equation and we get, V1= 4.5 m/s, V2= 3 m/s.

Question 9. Find the mass of the rocket as a function of time, if it moves with a constant acceleration a, in the absence of external forces. The gas escaped with a constant velocity u relative to the rocket and its initial mass was m01.
Answer:

Using, Fnet = \(V_{\text {rel }}\left(\frac{-d m}{d t}\right)\)

⇒ \(F_{\text {net }}=-u \frac{d m}{d t}\) …….(1)

Fnet = ma ……(2)

Solving equation and

⇒ \(\mathrm{ma}=-\mathrm{u} \frac{\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

⇒ \(\int_{m_0}^m \frac{d m}{m}=\int_0^t \frac{-a d t}{u}\)

⇒ \(\ln \frac{m}{m_0}=\frac{-a t}{u}\)

⇒ \(\frac{m}{m_0}=e^{-a t / u}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{m}=\mathrm{m}_0 \mathrm{e}^{-\frac{a t}{u}}\)

Question 10. A ball is approaching the ground with speed u. If the coefficient of restitution is e then find out:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Ball Is Approaching To Ground With Speed U

  1. The velocity just after a collision.
  2. The impulse exerted by the normal is due to the ground on the ball.

Answer:

NEET Physics Class 11 Notes Chapter 3 Center Of Mass A Ball Is Approaching To Ground With Speed U.

e = \(\frac{\text { velocity of separation }}{\text { velocity of approach }}\)

⇒ \(\frac{v}{u}\)

velocity after collision = V = eu ……..(1)

Impulse exerted by the normal due to ground on the ball = change in momentum of the ball. = {final momentum} – {initial momentum}

= {m v} – {– mu}

= mv + mu = m {u + eu} = mu {1 + e}